CADWorx Plant User Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

Version 2013 R2 (13.2) November 2012 DICAS-PE-200007B

Copyright Copyright © 2003-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States, and other countries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD, ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product names are trademarks of their respective owners. CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright © Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensee’s use of the Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by Autodesk in addition to Intergraph.

Contents Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 15 Conventions .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Technical Support ................................................................................................................................. 16 What's New in Plant .............................................................................................................................. 18 Obsolete Commands ...................................................................................................................... 20 Online Help ........................................................................................................................................... 21 Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 23 Startup Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 23 Support Directory .................................................................................................................................. 23 MVSetup ............................................................................................................................................... 24 Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 25 Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 26 Configuration Settings .................................................................................................................... 28 Set Specification and Size .............................................................................................................. 43 Configuration Layers ...................................................................................................................... 44 Piping Rules ................................................................................................................................... 46 Convert Legacy Drawing ................................................................................................................ 51 Specification and Size ........................................................................................................................... 55 Optional Items ....................................................................................................................................... 55 Optional Component Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 55 Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 56 Spec ...................................................................................................................................................... 56 Size-Spec .............................................................................................................................................. 57 All .......................................................................................................................................................... 57 Editor ..................................................................................................................................................... 57 Change Size.......................................................................................................................................... 57 Change the size automatically ....................................................................................................... 58 Change the size manually .............................................................................................................. 58 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically ............................................................ 59 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually ................................................................... 59 Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically .............................................. 60 Change Specification ............................................................................................................................ 60 Change the specification automatically .......................................................................................... 61 Change the specification manually ................................................................................................. 61 Change the specification of a model with branches automatically ................................................. 61 Local Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 62 Modify a component ....................................................................................................................... 63 ISOGEN Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 64 Global Edit............................................................................................................................................. 68 Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 69 Mode Convert........................................................................................................................................ 70 Convert a component to a different mode ...................................................................................... 71 3D Solids ........................................................................................................................................ 71 Convert Isometric ........................................................................................................................... 71 2D Double Line ............................................................................................................................... 71


3

Contents 2D Single Line ................................................................................................................................ 71 Convert Existing ............................................................................................................................. 72 Convert to 3D enhanced................................................................................................................. 72 Convert from project data ............................................................................................................... 72 CWexplode ..................................................................................................................................... 72 Socket Weld .......................................................................................................................................... 73 Threaded ............................................................................................................................................... 73 Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 73 XREF Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 73 Palette Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 75 Spec View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 76 Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ............................................................................. 76 Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette).................................................................................. 78 Line View Palette .................................................................................................................................. 79 Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ............................................................................. 79 Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ......................................................................................... 80 Support Modeler Palette ....................................................................................................................... 81 Insert a pipe support ....................................................................................................................... 83 Insert an elbow support .................................................................................................................. 84 Insert multiple pipe supports .......................................................................................................... 84 Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) .......................................................................................... 84 Insulation View Palette .......................................................................................................................... 88 Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .......................................................................... 89 Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .............................................................................. 90 Discontinuity View Palette ..................................................................................................................... 92 Pipe Support Report ............................................................................................................................. 93 P&ID View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 94 Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)................................................................................. 94 Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) ............................................................................ 96 Insert a drawing into the project ..................................................................................................... 97 Clash View Palette ................................................................................................................................ 97 Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 98 Layers Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 99 Assembly View Palette ......................................................................................................................... 99 Create an assembly...................................................................................................................... 100 Edit an assembly .......................................................................................................................... 100 Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager ........................................................................ 101 Insert an assembly into the drawing ............................................................................................. 101 Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 101 ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 103 ISOGEN Out ....................................................................................................................................... 104 Extract ISOGEN files .................................................................................................................... 105 ISOGEN Batch .................................................................................................................................... 106 Extract batch ISOGEN files .......................................................................................................... 106 ISOGEN Supplemental ....................................................................................................................... 107 Stop Sign ............................................................................................................................................. 108 ISOGEN Start Point ............................................................................................................................ 108 Offset Tap ........................................................................................................................................... 108 Place an offset tap ........................................................................................................................ 111 PCF Out .............................................................................................................................................. 112

4


Contents Extract piping component files ..................................................................................................... 112 PCF In ................................................................................................................................................. 112 Tap ...................................................................................................................................................... 112 Place a tap .................................................................................................................................... 113 ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure .............................................................................................. 113 ISOGEN Information ........................................................................................................................... 113 Material List Definition .................................................................................................................. 113 SKEY Information ......................................................................................................................... 114 End Type Information ................................................................................................................... 121 LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 123 Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 124 Line Numbering System Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 124 Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 125 Set line numbers based on a P&ID project .................................................................................. 126 Set line numbers based on the current drawing ........................................................................... 126 Set line numbers based on a component ..................................................................................... 126 Count ................................................................................................................................................... 126 Set the line count value ................................................................................................................ 127 Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 127 Decrement........................................................................................................................................... 127 Assign ................................................................................................................................................. 127 Assign line numbers ..................................................................................................................... 128 Annotate .............................................................................................................................................. 128 Label components with line numbers ........................................................................................... 128 Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 129 Set the current line number to that of a component ..................................................................... 129 Line Isolate .......................................................................................................................................... 129 Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 131 Bill of Material Setup ........................................................................................................................... 132 Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 133 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 133 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 133 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 134 BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ................................................................................ 134 Cut Pipe Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................... 134 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 135 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 136 Total Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 136 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 137 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 137 Single Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 138 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 139 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 139 Export Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 139 Import Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141 Delete Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................... 141 Tag Toggle Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141 Tag Location ....................................................................................................................................... 141 Insert Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 142 Setup Live Database ........................................................................................................................... 142


5

Contents Export Pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 143 Select Item Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 144 Import Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 145 Audit Pipe Database ........................................................................................................................... 145 Synchronize Pipe Database ................................................................................................................ 146 C.G. Generator.................................................................................................................................... 147 Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 149 Auto Connect ...................................................................................................................................... 150 Group On/Off....................................................................................................................................... 150 Weld Size ............................................................................................................................................ 151 Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe ............................................................................. 151 Top Works Add ................................................................................................................................... 151 Top Works Change ............................................................................................................................. 151 System Out ......................................................................................................................................... 152 Generate a CAESAR II input file .................................................................................................. 152 User Shapes ....................................................................................................................................... 153 Create a user shape file ............................................................................................................... 157 Edit an existing user shape .......................................................................................................... 158 Create a user shape from points .................................................................................................. 162 Create a user shape from a polyline ............................................................................................ 164 Create a user shape from a block ................................................................................................ 165 Create a 3D user shape ............................................................................................................... 167 Create a 2D user shape ............................................................................................................... 168 Create a 2D single line user shape .............................................................................................. 170 Add a user shape to a specification ............................................................................................. 171 Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 172 Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing ..................................................................... 172 Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 173 Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 173 System In ............................................................................................................................................ 174 Read a CAESAR II input file ......................................................................................................... 175 Elbow Centerline ................................................................................................................................. 175 ISO Flag .............................................................................................................................................. 175 Dim Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 175 Adjust a dimension to match a pipe ............................................................................................. 176 Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension .................................................................................. 176 System Visibility .................................................................................................................................. 177 2D Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 179 2D Representation .............................................................................................................................. 179 Create a 2D representation .......................................................................................................... 180 2D Representation Hidden .................................................................................................................. 180 Create a 2D representation with hidden lines .............................................................................. 180 Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 180 Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181 Zoom Lock .......................................................................................................................................... 181 Turn on the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182 Turn off the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182 Zoom Factors ...................................................................................................................................... 182

6


Contents Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 183 Auto Gasket ........................................................................................................................................ 183 Place a gasket automatically ........................................................................................................ 183 Place a gasket manually............................................................................................................... 184 Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 184 Place stud bolts automatically ...................................................................................................... 184 Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 184 Auto Weld............................................................................................................................................ 185 Place weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 185 Place weld gaps manually ............................................................................................................ 186 Weld Total ........................................................................................................................................... 186 Count weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 186 Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 187 Place standard stud bolts ............................................................................................................. 187 Non Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Place nonstandard stud bolts ....................................................................................................... 187 RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 189 Auto Route .......................................................................................................................................... 189 Start a new route .......................................................................................................................... 190 Continue Routing .......................................................................................................................... 191 Router ................................................................................................................................................. 191 Router commands ............................................................................................................................... 192 Buttweld LR .................................................................................................................................. 192 Buttweld SR .................................................................................................................................. 193 Threaded ...................................................................................................................................... 193 Socket Weld ................................................................................................................................. 194 Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 195 Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 196 Place automatic dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196 Horizontal ............................................................................................................................................ 196 Place horizontal dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196 Vertical ................................................................................................................................................ 197 Place vertical dimensions ............................................................................................................. 197 Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 197 Set the Elevation .......................................................................................................................... 197 Rotated ................................................................................................................................................ 198 Place rotated dimensions ............................................................................................................. 198 Horizontal with Tail .............................................................................................................................. 198 Place horizontal tailed dimensions ............................................................................................... 198 Vertical with Tail .................................................................................................................................. 198 Place vertical tailed dimensions ................................................................................................... 199 Change ................................................................................................................................................ 199 Change the Elevation ................................................................................................................... 199 Component.......................................................................................................................................... 199 Place component annotation ........................................................................................................ 200 Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 200 Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 200 Coordinates ......................................................................................................................................... 200 Place coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 201 Tick Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 201


7

Contents Place tick marks ........................................................................................................................... 202 ISO Text .............................................................................................................................................. 202 Height .................................................................................................................................................. 202 Graphics / Pipe Ends............................................................................................................................... 203 System Prompts .................................................................................................................................. 204 Section ................................................................................................................................................ 206 Place a section graphic ................................................................................................................ 206 Detail ................................................................................................................................................... 207 Place a detail graphic ................................................................................................................... 207 Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 208 Place a plan graphic ..................................................................................................................... 208 Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 209 Place an elevation graphic ........................................................................................................... 209 Arrow ................................................................................................................................................... 210 Place an arrow head graphic ........................................................................................................ 210 Weld .................................................................................................................................................... 211 Place a weld symbol graphic ........................................................................................................ 211 ISO ...................................................................................................................................................... 211 Place an isometric symbol graphic ............................................................................................... 213 Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 213 Place a miscellaneous graphic ..................................................................................................... 214 Instrument ........................................................................................................................................... 214 Place an instrument graphic ......................................................................................................... 215 Dots ..................................................................................................................................................... 215 Place a weld dot graphic .............................................................................................................. 216 Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 217 Change Layer...................................................................................................................................... 218 Change the layer associated with an object ................................................................................. 218 Set Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 218 Set the active layer ....................................................................................................................... 218 Delete Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 218 Delete a layer ............................................................................................................................... 219 Layer Off ............................................................................................................................................. 219 Turn off a layer ............................................................................................................................. 219 Layer On ............................................................................................................................................. 219 Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command .............................................................. 219 Match Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 219 Match an object's layer ................................................................................................................. 220 Isolate Layer........................................................................................................................................ 220 Display only the layer associated with an object .......................................................................... 220 Un-Isolate Layer .................................................................................................................................. 220 Turn on all layers .......................................................................................................................... 220 Previous .............................................................................................................................................. 220 Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 221 Reinforcing Pad................................................................................................................................... 222 Insert a reinforcement pad ........................................................................................................... 222 Reinforcing Saddle .............................................................................................................................. 222 Insert a reinforcement saddle ....................................................................................................... 223

8


Contents Translational........................................................................................................................................ 223 Place a translational restraint ....................................................................................................... 223 Anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 224 Place an anchor ............................................................................................................................ 224 Spring Hanger ..................................................................................................................................... 224 Place a spring hanger................................................................................................................... 225 Rotational ............................................................................................................................................ 225 Place a rotational restraint ............................................................................................................ 225 Snubber ............................................................................................................................................... 226 Place a snubber ............................................................................................................................ 226 Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 226 Place a guide ................................................................................................................................ 226 UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 227 Point and Shoot UCS .......................................................................................................................... 227 Flat ...................................................................................................................................................... 229 UCS Next ............................................................................................................................................ 230 Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 230 North ................................................................................................................................................... 230 South ................................................................................................................................................... 231 West .................................................................................................................................................... 231 East ..................................................................................................................................................... 232 UCS Object ......................................................................................................................................... 232 Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 233 Shapes ................................................................................................................................................ 233 Wide Flange Shapes .................................................................................................................... 236 Channel Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 237 Angle Shapes ............................................................................................................................... 238 Tee Shapes .................................................................................................................................. 239 Pipe Shapes ................................................................................................................................. 240 Tube Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 241 Flat Bar Shapes ............................................................................................................................ 242 Round Bar Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 243 Channel Shape with Lip................................................................................................................ 244 Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 245 Z Shapes ...................................................................................................................................... 246 Angle Double Shape..................................................................................................................... 247 Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 249 Plate .................................................................................................................................................... 250 Place plate by points .................................................................................................................... 251 Place plate by closed polyline ...................................................................................................... 251 Place plate by curves ................................................................................................................... 252 Base Plate ........................................................................................................................................... 252 Place a base plate ........................................................................................................................ 254 Place a base plate with holes ....................................................................................................... 254 Steel Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 255 Set Size by Component ...................................................................................................................... 257 Generic Attachment ............................................................................................................................ 257 User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 258


9

Contents Loft ...................................................................................................................................................... 260 Single Line Steel ................................................................................................................................. 261 Frame Creation ................................................................................................................................... 268 Create a new frame configuration ................................................................................................ 269 Edit a frame configuration ............................................................................................................ 270 Place a frame in the drawing ........................................................................................................ 270 Frame Annotation................................................................................................................................ 270 Ladder ................................................................................................................................................. 271 Place a ladder interactively .......................................................................................................... 272 Place a ladder using key-ins ........................................................................................................ 273 Place a ladder with a cage ........................................................................................................... 273 Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 273 Place hand rail by points .............................................................................................................. 274 Place hand rail by polyline ............................................................................................................ 275 Stair ..................................................................................................................................................... 275 Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 279 Cope .................................................................................................................................................... 280 Miter .................................................................................................................................................... 280 Cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 281 Cut members by line..................................................................................................................... 281 Cut members by three-point plane ............................................................................................... 281 Union ................................................................................................................................................... 282 Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 282 Global Edit........................................................................................................................................... 286 Global Edit All...................................................................................................................................... 287 Annotate Component .......................................................................................................................... 289 Convert Solid....................................................................................................................................... 289 Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 290 Select Control...................................................................................................................................... 290 Auto Cope ........................................................................................................................................... 290 Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 291 Steel BOM Setup ................................................................................................................................ 292 Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 293 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 293 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 293 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 293 Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 294 Cut Steel Bill of Material ...................................................................................................................... 294 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 295 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 295 Total Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................... 296 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 297 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 297 Single Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 297 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 299 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 299 Export Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 299 Setup Live Database Steel ................................................................................................................. 300 Export Steel......................................................................................................................................... 301 Import Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 301

10


Contents Audit Steel Database .......................................................................................................................... 302 Synchronize Steel Database ............................................................................................................... 302 Export Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303 Import Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303 CG Generator...................................................................................................................................... 304 HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 305 HVAC .................................................................................................................................................. 306 Add an HVAC shape to the drawing............................................................................................. 308 Modify an HVAC shape ................................................................................................................ 308 HVAC Shapes Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 308 Place an HVAC shape from the catalog ....................................................................................... 310 Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog ..................................................................................... 310 User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 310 Place a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................... 313 Modify a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................. 313 Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 313 Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 314 Modify a generic attachment ........................................................................................................ 314 Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 314 GC Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 315 Edit HVAC components globally .................................................................................................. 315 HVAC BOM Setup............................................................................................................................... 315 Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 317 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 317 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 317 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 317 Cut HVAC Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 318 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 319 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 319 Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 319 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 320 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 320 Single HVAC Bill of Material ............................................................................................................... 321 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 322 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 322 Data Remove ...................................................................................................................................... 322 Remove CADWorx data from components .................................................................................. 322 Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 322 Change the layers associated with HVAC components ............................................................... 323 Export HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 323 Export CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 323 Import HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 324 Import CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 324 Audit HVAC Database ........................................................................................................................ 324 Audit the HVAC database ............................................................................................................ 324 Synchronize HVAC Database ............................................................................................................. 325 Synchronize the HVAC database ................................................................................................. 325 Toolbars.................................................................................................................................................... 327 Accessing and Docking the Toolbars.................................................................................................. 327 Aliases and Command Names ........................................................................................................... 328


11

Contents Connecting to components ................................................................................................................. 328 Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 328 Plane versus Isometrics view modes .................................................................................................. 328 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling ....................................................................................................... 329 Buttweld .............................................................................................................................................. 329 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 333 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 349 Flanges ............................................................................................................................................... 361 Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................................ 362 Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................................. 364 Blind Flange .................................................................................................................................. 365 Socket Type Flange...................................................................................................................... 366 Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................................... 367 Lap Joint Flange ........................................................................................................................... 369 Stub End ....................................................................................................................................... 369 Long Weld Neck ........................................................................................................................... 370 Reducing Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................. 370 Reducing Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................... 372 Reducing Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................ 373 Flgd/BW Valves................................................................................................................................... 375 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 376 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 386 Lined ................................................................................................................................................... 389 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 391 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 393 Fiberglass ............................................................................................................................................ 394 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 397 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 405 Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 412 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 419 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 435 Victaulic ............................................................................................................................................... 447 Threaded/Socket ................................................................................................................................. 450 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 455 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 470 Thrd/SW Valves .................................................................................................................................. 481 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 484 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 493 Gaskets, Etc. ....................................................................................................................................... 495 Gasket .......................................................................................................................................... 496 Weld Gap ...................................................................................................................................... 497 Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 497 Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 498 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 500 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 503 Operators ............................................................................................................................................ 504 Line Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 504 UCS ..................................................................................................................................................... 505 Steel .................................................................................................................................................... 505 Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 507 Palettes ............................................................................................................................................... 509

12


Contents Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 511 Editing Component Data Files ............................................................................................................ 511 AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 513 Modifying a User Profile ...................................................................................................................... 513 Creating a Base Profile ....................................................................................................................... 514 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant .............................................. 514 Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ............................................................... 516 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 517


13

Contents

14


Preface This document provides command reference information and workflows for CADWorx Plant. We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at: [email protected]. Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer https://crmweb.intergraph.com. Intergraph® gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as needed for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution outside your company.

Conventions Before reviewing this guide, it is important to understand the terms and conventions used in the documentation. Use the information below to identify the convention and the type of information. Convention

Type of Information

[Product Folder]

The CADWorx installation folder on your computer, for example, C:\CADWorx. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this notation is used.

[AutoCAD Folder]

The AutoCAD installation folder on your computer, for example, C:\AutoCAD 2000i. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this notation is used.

[CD-DRIVE]

The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM drive letter anywhere this notation is used.

Command Line

Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD command line.

User Responses

User responses to command prompts.

Commands

CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.

Options

Command line options.

CAPITALS

AutoCAD system variables or keywords.

Key + Key

Key combinations for which you must press and hold down one key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P or ALT+F4.


15

Preface

Technical Support For the latest information on CADWorx Plant, visit Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions (http://www.coade.com/). For current on-line support information, including knowledge base, technical tips, and downloads, visit eCustomer (https://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu). In order to provide technical support, Intergraph CAS needs to know what version of CADWorx, AutoCAD, and Windows you are using. To determine this information, follow the steps outlined for the product you are using: CADWorx Product

Steps

Plant, P&ID, fieldPipe, or Steel

  

Equipment or PV Fabricator

  

Run the CADWORXABOUT command. A dialog box opens and displays the version information. Close the dialog box to send the required information to the AutoCAD command line. Copy the information from the command line, and email it to Intergraph CAS. Run the EQUIPABOUT command. A dialog box opens and displays the version information. Close the dialog box to send the required information to the AutoCAD command line. Copy the information from the command line, and email it to Intergraph CAS.

Internet Publisher

Version information is displayed at the AutoCAD command line when you start the software.

Datasheets

Click Help > About to display a dialog box that contains the required information.

In addition to the information above, the table below lists the additional files that are usually required to assist Intergraph CAS in resolving your technical issues: CADWorx Product

Additional Files Required by Intergraph CAS Support

CADWorx Plant (Piping, Steel, HVAC)

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

 

CADWorx Plant (component data file creation)

16

If the model consists of several line numbers, indicate in the email which line numbers you are having issues with. If the model consists of many drawing files with dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP file of all the drawings used in the master model.

Email information about the part's dimension from the manufacturer's catalog.


Preface CADWorx ISOGEN

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files, any isometrics generated by ISOGEN, and the ISOGEN style files.

 

If the model consists of several line numbers, indicate in the email which line numbers you are having issues with. The ISOGEN.FLS file located in the ISOGEN style folder lists all the files used (*.OPL, *.MLS, *.FLS, *.DDF, *.POS, *.ALT, *.DWG*.DXF, *.FDF, *.ATT). Email all files listed in the ISOGEN.FLS file, including the ISOGEN.FLS file.

CADWorx Equipment


CADWorx Equipment to PV Elite interface

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and PV Elite input file (*.PVI).

PV Fabricator

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and PV Elite input file (*.PVI).

CADWorx P&ID or CADWorx IP

Email the complete P&ID project, which includes Project.CFG, Database.TBL, Map.TBL, and all the DWG, and MDB files. Usually, all of these files are located in one folder.

  

CADWorx Steel




CADWorx Datasheets

If the model consists of many components, indicate in the model which components or location you are having issues with.

Email the datasheets MDB file and any datasheet file generated (XLS).




If the project has many P&ID drawing files, indicate which P&ID drawings and components you are having issues with. If you are experiencing database errors, include the file [Product Folder]\P&ID\System\Sql_Error_Log.TXT. If you are emailing MDB files, use a compression utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have restrictions on transmitting MDB attachments.

If emailing MDB / XLS files, use a compression utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have restrictions on transmitting MDB / XLS attachments.

17

Preface CADWorx Plant to CAESAR II interface

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and CAESAR II input file (*._A, *.C2).



 

Run the CADWorx GETALLSPECDATAFILES command to copy all specifications and data files used in the model into sub-folders under where the model drawing file is located. Zip the contents of these folders and email the ZIP file to Intergraph CAS Support. If the model consists of several line numbers, indicate in the email which line numbers you are having issues with.

CADWorx Design Review or CADWorx Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files. Design Create  If the model consists of several line numbers, indicate in the email which line numbers you are having issues with.  If the model consists of many drawing files with dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP file of all drawings used in the master model. CADWorx Design Viewer

 



Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and the *.CDR file.

If you are attaching large or multiple files to your eCustomer log, use a compression utility such as WinZIP. If you cannot attach your drawing files, then try to duplicate the issue in a new drawing with as few components as possible. If the issue can be duplicated in a new drawing, attach the duplicate drawing to Intergraph CAS. For hardware lock issues, first verify that you have an Intergraph CAS hardware lock. CADWorx Plant Professional, CADWorx P&ID, CADWorx P&ID Professional, CADWorx Plant Ductile Iron, and CADWorx Plant Sanitary use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for licensing. CADWorx Steel, CADWorx Steel Professional Plus do not use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for licensing. For more information about hardware locks, see CADWorx Hardware Lock Identification in the CADWorx Installation Guide.

What's New in Plant Version 2013 R2 (13.2)  This user's guide has had the following changes for this release.

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R2 - November 2012: Program 

18

You can now convert CADWorx legacy drawings using CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 51) and CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box (on page 52).


Preface 







 



You can now review drawings for legacy components using REVIEWLEGACYCOMPONENTS. For more information, see Find Legacy Components Dialog Box (on page 54). You can now have CADWorx automatically add couplings between components with the Apply Auto Coupling Rule. For more information, see Apply Auto Coupling Rule (on page 49) in Piping Rules (on page 46). You can now have CADWorx automatically check the line number when inserting components in a line with the Apply Line Number Rule. For more information, see Apply Line Number Rule (on page 50) in Piping Rules (on page 46). You can now decide which items CADWorx automatically updates when using the Change Size, Change Spec, or automatic update of data options with the Apply Change Data Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule (on page 51). You can now have CADWorx audit your data on startup to check for removed XDATA using AuditDataOnStartup variable. For more information, see AuditDataOnStartup (on page 30). You can now see which components have had XDATA removed by using the CWSHOWNOXD command. For more information, see Show Removed XDATA (on page 30). You can now restore XDATA to components that have had XDATA removed by using the CWADDXD command. For more information, see Restore XDATA (on page 31).

Manual 

A new topic was added detailing connection points and SKEY for ISOGEN export when dealing with user shapes. For more information, see ISOGEN Export Options (on page 159).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R1 - July 2012:    

   

  

You can display help by typing MANUAL on the command line. For more information, see Online Help (on page 21). You can now select your drawing environment type by the Drawing Prototype variable. For more information, see Drawing Prototype (on page 30). You can now convert components into 3D Enhanced mode. For more information, see Convert to 3D enhanced (on page 72). You can now update the project data of components in your drawing by using the CONVERTFROMPRJDATA command. For more information, see Convert from project data (on page 72). You can now change CADWorx Components to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata by using the CWEXPLODE command. For more information, see CWexplode. (on page 72). You can now edit the assembly path of an assembly using the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS command. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 101). You can now redefine connection points for a user shape by using the EDITUSERSHAPE command. For more information, see Edit by redefining connection points (on page 159). You can now use the PIPW1 (Buttweld pipe), PIPF1 (Socket Weld or Threaded pipe), and PIPFL1 (Flanged pipe) commands to draw single pipe components. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333). ElbowCenterLines are only available in 2D and Isometric modes. For more information, see ElbowCenterLine (on page 34). Detail information has been added to LayerByLineNumber. For more information, see LayerByLineNumber (on page 35). You can now reload a project file after changes have been made by clicking Reload File. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).


19

Preface 

 

You can now stop xdata from appearing in the bill of materials or components by using the CONVERTEXISTING command. This command was previously known as the EXIST command. For more information, see Convert Existing (on page 72). You can now refresh your project from changes made to your selected specification by clicking Reload*.prj File. For more information, see Spec View Tab (on page 76). You can now reload the global file by right clicking and selecting Reload Global File. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 - March 2012:      

    

You can now change the size of components by using the CHANGESIZE command. For more information, see Change Size (on page 57). You can now change the specification of components by using the CHANGESPEC command. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 60). You can now create assemblies using the CADWorx Assembly Manager. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99). You can now auto route all components using the ROUTE command. For more information, see Auto Route (on page 189). You can now set Piping Rules for CADWorx. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) in Setup (on page 26). Toolbars (on page 327) contain more information on how to model in 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329), Plane versus Isometrics view modes (on page 328), the Compass (on page 328), and on Connecting to components (on page 328) for the new features in CADWorx. You can now change the variable setting in the Configuration Settings in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28). You can now set your specification and size in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43). You can now update your configuration layers in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Configuration Layers (on page 44). CADWorx now incorporates a new Spec Editor program. For more information see Editor (on page 57) or the Spec Editor Users Guide. Updated all panels and toolbars to reflect changes throughout the software.

Obsolete Commands These commands are no longer available in CADWorx Plant.

20

AUTOISO

BREAKDIST

CLASSICCLASH

C2ISO

C2MULTI

C2TEXT

CONVERTCL

ELEV2PLAN

ENDBREAK

ENDFLG

ENDHIDDEN

ENDPIPE

ENDPLAIN

EXIST

GEARELEV

HEAD

INSERTMODE

INSULATION

ISOCFG

ISOOUT

LEVERELEV

LINEPIPE

NODEPLACE

NORHTELEV

OFFSETCL

OPERPLAN

OSYELEV


Preface PIPEIN

PIPEOUT

PUMP

RECT

ROLLEDFLG

ROLLEDPLAIN

SETANGLE

SOUTHELEV

SPECCHG

SPECCHGTOGGLE

TANK

VESSEL

VESSELOD

WESTELEV

3DFOLLOW

Online Help To access the CADWorx Plant Help, type MANUAL on the command line, and then press ENTER. This help file includes the Plant book, the Spec Editor book, and the CADWorx Plant Tutorial.


21

Preface

22


SECTION 1

Setup Before you begin using CADWorx Plant, you need to set options and some basic configuration tasks. Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project (.prj) file in the Spec Editor before modeling begins.

In This Section Startup Defaults ............................................................................. 23 Support Directory ........................................................................... 23 MVSetup ........................................................................................ 24

Startup Defaults When starting CADWorx Plant for the first time, you are prompted for the system of measurement to use in the drawing. This dialog box only displays the first time you start CADWorx. After that, the configuration file name and location is stored in the registry. The following options are available:  Imperial Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Imperial.cfg file.  Metric Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.  Metric Measurements - Metric Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.

Support Directory Drawings in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder should not be opened with CADWorx Plant. If a drawing is started in this folder, an error displays indicating that the software should not be run from this location. This stops CADWorx from initializing or preparing the support drawings. Directly open AutoCAD to modify these drawings. To create a base profile, see Creating a Base Profile (on page 514).


23

Setup

MVSetup Plant menu: Utility > MVSetup Plant uses the MVSETUP.LSP file supplied by AutoCAD. The software also supplies a simplified version of the MVSETUP.DFS file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. If this file is deleted, the software recreates it. The MVSETUP.DFS file can be modified to include additional title blocks. Plant uses these title blocks with the Setup (on page 26) function. The MVSetup routine has options that allow you to add and delete title blocks. Plant supplies its own title blocks for your convenience. Plant title blocks have attributes attached for ease of labeling.

24


SECTION 2

Setup Size/Spec Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec Command Name

Command Line

Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

SETUP

Main Size - Specifies the specification, and the main and reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSIZE, SETSPEC

Optional Items - Places a component when the component type in the specification has an optional component. For more information, see Optional Items (on page 55).

SPECOPTION

Size - Sets the main and reduction size by selecting a component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).

COMP2SIZE

Spec - Sets the current specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).

COMP2SPEC

Size-Spec - Sets the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Size-Spec (on page 57).

COMP2SIZESPEC

Editor - Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new SPECEDIT specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77). Change Size - Modifies the size of the components selected. For more information, see Change Size (on page 57).

CHANGESIZE

Change Specification - Modifies the specification of the components selected. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 60).

CHANGESPEC

Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62). Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).

GCEDIT

3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D Solids (on page 71). Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).


CONVERTISO

25

Setup Size/Spec Panel 2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).

CONVERTDOUBLE

2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).

CONVERTSINGLE

Socket Weld - Sets the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 73).

—

Threaded - Sets the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Threaded (on page 73).

—

Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more information, see Settings (on page 73).

CURRENT

Xref Edit - Views sizes or information within the component XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 73).

XCEDIT

Spec Change Toggle - Turns the TAG value update on or off. SPECCHGTOGGLE

Setup CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup Setting toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Setup Command line: SETUP Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing. This command displays the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box.

26


Setup Size/Spec Panel CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing.

Current Drawing - Displays the current default values for Specification / Size. Sets the Colors, Drawing Mode, and Fitting Mode.  Specification / Size - Displays the current settings for the specification and size:  Main Size - Displays the main size set for the drawing.  Reduction Size - Displays the reduction size set for the drawing.  Specification - Displays the specification set for the drawing.  Colors - Sets the default colors in the drawing:  Compass - Sets the compass color. The compass can also be turned off here.  Dimension - Sets the dimensions color. The dimensions can also be turned off here.  Highlight - Sets the highlight color.  Drawing Mode - Sets the default drawing mode:  3D Solids - Draws components in 3D mode.  2D Double Line - Draws components in 2D with double lines mode.


27

Setup Size/Spec Panel  

2D Single Line - Draws components in 2D with a single line mode. 3D Enhanced - Draws components in 3D enhanced mode.

You can convert the drawing to another mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70).  Fitting Mode - Specifies the fitting mode for hub-based components. Select one of the following:  Socket - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.  Threaded - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section of the specification. Configuration Settings - Sets the values for the configuration. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28). Specification / Size - Sets the specification and sizes of the drawing. Specification must be set before sizes can be set. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43). Configuration Layers - Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers. Piping Rules - Sets the piping rules in the drawing. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46). Save As - Saves the current configuration. Load - Loads a saved configuration. Apply & Close - Accepts the settings and closes the dialog box. Settings are immediately applied to the current drawing. Cancel - Cancels the operation. Help - Displays the CADWorx Plant Users Guide help file.

Configuration Settings Specifies values for the selected configuration setting. 

The default drawing template, Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt for metric) is also stored in the registry. Each time the software is started, the default template is used.  The drawing parameters are setup during installation for imperial or metric in the setup profile. If you want to change the configuration setting to the drawing parameters, use the SystemMeasure (on page 41) variable to change the drawing settings. Configuration Settings - Displays variables to change. Change variable values in the text box list. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28). If the configuration settings permission is set to read-only, only the Cancel button is available.

Startup Variables Provides default drawing and component values. You can modify the variables in the configuration setting as needed. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28). The most recent configuration settings are stored in the registry and are used the next time you start Plant.

28


Setup Size/Spec Panel Topics Drawing Prototype ......................................................................... 30 AlphaSizeControl ........................................................................... 30 AuditDataOnStartup ....................................................................... 30 AutoDimensionBox ........................................................................ 31 BomBoltControl .............................................................................. 31 BomScheduleDirection .................................................................. 32 BomScheduleSpacing ................................................................... 32 BomTagGridFactor ........................................................................ 32 BomTagOptimize ........................................................................... 32 BomTagRadiusFactor .................................................................... 32 BomTagSpacingFactor .................................................................. 32 BoltRoundControl .......................................................................... 33 CADWorxMaterial .......................................................................... 33 CAESARMaterial ........................................................................... 33 CAESARMemory ........................................................................... 33 CAESARTolerance ........................................................................ 33 CAESARVersion ............................................................................ 34 DataBaseCodesISOGEN ............................................................... 34 DimensionsExcludedSlope ............................................................ 34 DimensionsExistingISOGEN ......................................................... 34 ElbowCenterLine ........................................................................... 34 FittingWidth .................................................................................... 35 HVACLibraryDirectory ................................................................... 35 ISOGENDefaultStyle ..................................................................... 35 LanguageFile ................................................................................. 35 LayerByLineNumber ...................................................................... 35 LibraryDirectory ............................................................................. 37 LineNumberSystem ....................................................................... 37 PipeDescriptionCat ........................................................................ 38 PipeSupportDirectory..................................................................... 38 PipeSupportSetting ........................................................................ 38 SaveLastProfileUsed ..................................................................... 39 SingleLineWidth ............................................................................. 39 SpecificationDirectory .................................................................... 39 SpecificationDefaultProject ............................................................ 39 SpecSizeOverride .......................................................................... 39 SteelCopeBoltDistance .................................................................. 39 SteelCopeWeldDistance ................................................................ 40 SteelLibraryDirectory ..................................................................... 40 SteelNeutralAxis ............................................................................ 40 SteelPartNumberFile ..................................................................... 40 SteelRoundControl ........................................................................ 40 SteelRoundUnit .............................................................................. 41 SteelToolTipSetting ....................................................................... 41 SyncOnStartUp .............................................................................. 41 SystemMeasure ............................................................................. 41 TemplateDatabaseFile ................................................................... 41 ToolTipSetting ................................................................................ 41 TopWorksSetting ........................................................................... 42 UseObjectsFromXrefs ................................................................... 42 WeldDotSize .................................................................................. 42 WeldGapToDB ............................................................................... 42


29

Setup Size/Spec Panel Drawing Prototype Default value: English/Inch Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric Enables you to select a drawing environment type:  Metric/Metric - Uses the Metric dimensions with Metric pipe sizes.  English/Inch - Uses the Imperial dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.  Metric/Inch - Uses the Metric dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.

AlphaSizeControl Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 Controls the number of decimal places used in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to zero places no decimals in Alpha Size. Setting the variable to a value from 1 to 9 places 1 to 9 decimal places in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to 10 suppresses trailing zeros in Alpha Size. Example with a value of 0:  For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4 1/2" or 6" would be 6"  For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60 Example with a value of 3:  For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.500" or 6" would be 6.000"  For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50.000 or 60.3 would be 60.300 Example with a value of 10:  For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.5" or 6" would be 6"  For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60.3 If you want decimals to display in Alpha Size in Imperial or Metric, the recommended setting is 10.

AuditDataOnStartup Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1 Controls when CADWorx checks components for removed XDATA when opening a drawing.  0 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned off.  1 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned on. Show Removed XDATA Command line: CWSHOWNOXD Highlights components where XDATA has been removed. 1. Type CWSHOWNOXD on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER. 3. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER. Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2. The components with XDATA removed highlight in the drawing.

30


Setup Size/Spec Panel Restore XDATA Command line: CWADDXD Restores removed XDATA from a selected specification to a CADWorx component. 1. Type CWADDXD on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER. 3. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER. 4. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER. Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2. The XDATA is added to the component(s). To restore the xdata of a component, you must use the original specification from that component.

AutoDimensionBox Default value: No Allowed values: No, Yes Controls boxes around rolling offset automatic dimensions when using Automatic to Yes, a box is drawn for the rolling offset. For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

. When set

BomBoltControl Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3 Specifies bolt placement in the Plant ISOGEN bill of material schedules.  0 - Places the quantity for a set in the pre-CADWorx 2002 format, such as: QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = (8) Studs with nuts  1 - Places the quantity for total bolts, and strips the set number from the long description, such as: QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = Studs with nuts  2 - Places the quantity for a set, the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long description, such as: QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = (8) 3/4" Studs with nuts.  3 - Places the quantity for total bolts, strips the set number from the long description, places the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long description, such as: QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = 3/4" Studs with nuts When this option is set to 1 or 3, the long description of the bolt must contain the number of bolts in the set enclosed by parenthesis. The software uses the value in parenthesis as the new quantity. The number is then automatically removed from the long description when displayed in the material list.


31

Setup Size/Spec Panel BomScheduleDirection Default value: Yes Allowed values: No or Yes Specifies the direction of the bill of materials schedule.  No - Places the bill of materials schedule in the upward direction, with the column headings at the bottom.  Yes - Places the bill of materials schedule in the downward direction, with the column headings at the top.

BomScheduleSpacing Default value: 0.25 Allowed values: Positive real Controls the spacing on the bill of material schedule.

BomTagGridFactor Default value: 1.0 Allowed values: Positive real Controls the bill of material tag grid density on the drawing. When BomTagOptimize (on page 32) is set to 2, set this variable to 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0.

BomTagOptimize Default value: 2 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2 Specifies the tagging algorithm used for the bill of material.  0 - The tagging algorithm is off.  1 - The algorithm is on, but does not stack any tags.  2 - The algorithm is on. Flange, bolt, and gasket tags are stacked.

BomTagRadiusFactor Default value: 1.25 Allowed values: Positive real Controls the radius of tag bubbles. Bubbles are sized using this factor multiplied by the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE.

BomTagSpacingFactor Default value: 1.25 Allowed values: Positive real Controls how far bill of materials bubbles are spaced from the model or components within the drawing.

32


Setup Size/Spec Panel BoltRoundControl Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3 Specifies the rounding for bolt length calculations.  0 - No rounding is performed.  1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.  2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.  3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.

CADWorxMaterial Default value: No Allowed values: No or Yes Controls CADWorx material generation when using System In . For more information, see System In (on page 174).  No - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the material types in CAESAR II. The CADWorx component name is combined with the CAESAR II material type.  Yes - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the specifications. Material types from CAESAR II are ignored. The component name is defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Prgm.tbl file.

CAESARMaterial Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2 Controls CAESAR II material generation when using System Out . For more information, see System Out (on page 152).  0 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the pipe material defined in Spec Editor . This does not apply if the component was originally created in CAESAR II.  1 - Provides basic material types in CAESAR II (1-17) corresponding to the component material long description in the specification.  2 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the actual component material long description in the specification. When using CAESAR II version 3.23, only option 1 can be used.

CAESARMemory Default value: 12.0 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the amount of computer RAM used when importing a large CAESAR II input model. This variable is not required, but is helpful if the import is failing. The value is multiplied by megabytes.

CAESARTolerance Default value: 0.001 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the tolerance for items that are not transferring correctly to CAESAR II. For example, hangers placed on a skewed line sometimes fail and require a larger tolerance factor.


33

Setup Size/Spec Panel CAESARVersion Default value: 5.20 Allowed values: 5.20 or 2011 Specifies the format of the CAESAR II .c2 input file created by CADWorx. The value should match the version of CAESAR II that you are using.

DataBaseCodesISOGEN Default value: No Allowed values: No or Yes Specifies how CADWorx ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.  No - The DataBaseCodes system is not used. CADWorx Plant creates generic item code combinations for each run of ISOGEN, starting at 1 for each run. Components with identical long annotation and specification file names are given the same item-code combination.  Yes - ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system. If this option is set to Yes and a valid DataBaseCodes system is not established, bill of material generation within ISOGEN is not correct.

DimensionsExcludedSlope Default value: 10.0 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the minimum percentage slope (rise/run) for automatic dimensioning of the vertical leg of sloped pipe when using Automatic . If the pipe slope is under the specified value, then the vertical leg dimension and the associated hatched graphics for the rise are not placed. The horizontal dimension is still placed. For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

DimensionsExistingISOGEN Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2 Controls ISOGEN isometric representation of existing components.  0 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are dimensioned.  1 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are not dimensioned.  2 - Existing components are exported with solid lines and are dimensioned. Individual ISOGEN dimension settings override this setting. For more information, see ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64).

ElbowCenterLine Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0 (off) or 1 (on) Controls square elbow centerlines on elbow-type components. When set to 1, an additional square centerline is drawn without drawing square elbow graphics. These lines appear in 2D double line and Isometric modes only. You can also control this variable by setting the Elbow Centerline in CADWorx Plant menu: Utilities > Drawing Control > Elbow Centerline.

34


Setup Size/Spec Panel FittingWidth Default value: 1.0 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the appearance of all flanged, socket welded, and threaded fittings. When set to 1.0, the software draws fitting hubs or flange ODs at 100% of the width specified in their data file. This variable is useful at a value of 0.7 when drawing socket weld and threaded type hub fittings where the hubs overlap.

HVACLibraryDirectory Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\HVAC Allowed values: Valid directory name Defines the location of the data files folder used for HVAC components.

ISOGENDefaultStyle Default value: Allowed values: Full path to an Isogen.fls file Specifies the ISOGEN style used by ISOGEN Out and ISOGEN Batch . For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104) and ISOGEN Batch (on page 106). When this variable is defined, ISOGEN Out Style dialog box.

does not display the Select ISOGEN

LanguageFile Default value: English.dic Allowed values: A valid and properly formatted language file Specifies the language of all Plant dialog boxes and prompts. The specified file must be present in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder for proper operation of Plant.

LayerByLineNumber Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 Specifies the layers for component placement.  0 a. Solid: i. the layer name of the solid is based on PRJ layer entry. ii. "_" is placed in front of the layer name: For example: 150 spec is on layer _150. iii. The color of the solid is set according to the table below: Component level color PRJ

Spec level color PRJ

Spec layer color in model DWG file

Entity Color Set to By Layer

Same Color

Same Color

Same Color

Entity Color Set to component level PRJ

Same Color

Same Color

Different Color

Entity Color Set to By Layer

Same Color

Different Color

Same Color

Entity Color Set to component level PRJ

Same Color

Different Color

Different Color


35

Setup Size/Spec Panel







36

b. Center line i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iv. Any changes to Setup > Layers > Centerline Settings changes the existing centerlines in the DWG file. 1 a. Solid i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name. ii. The color of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file. b. Centerline: Same implementation as Solid. 2 a. Solid: i. The layer name of the solid is based on the Line Number name. ii. The color of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid in the DWG file. b. Centerline: i. he layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing centerline in the DWG File. 3 a. Solid i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name. ii. The color of the solid and center line has the same implementation for solid color as LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in the table above. iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file. b. Centerline: Same implementation as the Solid.


Setup Size/Spec Panel 

4 a. Solid: i. The layer name for solid is based on the Line Number name. ii. The color of the solid has the same implementation for solid color as LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in table above. iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid in the DWG file. b. Centerline: i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting. iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing centerline in the DWG file.

LibraryDirectory Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant Allowed values: Valid folder name Defines the location of the component data files folder used with a specification. Each component type has a separate sub-folder. For more information, see Specification and Data Files (on page 511). This folder can be set as read-only.

LineNumberSystem Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0 (off), 1 (on), or 2 (static) Specifies the line number system.  0 - Line numbers are manually entered.  1 - Size, spec, and count number are used for the line number  2 - Count number is used for the line number.


37

Setup Size/Spec Panel PipeDescriptionCat Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0 through 6 Specifies the addition of end types to the long description and DataBaseCodes variable for:  Small-bore threaded or socket-welded pipe when using Thrd/SW Pipe . For more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).  Nipple components when using Nipple . For more information, see Nipple (on page 456). 

Small-bore pipe that is broken by an inserted component when using Router . For more information, see Router (on page 191). The following end descriptions are provided:  BBE - Bevel x bevel  BOE-TOE - Bevel x threaded  BOE-POE - Bevel x plain  PBE - Plain x plain  POE-TOE - Plain x threaded  TBE - Threaded x threaded 0 - End types are not added to any components. 1 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe and nipples. 2 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe and nipples. 3 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe only. 4 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe only. 5 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for nipple only. 6 - End types are added to long descriptions for nipples only. This setting works in conjunction with Apply Pipe End Prep Rule. Both must be set to display, (Automatic for Apply Pipe End Prep Rule and 1 through 6 for PipeDescriptionCat) or the PipeDescriptionCat does not display on the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Apply Pipe End Prep Rule (on page 49).

PipeSupportDirectory Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport Allowed values: Valid directory name Defines the location of the pipe support parametric data files used with the current configuration settings.

PipeSupportSetting Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2 Specifies the layer for pipe support component placement.  0 - The pipe support is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.  1 - The pipe support is placed on the same layer as the connecting pipe or elbow component.  2 - The pipe support is placed on a new layer. The layer name is derived by appending the component layer name and the pipe support layer name. For example, if the pipe solid is on layer _150, and the pipe support layer name is SUPT, then the pipe support is on new layer _150SUPT.

38


Setup Size/Spec Panel SaveLastProfileUsed Default value: No Allowed values: No or Yes Specifies whether CADWorx saves the last profile used on exit. When a drawing file is double-clicked in Windows Explorer, or if AutoCAD is started using an icon without specifying any profile, AutoCAD always loads the last profile used. No - Prevents CADWorx from saving the last profile used. Yes - Allows CADWorx to save the last profile used.

SingleLineWidth Default value: 0.02 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the default width for a single line pipe.

SpecificationDirectory Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Allowed values: Valid folder Provides the location of the specifications folder. This folder can be set as read-only.

SpecificationDefaultProject Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Allowed values: Valid folder Specifies the spec default project file name. This is the data file where all the specification information for all components is stored. This file can be opened using the Spec Editor. When modeling the information is accessed using this file to create the components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

SpecSizeOverride Default value: Yes Allowed values: No or Yes Controls the ability to override component specification and size. If override is turned off, you are not able to draw out of spec or out of size. Yes - Overrides the specification and size limits. No - Limits drawing to values within specification and size limits.

SteelCopeBoltDistance Default value: 0.5 (Imperial) 15 (Metric) Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the bolted method of Cope . For more information, see Cope (on page 280).


39

Setup Size/Spec Panel SteelCopeWeldDistance Default value: 0.0 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the welded method of Cope . For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 280).

SteelLibraryDirectory Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_I ([Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_M for metric) Allowed values: Valid folder name Locates the data file used for drawing Steel. The data files can be located anywhere on the computer, local network, or wide area network. This folder can be set as read-only.

SteelNeutralAxis Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3 Specifies the location of centerlines for steel channels and angles.  0 - The centerline is drawn at the X--column value specified in the channel or angle data files.  1 - The centerline is drawn at the midpoint of the flange.  2 - The centerline is drawn on the inside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles are coped with other members.  3 - The centerline is drawn on the outside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles are mitered with other members.

SteelPartNumberFile Default value: SamplePartNumbers.dat Allowed values: Valid and properly formatted part number file Specifies the file containing part numbers that can be automatically entered for a steel member component. When a steel member is drawn, the software searches the data file for a matching member type and member name. If found, the software then retrieves the part number and saves it with the member component.

SteelRoundControl Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3 Specifies the rounding of values read from the steel data files.  0 - No rounding is performed.  1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).  2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).  3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).

40


Setup Size/Spec Panel SteelRoundUnit Default value: 0.125 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the rounding multiple of values read from the steel data files. This variable is used with SteelRoundControl (on page 40).

SteelToolTipSetting Default value: 4235 Allowed values: Positive integer Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a steel component. Click the ellipsis in the value box next to SteelToolTipSetting to open the Tool Tip Data Selection dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then displayed for those settings.

SyncOnStartUp Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2 Controls the synchronize option on opening a drawing with an external database: 0 - Turns off the synchronize option when a drawing is loaded into AutoCAD. 1 - Asks if the software should synchronize the drawing with the external database. 2 - Synchronizes the drawing with the external database without prompting. When you click Synchronize without any prompts.

, values 0 and 1 provide a prompt. Value 2 synchronizes

SystemMeasure Default value: English/Inch Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric Specifies the unit system:  Metric/Metric - Uses the metric system with metric input.  English/Inch - Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input.  Metric/Inch - Uses the metric system with nominal inch input.

TemplateDatabaseFile Default value: Pipe.mdb Allowed values: Valid Microsoft Access database file name Specifies the database file that is used with a bill of material.

ToolTipSetting Default value: 8405 Allowed values: Positive integer Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a component. Click the ellipsis next to ToolTipSetting in Configuration Settings to open the Tool Tip Data Selection dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then displayed for those settings.


41

Setup Size/Spec Panel TopWorksSetting Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0 through 4 Specifies the layers for top works component placement.  0 - Top works are not added to the valve even if a top works file is set in the specification file.  1 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is combined with the valve solid to create one solid.  2 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid is placed on the same layer as the valve solid.  3 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.  4 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid id placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings. The layer name is derived by appending the valve layer name and the top works layer name. For example, when the valve is on layer _150, and the top works layer name is TOP, the top works solid is on layer _150TOP.

UseObjectsFromXrefs Default value: Yes Allowed values: No or Yes Allows objects from Xrefs (external references) to be used during the selection process. No - Objects from Xrefs are not used. Yes - Objects from Xrefs are used for the current command.

WeldDotSize Default value: 1.0 Allowed values: Positive real Specifies the default weld dot size on single-line, butt-welded piping components.

WeldGapToDB Default value: Yes Allowed values: No or Yes Sets automatic weld gaps to database on or off. Yes - Weld gaps are shown in the Bill of Material schedule. No - Weld gaps are not shown in the Bill of Material schedule

42



Set Specification and Size CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup

> Specification / Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Main Size Setting toolbar: Main Size Setting toolbar: Specification Command line: SETSIZE, SETSPEC Displays the Set Specification and Size dialog box in which you specify a .spc drawing specification file, a main size and a reduction size. Browse - Enables you to open the project specification needed for your drawing. Reload File - Reloads the project (.prj) selected for any changes made in the specification editor. Alternatively, type RELOADPROJECTFILE on the command line and press ENTER. M - Sets the selected row as the main size. R - Sets the selected row as the reduction size. OK - Accepts the selected main and reduction sizes and closes the dialog box. Cancel - Cancels the operation. 



CADWorx Plant specifications are delivered to the [Product Folder]\\Spec folder. CADWorx P&ID also provides specifications delivered to the [Product Folder]\P&ID\Spec folder. If Plant and P&ID are used together, you should select specifications from a single folder. For more information, see SpecificationDirectory (on page 39). The list of available sizes is controlled by [Product Folder]\Plant\System\SetSize.Tbl (English/inches), SetSizeA.tbl (Metric/inches), and SetSizeM.tbl (Metric/mm).

Set Specification & Size Dialog Box 1. Click Setup > Specification / Size. Alternatively, click Main Size or type SETSPEC or SETSIZE, and press ENTER. The Set Specification & Size dialog box displays. 2. Click Browse. The Open window displays. 3. Navigate to the proper specification, and click Open. The Specification list populates. 4. Select a specification from the list. This must be done before sizes can be selected. The Main / Reduction size populates. 5. Select a main size and a reduction size from the list. They can be selected in any order. 6. Click OK. The specification and main and reduction sizes are set.


43


Configuration Layers Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers. 

The default layers are mandatory for use with Plant and cannot be deleted. See the tables below.  Layer changes made in this dialog box affect the current drawing session similar to the AutoCAD LAYER command.  The commands in this dialog box are inactive if the configuration settings permission is set to read-only. Layer Name - Specifies the layer name. The layer name can be anything that is allowed by AutoCAD. Wild card characters and spaces are not allowed. Click Update to change the name. New - Adds a new layer with a default name. New layers are created when the drawing is initialized with Plant. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column. Delete - Removes the selected layer from the list. You cannot delete default layers. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column. Linetype - Specifies the line type for the selected layer. Select a value in the Select Linetype dialog box. Line types are defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Cfm.lin and [AutoCAD Product Folder]\UserDataCache\Support\acad.lin files. Color - Displays the Select Color dialog box for selecting the color of the layer.

CADWorx Plant, Plant, PV Fabricator Layers

44

Layer#

Default Name

Layer is used for

Layer1

System

Non-graphical components

Layer2

Border

Border drawing

Layer3

BOM

BOM graphics

Layer4

Cl

Centerline of piping components

Layer5

Dim1

Dimensions

Layer6

Dim2

Dimensions

Layer7

Equip

Plant components

Layer8

Exist

Existing components

Layer9

Graph

Graphics annotations (Arrows, Section, Plan, Detail Labels)

Layer10

Steel

Steel components

Layer11

Text

Text annotations

Layer12

Viewl

Viewports

Layer13

Cl_Steel

Centerline of steel components

Layer14

HVAC

HVAC components

Layer15

Cl_HVAC

Centerline of HVAC components


Setup Size/Spec Panel Layer#

Default Name

Layer is used for

Layer16

TopWorks

Valve TopWorks solid

Layer17

Clash

Clash entity

Layer18

Supports

Pipe Support

Layer19

CADWorx1

Future use

Layer20

CADWorx2

Future use

Layer21 to (User Defined) Layer100

(User Defined)

CADWorx P&ID Layers Layer#

Default Name

Layer is used for

Layer1

System

Non-graphical components

Layer2

Border

Border drawing

Layer3

Major-1

Major Process Lines 1

Layer4

Major-2

Major Process Lines 2

Layer5

Minor-1

Minor Process Lines 1

Layer6

Minor-2

Minor Process Lines 2

Layer7

Inst-1

Instrument Lines 1

Layer8

Inst-2

Instrument Lines 2

Layer9

Elec1

Electrical Lines 1

Layer10

Elec-2

Electrical Lines 2

Layer11

Equip

Plant

Layer12

Text

Text

Layer13

Graph

Graphics

Layer14

Exist

Existing

Layer15 to (User Defined) Layer100

(User Defined)

If the Cl and Cl_Steel layers are frozen or turned off, some CADWorx commands might not function because data is stored on the centerline that is on these layers.


45


Piping Rules Sets the piping rules for the drawing. These rules govern how the drawing is affected for each piece of pipe or component drawn. The options you select affect the responses you receive from the system.

Topics Apply Size Rule ............................................................................. 46 Apply Specification Rule ................................................................ 46 Apply End Type Rule ..................................................................... 47 Apply Pipe Length Rule ................................................................. 47 Apply Weld Insertion Rule ............................................................. 47 Apply Gasket Insertion Rule .......................................................... 47 Apply Bolt Insertion Rule ............................................................... 47 Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule ........................................................... 48 Apply Pipe Healing Rule ................................................................ 48 Apply Branch Table Rule ............................................................... 48 Apply Flange Insertion Rule........................................................... 48 Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule ................................................... 48 Apply Pipe End Prep Rule ............................................................. 49 Center Line .................................................................................... 49 Apply Auto Coupling Rule .............................................................. 49 Apply Line Number Rule ................................................................ 50 Apply Change Data Rule ............................................................... 51

Apply Size Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options Sets the system to check the size of components when components are inserted. No - Does not check the size of components when components are inserted. Automatic - Checks the size of components when components are inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

Apply Specification Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options Sets the system to check the specification of components when components are inserted. No - Does not check the specification of components when components are inserted. Automatic - Checks the specification of components when components are inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

46



Apply End Type Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options Sets the system to check the connection between two components. No - Does not check the connection of components when components are inserted. Automatic - Checks the connection of components when components are inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

Apply Pipe Length Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options Sets the system to check the pipe length when pipe is inserted. No - Does not check the pipe length of components when components are inserted. Automatic - Checks the pipe length of components when components are inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

Apply Weld Insertion Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Buttweld Only, Automatic - Socket Weld Only, Automatic Buttweld and Socket Weld Specifies auto insert of weld gap to components. No - Does not insert weld gaps. Automatic - Buttweld Only - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld connections only. Automatic - Socket Weld Only - Inserts weld gaps on socket weld connections only. Automatic - Buttweld and Socket Weld - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld and socket weld connections.

Apply Gasket Insertion Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic Inserts a gasket to a component automatically when needed. No - Does not insert gaskets automatically to valves or flanges. Automatic - Inserts gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.

Apply Bolt Insertion Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic Inserts bolts to flanges automatically. No - Does not insert bolts automatically to valves or flanges. Automatic - Inserts bolts automatically to valves or flanges.


47


Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic Places trimmed buttweld elbows in the drawing when using ROUTE. No - Does not allow for trimmed buttweld elbows. Automatic - Router allows for trimmed buttweld elbows.

Apply Pipe Healing Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic Heals buttweld pipe when in-line components are erased. No - Does not heal buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased. Automatic - Heals buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased..

Apply Branch Table Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic Sets the system to check the branch table when branch components are inserted. No - Does not check the branch table. Automatic - Checks the branch table when branch components are inserted.

Apply Flange Insertion Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Use Spec Setting, Automatic - Flange Socket Weld, Automatic - Flange Threaded, Automatic - Long Weld Neck, Automatic - Flange Weld Neck, Automatic Flange Slip On, Show Options Controls the rule of automatically inserting a flange. Sets the system for automatic type and insertion of flanges. No - Does not allow for automatic insertion of a flange. Automatic - Inserts selected flange type automatically. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule Default value: Automatic - 2 Holes Allowed values: Automatic - 1 Hole, Automatic - 2 Holes, Show Options - Specify Input Angle Specifies the bolt hole orientation of a flange.

48



Apply Pipe End Prep Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options Sets the end preparation of connections in conjunction with PipeDescriptionCat. The description displays in the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box. No - Does not set the end prep of components when components are inserted. Automatic - Sets the pipe end prep of components when components are inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts to set or not set the pipe end prep.    



The PipeDescriptionCat must be set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule must be set to Automatic for the pipe end preparation descriptions to appear. If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to Automatic the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display. If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to No the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display. If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to Show Options you are prompted to set the pipe end preparation. Selecting No does not set the pipe end preparation and does not display a description. This is the case even with the PipeDescriptionCat set to 1 through 6. Selecting Yes displays the description unless the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 38).

Center Line Default value: On Allowed values: On, Off Indicates whether the centerline of the components displays.

Apply Auto Coupling Rule Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only, Automatic - All Connections, Show Options Sets the system to insert a coupling when routing components. No - Does not add a coupling when routing components. Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only - Adds a coupling when routing components with socket weld or threaded piping, when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added. Automatic - All Connections - Adds a coupling at all connections while routing. Show Options - Displays option prompts, when routing, to inset a coupling. This happens when using socket weld or threaded piping or when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.


49


Apply Line Number Rule Default value: Always Inherit Allowed values: Always Inherit, Show Options Sets the system to check the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted based on the setting in line number Setup and according to the table below. Always Inherit - Automatically inherits the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted. Show Options - Displays option prompts for inheriting the line number on in-line components when components are inserted. Line Number System Setup Apply Line Number Rule Setting Effect System Off

System On (Dynamic Size/Spec)

Always Inherit

No Line Number Rule is applied

Show Options

No Line Number Rule is applied

Always Inherit

Inherit all header/parent line number parameters except the dynamic one such as Size and Spec

Show Options

Show 3 different options:

 



System On (Static Size /Spec)

1. Exact copy of parent line number. 2. Dynamic parent line number (the same parent line number except for the size and spec). 3. Current line number setup as listed in the Line Number setup.

Always Inherit

Inherit exact copy of header/parent line number

Show Options

Show 2 options:

 

1. Exact copy of header/parent line number. 2. Current line number as shown in the Line Number setup.

For more information about Line Number System setup, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

50



Apply Change Data Rule Default value: Automatic Allowed values: Automatic, Show setting Sets the system for items that do not update when using Change Size, Change Spec, or automatic updating of new data. Automatic - Automatically updates the component with the information from the specification. Show setting - Updates only the items not selected in the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box. Show setting only displays in the Apply Change Data Rule box after selecting the items from the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 51).

Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box Enables you to select the items that you want to update from the specification when using Change Spec, Change Size, or automatic updating of new data. Automatic - Automatically updates all new data when using one of the above options.

Select data items that will NOT update with Change Size/Spec Alpha size - Turns the alpha size update off. Short Description - Turns the short description update off. Tag - Turns the tag update off. Long description - Turns the long description update off. Database Codes - Turns the database codes update off.

Change the Data Rule update 1. Select the Apply Change Data Rule ellipsis. 2. Clear Automatic. 3. Select the items that you do not want updated, and then click OK.

Convert Legacy Drawing Default value: Off Allowed values: Off, Automatic, Show Options Enables you to convert a 2012 drawing to 2013 components. Convert Mode - Sets the software to recognize whether the drawing is a legacy drawing and convert it. There are three options:  Off - Indicates the software does not convert the legacy drawing when it is opened.  Automatic - Specifies that the software automatically converts the drawing to 2013 components when you open the drawing.  Show Options - Indicates that the software prompts you to convert the drawing to 2013 components when you open the drawing. Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the 2012 components when a conversion is completed.  Yes - Indicates the software pulls data from the project file during the conversion.  No - Indicates the software pulls data from the legacy component during conversion. Refresh all open palettes to update contents after running the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command.


51


CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup > Convert Legacy Drawing and then set Convert Mode to Show Options Command line: CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS Converts the components of a legacy drawing to 2013 components. Available specifications in project - Specifies if there are any available specifications in the selected project for conversion. Legacy specification used in model - Specifies the specifications that the software uses in the legacy model. Match - Matches the selected specification in Available specifications in project to the specification listed in Legacy specification used in model. Auto Match - Automatically matches the specification used in the legacy model without selecting a specification from the Available specifications in project box. Backup current drawing - Creates a backup of the legacy drawing in the folder where the legacy drawing resides. Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the legacy components when a conversion is completed. When Use new spec data is selected, data is pulled from the selected specification in Current Project. Current Project - Specifies the current project from which the software converts the legacy drawings. Browse - Enables you to select a current project. OK - Accepts the settings and converts the model. Cancel - Cancels the legacy conversion. Help - Accesses the online help file.

Convert Legacy using Automatic option 

Set Convert Mode to Automatic. The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components when a legacy drawing is opened.

Convert Legacy using Show Options option 1. Set Convert Mode to Show Options. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 51). The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays. 2. Click Browse. The Open dialog box displays. 3. Select a PRJ file, and click Open. The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box. 4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box. 5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match. Clicking Auto Match automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto Match.

52


Setup Size/Spec Panel 6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option. OR Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created. 7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default option. OR Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing. 8. Click OK. The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.

Convert Legacy using the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command 1. Type CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS on the command line, and press ENTER. The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays. 2. Click Browse. The Open dialog box displays. 3. Select a .prj file, and click Open. The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box. 4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box. 5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match. Clicking Auto Match indicates that the software automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto Match. 6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option. OR Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created. 7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default option. OR Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing. 8. Click OK. The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.   

If you notice that a component does not convert to a 2013 component then the component may not be listed in the 2013 specification that you have chosen. The software alerts you with a message if you do not have any legacy data in the drawing. You must convert an inch drawing to an inch specification and a metric drawing to a metric specification.


53


Find Legacy Components Dialog Box Command line: REVIEWLEGCAYCOMPONENTS Enables you to search the drawing for legacy components and display the information based on the Search Options.

Search Options Tag - Finds the legacy components based on the tag. Click in the Tag box to display components filtered by tag in the Components filtered by: Tag box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific tags. Code - Finds the legacy components based on the code. Click in the Code box to display components filtered by code in the Components filtered by: Code box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific codes. Line number - Finds the legacy components based on the line number. Click in the Line Number box to display components filtered by line number in the Components filtered by: Line number box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific line numbers. Short annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the short annotation. Click in the Short annotation box to display components filtered by short annotation in the Components filtered by: Short annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific short annotations. Long annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the long annotation. Click in the Long annotation box to display components filtered by long annotation in the Components filtered by: Long annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific long annotations. Components filtered by: - Displays the findings of the Search Options. When the software detects a legacy component the information based on the search option selected, displays in the box. The heading of the Components filtered by box is dynamic and changes depending on the Search Options item you have selected. The heading also displays the number of records for each item selected. Selecting a record displays a red arrow indication the component containing the selected information in the drawing.

OK - Closes the Find Legacy Components dialog box.

54


Setup Size/Spec Panel Cancel - Cancels the Find Legacy Components dialog box. View Log File - Displays a log file of the conversions you made when using CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS.

Specification and Size Sets the specification and size using the Set Specification and Size dialog box. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

Optional Items CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Optional Items Setting toolbar: Specification Option Toggle Plant menu: Accessory > Specifications > Optional Items Command line: SPECOPTION Places a component on the drawing when the component type in the specification has an optional component (such as when a 300 lb. orifice flange is in the 150 lb. specification). Click the command to toggle between two methods: 1. The command line message is: All components will be dialoged... When a component type is selected, all components of that component type appear in the Optional component dialog box. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog Box (on page 55). 2. The command line message is: Specification dialog turned off... When a component type is selected, the default component is selected for placement on the drawing. The Optional component dialog box does not appear unless the component size is out of the specification range or the component is not allowed by the specification. You can then select a component in the range. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog Box (on page 55).

Optional Component Dialog Box Specifies components for placement. Status, start size, end size, tag, long description, and short description are displayed for each component. OK - Places the selected component on the drawing. Default - Changes the selected component to the default component.

Using SpecSizeOverride When the SpecSizeOverride (on page 39) variable is off, sizes are restricted to the specification range. If the selected size is not within the range, OK and Default are not available. If SpecSizeOverride is on, the dialog box appears if the component size is not in the range. You can then select the needed component even when it is out of range.


55

Setup Size/Spec Panel The following table summarizes the dialog box behavior. Component in specification?

Size in specification?

Dialog box appears?

SpecSizeOverride variable status

Dialog box behavior

Yes

Yes

No

Off = 0

Normal operation.

Yes

No

No

Off = 0

Error message.

Yes

No

No

On = 1

Error message, but you can override.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Off = 0

Dialog box shows all components including optional components, but does not allow override.

Yes

No

Yes

Off = 0

Dialog box shows all components but OK is not available for components not in size range.

Yes

No

Yes

On = 1

Dialog box shows all components and allows override.

No

n/a

No

Off = 0

Error message.

You can use the Spec Editor to change components to optional components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

Size CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size Setting toolbar: Size Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size Command line: COMP2SIZE Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component with the needed sizes. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.

Spec CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Spec Setting toolbar: Spec Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Spec Command line: COMP2SPEC Specifies the current specification by selecting a component using the needed specification.

56



Size-Spec CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size-Spec Setting toolbar: Size-Spec Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size-Spec Command line: COMP2SIZESPEC Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component with the needed values. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.

All Setting toolbar: All Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > All Command line: COMP2ALL Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component with the needed values. This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 2. This is the same as having the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box selected. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Editor Creates, views, and modifies specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

Change Size CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Size Command Line: CHANGESIZE Changes the size of the selected components based on available sizes. Sizes are based on the specification that you choose when initially setting up the drawing. This command has two functions Automatic or Manual. Automatic - Automatically changes the entire component to the chosen size. The Change Size command only changes the size of the line until it reaches a reducer. The software provides two options to replace a reducer to match the size change. The pipeline on the other side of the reducer maintains its size. The only way to change the size of the pipeline on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself. Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen size. When using the manual option, the software forces you to select reducers for adjacent components that are not the same size. The manual option does not stop size changes at any point based on another component. However, unless the line on the other side of a reducer is selected it is not changed.


57

Setup Size/Spec Panel Large - Changes the large side of the component and anything attached to that side. Small - Changes the small side of the component and anything attached to that side. Both - Changes both sides of the component and anything attached to those sides. Change current component - Changes the component to match the size change. add Reducing component - Displays a list of reducing components. caNcel - Does not change the size and cancels out.

What do you want to do?     

Change the size automatically (on page 58) Change the size manually (on page 58) Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically (on page 59) Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually (on page 59) Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically (on page 60)

Change the size automatically 1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for automatic. 3. Select a component. 4. Select a size from the list that appears. If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing you to start over. 5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The entire drawing changes its size.

Change the size manually When using the manual option, you must select similar components with like sizes, or the process does not work. 1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type M for manual. 3. Select the components whose size you want to change, and press ENTER when finished.

58


Setup Size/Spec Panel 4. Select a size from the list that appears. The next prompt only displays if you have selected pipe lines that do not connect to each other but have a component in-between. If you do not receive the following prompt skip step 6 and continue.

5. Select the reducers as needed. 6. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. The specific components change size and add the reducers if needed.

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically 1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for automatic. 3. Select a reducer. 4. Type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and press ENTER. 5. Select a size from the list that displays. This is based on the choice you make in step 4. If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing you to start over. 6. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The entire drawing changes its size. If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the component. If you do not change the component the process fails.

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually Use this option when you want to change the size of more than one reducer and the pipe lines to multiple sizes. 1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type M for manual. 3. Select one or more reducers and press ENTER. If you select more then one you might not be prompted for the sides of the reducer. This depends on the location of the chosen reducers. 4. If applicable, type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and then press ENTER.


59

Setup Size/Spec Panel 5. Select a size from the list. This list continues to show up for as many components as you selected. If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing you to start over. 6. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The selected components change size. If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the component. If you do not change the component the process fails.

Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically 1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for automatic. 3. Select a component. 4. Select a size from the list that displays. If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing you to start over. 5. Select all the branches in the model. If you do not select all the branches the software prompts you to change the component. If you select No, the process fails. You may also be prompted if the size does not exist. 6. Select a component, or press ENTER to finish. 7. If prompted to fix the pipe by BOP, TOP, or Current, type an option, and press ENTER. 8. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The selected system changes size.

Change Specification CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Spec Command Line: CHANGESPEC Changes the specification of the selected components. This command is based on two modes either Automatic or Manual. Automatic - Changes all the components on the selected line to the chosen specification automatically. The Change Specification command only changes the specification assigned to the system until it reaches a reducer. The software changes the assigned specification of the reducer, but the pipeline on the other side of the reducer keeps its original specification. The only way to change the pipe on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself. Depending

60


Setup Size/Spec Panel on the arrangement, this action may only change the specification of the components adjacent to the reducer but not the specification of the entire model. Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen specification.

What do you want to do?   

Change the specification automatically (on page 61) Change the specification manually (on page 61) Change the specification of a model with branches automatically (on page 61)

Change the specification automatically 1. Click Change Spec . Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for automatic. 3. Select a pipeline. 4. Select a specification. 5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The entire drawing changes its specification.

Change the specification manually 1. Click Change Spec . Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type M for manual. 3. Select the components whose specification you want to change, and press ENTER when finished. 4. Select a specification. 5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The specification assigned to the selected components is changed.

Change the specification of a model with branches automatically 1. Click Change Spec . Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for automatic. 3. Select a pipeline. 4. Select a specification. If you do not select the branches in step 5, the specification changes only for the branching components. It does not change for the branch piping. 5. Select the branches.


61

Setup Size/Spec Panel 6. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. 7.

Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component. The specification assignment for the selected system is changed. If there is a reducer in the system, the new specification assignment only applies up to and including the reducer, not the pipeline on the other side of the reducer.

Local Edit CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Local Edit Setting toolbar: Component Edit Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Local Edit Command line: CEDIT Modifies the properties of an existing component on the drawing. This command displays the Component Edit dialog box.

Component Edit Dialog Box Specifies properties for a component. Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component. Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component. Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component. Line number - Specifies the line number of the component. Tag - Specifies a tag for the component. Code - Specifies a code for the component. Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component. Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material. Length - Specifies a length for the component. Component type - Displays the type of the component. Specification - Displays the specification used by the component. If Setup is used to create an external database, Synchronize can be used to change the specification in the database. For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 142) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146). Coordinates World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the components are automatically updated along with the pipe length. Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175). Miscellaneous Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is shown as dotted and dimensioned. Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress analysis information or insulation attached.

62


Setup Size/Spec Panel BOM Item Type Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item. Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item. Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item. Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item. 

The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132) and BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).  If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld. Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit welds. OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box. Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box. ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data dialog box. ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64) Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic AutoCAD geometry. Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the data is removed. You can double-click a component to open the Component Edit dialog box.

Modify a component 1. Click Local Edit . 2. In the drawing, select a component. The Component Edit dialog box appears. 3. Modify properties as needed. 4. Click OK.


63


ISOGEN Data Dialog Box Specifies ISOGEN properties for a component.

Symbol Information  Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information.  Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN Identifier used by CADWorx and uses the value specified in Identifier.  SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information.  Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN SKEY used by CADWorx and uses the value specified in SKEY.

64


Setup Size/Spec Panel Message - Specifies the message displayed with the component on the isometric drawing.  Type - Specifies the type of graphic enclosing the message. Message Types Type

Graphic

None

No text or graphic

Unboxed

Text only

Square Pointed Round Circle

Triangle

Diamond

Double Circle

Ellipse

 Text - Specifies the message text. Spindle / Flat / Support Direction - Specifies a valve spindle direction, an eccentric reducer flat direction, or support direction.  Direction - Specifies the direction. Select North, South, East, West, Up, or Down.  Text - Specifies a text message with details on the direction. ISOGEN option switch 80 (dimension to valve centers) is only available if the valve has a spindle direction set. Flow Arrow - Specifies how flow arrows are displayed for valves.  As drawn - Displays the flow arrow in the direction that the pipe was drawn.  Opposite - Displays the flow arrow in the opposite direction.  View - Displays a preview of the flow arrow on the drawing. ISOGEN option switch 17 controls the display of flow arrows.


65

Setup Size/Spec Panel Miter Pipe Export Options - Specifies how miter pipe is exported to ISOGEN.  Pipe with Welds - Exports each straight pipe run in the component as a linear pipe piece with mitered ends and welded connections. Pipe with Welds Example Type

Graphic

None

No text or graphic

Unboxed

Text only

Square Pointed Round Circle

Triangle

Diamond

Double Circle

Ellipse

 

66

Bend - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend. Bend with Length - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend. The length of the component is also added to the Long Annotation of the component, allowing two bends with different lengths to have separate marks in the bill of material. Bend with Length Example



Other  Spool - Specifies the spool identification. This value overrides the default spool value created by ISOGEN.  Sketch - Specifies a .dwg detailed sketch to display with the isometric drawing. For more information on detailed sketches, see the Information Notes,pdf and Detailed Sketches.pdf files in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.  Dim Status - Specifies the dimensioning of individual components. Select Default, Dimensioned, Dotted Dimensioned, or Dotted Undimensioned.  Mark - Specifies the mark number for a component. End Connections and Conditions - Specifies a set of conditions for up to four ends (End 1, End 2, End 3, and End 4).  Connection Type - Specifies the type of connection on the end Connection Types Connection Types

Description

Default Condition

BS

Ball and Socket

Male

BW

Butt Weld

Unspecified

CL

Clamped

Male

CP

Compression

Female

FA

Flared

Male

FL

Flanged

Unspecified

Default


67

Setup Size/Spec Panel Connection Types

Description

Default Condition

GF

Gland

Female

GL

Glued

Female

LC

Liner (Clamped)

Male

LR

Liner (Reducing )

Male

LN

Liner (Nut)

Male

MP

Male Part Hygienic

Male

PF

Push Fit

Female

PL

Plain End

Male

SC

Screwed

Female

SW

Socket Weld

Female

 

View - Displays a red arrow at the selected end on the drawing. Male, Female, Unspecified, or None - Specifies the end condition of the selected condition type. These options are only available when the end condition of the connection type can be changed. For example, SC, SW, CP, GL, and PF allow either male or female end conditions. Unspecified is used for welded and flanged end conditions. Reference Dimensions - Specifies dimension to use as reference for the component.  On - Turns on reference dimensions.  Primary - Defines reference dimensions relative to the primary axes of the model.  Skewed - Defines reference dimension relative to the defined reference points.  Pick points - Allows you to select reference points in the drawing.  View - Displays the reference points in the drawing.  Message - Specifies text for the reference dimensions.  SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the reference dimensions. For more information, see SKEY Information.  Start Point - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the start point.  Reference Point 1 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the first reference point.  Reference Point 2 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the second reference point.

Global Edit CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Global Edit Setting toolbar: Global Component Edit Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Global Edit Command line: GCEDIT Modifies the properties of multiple components. This command displays the Global CEdit dialog box.

Global CEdit Dialog Box Specifies properties for multiple components.

68


Setup Size/Spec Panel Each property initially shows no value. Any value modified for a property is changed for all selected components. Properties that are not modified are not changed in the selected components. Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component. Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component. Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component. Line number - Specifies the line number of the component. Tag - Specifies a tag for the component. Code - Specifies a code for the component. Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component. Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material. Coordinates World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the components are automatically updated along with the pipe length. Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175). Miscellaneous Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is shown as dotted and dimensioned. Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress analysis information or insulation attached. BOM Item Type Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item. Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item. Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item. Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item. OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box. Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box. Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from the selected components, converting them to generic AutoCAD geometry.

Modify multiple components 1. Click Global Edit . 2. In the drawing, select two or more components. The Global CEdit dialog box appears. 3. Define properties as needed. 4. Click OK. The command line prompt indicates the number of updated components.


69


Mode Convert Mode convert commands change a piping component from one mode to another mode. The existing component is deleted and replaced with a component in the new mode. Many possibilities exist, such as:  2D double line to 3D solids  3D solids to 2D double line  2D single line to 2D double line  2D double line, flat to 2D double line, north  Converting to different planes  Rebuilding an existing component in the same mode or plane The specification layer name determines the layer to delete and replace. This layer name is prepended with an underscore, such as _150. Objects on other layers (without an underscore in their names) are not changed. You can convert from one plane to another by changing planes and converting the component mode.

Example The following tee was drawn once, copied to three other locations, then converted to different planes.

70


Setup Size/Spec Panel Topics Convert a component to a different mode ..................................... 71 3D Solids........................................................................................ 71 Convert Isometric ........................................................................... 71 2D Double Line .............................................................................. 71 2D Single Line ............................................................................... 71 Convert Existing ............................................................................. 72 Convert to 3D enhanced ................................................................ 72 Convert from project data .............................................................. 72 CWexplode .................................................................................... 72

Convert a component to a different mode 1. Select 3D Solids , Convert Isometric 2. Select the piping components to convert. 3. Press ENTER.

, 2D Double Line

, or 2D Single Line

.

3D Solids CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 3D Solids Setting toolbar: Solids Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 3D Solids Command line: CONVERTSOLID Converts selected components to 3D solid mode.

Convert Isometric CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Convert Isometric Setting toolbar: Isometric Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > Isometric Command line: CONVERTISO Converts selected components to isometric mode.

2D Double Line CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Double Line Setting toolbar: Double Line Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Double Line Command line: CONVERTDOUBLE Converts selected components to 2D double line mode.

2D Single Line CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Single Line Setting toolbar: Single Line Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Single Line Command line: CONVERTSINGLE Converts selected components to 2D single line mode.


71


Convert Existing Command line: CONVERTEXISTING Stops external data (xdata) from appearing in the bill of material or removes xdata from the components. After xdata is prevented or removed, the component is moved to the EXIST layer. You can also execute this command in Global Edit or Local Edit information, see Global Edit (on page 68) and Local Edit (on page 62).

. For more

If you use the CONVERTEXISTING command and you select Yes, you cannot change the components back. To change components in the existing layer, back and forth, you must select No when using this command. 1. Type CONVERTEXISTING on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select Yes to remove all data from the components. OR Select No to not remove all data. You can also do this in the Global Edit or Local Edit 3. To convert all objects on the drawings,select All objects. OR To convert a specific component, select Components only. 4. Press ENTER to finish. The components selected are converted.

dialog boxes.

Convert to 3D enhanced Command line: CONVERTENHANCED Converts the selected components to 3D enhanced mode. 1. Type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, and the press ENTER. 2. Select the components you want to convert to 3D enhanced mode, and then press ENTER. The components convert to 3D enhanced.

Convert from project data Command line: CONVERTFROMPRJDATA Converts the selected components to the project data changes made to the specification in the Spec Editor. 1. Type CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select the objects you want to convert from previous data to the new project data, and then press ENTER. The project data of the selected components is updated.

CWexplode Command line: CWEXPLODE Changes the CADWorx component to an AutoCAD 3D solid with xdata included. 1. Type CWEXPLODE on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER. 3. Select the component you want to change, and then press ENTER. Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option. The components are converted to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata included.

72



Socket Weld CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Socket Weld Setting toolbar: Socket Weld Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification. You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

Threaded CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Threaded Setting toolbar: Threaded Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section of the specification. You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

Settings CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Settings Setting toolbar: Current Settings Plant menu: Utility > Settings Command line: CURRENT Displays the current drawing settings, such as main and reduction sizes, text and dimension sizes, line and drawing modes, and specifications. This command displays the Current Settings dialog box. Most of these settings are changed using Setup page 26).

. For more information, see Setup (on

XREF Edit Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Xref Edit Command line: XCEDIT Settings toolbar: Xref Edit Views sizes or information within the component Xref. This command works in a similar fashion to the CADWorx CEDIT functionality. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62). This function uses the same dialog box as Local Edit, but it does not allow you to modify any of the values. If a modification to a component is required from within an Xref, use the AutoCAD REFEDIT command to open that part of the Xref. Then use the Local Edit command to make any modifications necessary. After the required modification is completed, close the Xref with the REFCLOSE command.


73


74


SECTION 3

Palette Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette Command Name

Command Line

Spec View - Filters the available components based on the SPECVIEW size and specification settings. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 76). Line View - Isolates components based on their line number or their specification. For more information, see Line View Palette (on page 79).

LINEVIEW

Pipe Support Modeler - Inserts pipe and elbow support components. For more information, see Support Modeler Palette (on page 81).

PIPESUPPORTVIEW

Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, INSULATIONVIEW modify, and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see Insulation View Palette (on page 88). Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette (on page 92).

DISCONTINUITYVIEW

Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 93).

PIPESUPPORTREPORT

P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table PIDVIEW in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View Palette (on page 94). Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD CLASHVIEW 3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on page 97). Assembly View - Creates an assembly for use in a drawing. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).


ASSEMBLYVIEW

75

Palette Panel

Spec View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Spec View Palettes toolbar: Spec View Plant menu: Palettes > Spec View Command line: SPECVIEW Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. SpecView also provides a quick way to change the line number settings. Plant components are typically drawn using toolbars, or by typing the command name at the AutoCAD command prompt. The CADWorx SpecView palette provides an alternate method of inserting CADWorx components.

Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 76) Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 78)

Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) Sets up the filter for the available components. Main - Specifies the main size of the component. Reduction - Specifies the reduction size of the component. Specification - Specifies the specification associated with the component. The list is based on the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) in the current configuration settings. Set Spec and Size - Displays the Set Specification & Size dialog box. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43). Start Spec Editor - Displays the Spec Editor software. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77) or the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide book. Line Numbering Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124). Line Number Drop Down Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box (on page 78). Set size, spec, and line number by component - Sets the main size, reduction size, current specification, and line number to match a component that you select. For more information, see All (on page 57). Reload *.prj File - Refreshes the changes made to the open .prj file in the specification editor. Help - Displays the help file.

76


Palette Panel

Draw pipe components 1. Select the pipe spec to use from the list. The software uses the default type (Buttweld). 2. If necessary, right-click and change the type.

3. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the pipe. The software draws the pipe using the specified type.

Draw non-pipe components 1. Select the non-pipe component type to use from the list. The software draws the component in plan view based on the current UCS. 2. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the component. The software draws the component using the specified insertion option.

Spec Editor CADWorx Plant I Tab: Setup and Size/Spec Panel > Editor Spec View Palette > Start Spec Editor Command Line: SPECEDIT Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications. Spec Editor can also be used as standalone software and can be copied to any computer. It does not require a hardware lock (ESL) or a license manager. CADWorxSpecEdit.exe is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder. When opening the Spec Editor from CADWorx, the software loads the specification that you have specified in Plant. If you want to open a different specification, then select the specific spec in Project Data. The Spec Editor stores all the components delivered with CADWorx. If you want to add a size for a component, you must first add it in the Data Table and the EndType Table in the Spec Editor. You cannot use a component size that has not been added to the catalog for the specification. CADWorx uses the SpecificationDefaultProject (on page 39) to locate the project file and access the components. Optional components can be manipulated and created in the spec editor. For more information, see the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide delivered with CADWorx.


77

Palette Panel

Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box Controls parameters for adding items to the line numbering list that appears with the line numbering system. These values are stored in the DropDownList.TXT file. This file is located in the same folder as the current configuration settings. Available Categories - Lists the categories for which you can assign dropdown items. Select an item from the list to make it the active category. Dropdown Values - Lists the assigned dropdown items for the active category. Add - Adds an item to the Dropdown Values list. Remove - Removes the selected item from the Dropdown Values list. Remove All - Removes all of the items from the Dropdown Values list.

Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) Controls parameters for customizing the appearance of the CADWorx Spec View palette. View Options Show optional components - Displays optional components in the CADWorx Spec View palette. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show all components - Displays all components listed in the specification file regardless of the current size set. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show socket weld - Displays socket-welded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show threaded - Displays threaded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show tag - Displays tags in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show long description - Displays long descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Show short description - Displays short descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette. Tree Options View 1 (No tree or categories) - Lists components in numerical order based on the Sort Sequence set for the component in the specification file. View 2 (One level tree with more categories) - Creates a category for each type of component. For example, butt-welded and socket-welded tees are listed in separate categories. View 3 (One level tree with less categories) - Creates fewer categories than View 2. For example, all tees are listed in a single category. View 4 (Two level tree with Spec Editor style view) - Displays a two-level tree that is arranged in the same sequence as the Spec Editor application. Color Options Main Size component - Specifies the color associated with main size components. Main Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with main size optional components. Reducing Size component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size components.

78


Palette Panel Reducing Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size optional components. Level 1 category - Specifies the color associated with level 1 category components. Level 2 category - Specifies the color associated with level 2 category components.

Line View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Line View Palettes toolbar: Line View Plant menu: Palettes > Line View Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate Palette Command line: LINEVIEW The Line View palette isolates components based on their line number or their specification. It also lets you locate components based on their description information. Line View does not process any entities on locked layers.

Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 79) Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 80)

Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) Controls parameters for isolating components based on their line number or specification. You can isolate an entire line number, or to isolate one line number and include surrounding buildings or equipment. If components have been hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in the Find tab. Refresh List - Refreshes the line number list in the palette. Use this option if new line numbers do not appear in the list. Show All Components - Makes all objects in the drawing visible. Select Line Number by Component - Select a component in the drawing. The software uses the line number of this component to isolate the model. Isolate Selected Line Numbers - Isolates the selected line numbers. Set Layer Options - Displays the Line View Layer Selection dialog box so that you can include or exclude certain layers when Isolate Type is set to Layer Isolate. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 99). By default, all layers are visible for line isolate. Help - Displays on-line help. Right-clicking the line number list displays the Isolate Selected Line Numbers, Show All Components, and Refresh List options. Isolate Options Line Number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing so that you can select one or more line numbers to isolate. Spec - Lists all specs used in the model so that you can select one or more specifications to isolate. Isolate Type


79

Palette Panel Full - Displays the selected CADWorx components, and hides all non-CADWorx components such as buildings, equipment, and dimensions. Partial - Displays the selected CADWorx components and all non-CADWorx components. Layer - Displays the selected CADWorx components and hides all non-CADWorx components based on the layer setup. Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive. For details on this option, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144).

Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) Controls parameters for locating components based on their description information. Click the edit boxes to refresh the list of components. Type in the boxes to dynamically filter the list of available components. If components are hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in the Find tab. Tag - Type tag text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Code - Type code text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Line number - Type line number text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Short annotation - Type short annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Long annotation -- Type long annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Id Count - Type ID count text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays. Right-Click Menu Zoom - Zooms the current model space view to the component. Double clicking in the list of components also zooms to the component. Zoom does not work with XREFs that have been inserted into the base drawing with a rotation. CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box. CEdit on an XREF component does not allow any changes to the component descriptions. Refresh - Refreshes the list in the dialog box. Use this option if new components do not appear in the list.

80


Palette Panel

Support Modeler Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Modeler Palettes toolbar: Pipe Support Modeler Plant menu: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler Command line: PIPESUPPORTVIEW Inserts pipe and elbow support components. Supports that are set up for pipe components are shown in black. Supports that are setup for elbow components are shown in blue. For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on page 84) Configuration Setup New - Creates a new pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command displays the Create New Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name and location of the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in the configuration settings. Save As - Saves your current settings to a pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command displays the Specify Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name and location of the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in the configuration settings. The drop list displays the .PSA files that are available in the folder. Drawing Insert - Inserts the support selected in the list. Based on the type of support selected (pipe or elbow), the AutoCAD command line asks you to select the appropriate CADWorx component (pipe or elbow). Single - Inserts one support onto the pipe. This option is only available for pipe supports. Multiple - Inserts multiple supports onto the pipe. You specify the start point, end point, and spacing between the supports. This option is only available for pipe supports. Free - Inserts a support without selecting a CADWorx component. The support is inserted using the current UCS settings. This option is only available for pipe supports. Detect Steel - Detects CADWorx Steel components to set the correct size for the beam clamp if the beam clamp is used as the last component in the pipe support assembly. Repeat Insert - Repeats the insert command for pipe type supports. Modify Regenerate - Recreates the support graphics based on what is set in the current .PSA file for support components that you select from the model. Use Regenerate any time you need to recreate a support based on a new assembly sequence or if the parametric values for the support have changed since the support was originally inserted into the model. Replace - Replaces the selected components in the model with the support that is selected from the list. Spec Change - Updates the spec information for the support based on what is currently set in the .PSA file. File Add - Displays the Add Support dialog box so that you can add a new assembly to the .PSA file. For more information, see Add Support Dialog Box below. Modify - Displays the Modify Support dialog box so that you can modify an assembly in the .PSA file. For more information, see Modify Support Dialog Box below. Remove - Removes an assembly from the .PSA file.


81

Palette Panel Copy - Duplicates an assembly within the .PSA file. Move Up - Moves an assembly up one position in the list. Move Down - Moves an assembly down one position in the list.

Add Support Dialog Box Modify Support Dialog Box Controls parameters for modifying supports in the .PSA file.

Data Tab Controls parameters for creating pipe support assemblies. Directory - Displays the folder in which the current .PSA file is located. File Name - Displays the name of the current .PSA file. Support Name Specifies the name of the support. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. In modify mode, you can rename the support assembly. Components Available - Displays the support components that you can use to make an assembly. After you select a type, the list box shows the available parametric data files (*.SUP) for that type of support. For elbow type supports, only Custom, Pipe, Plate, Rod, and Spring Hanger are available. For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on page 84). Open - Opens the selected parametric data file (*.SUP) in Notepad.EXE. Type Pipe - Specifies that the support is a pipe support. This option is only available when the support is first created. Elbow - Specifies that the support is an elbow support. This option is only available when the support is first created. Add - Moves the selected item from the Components Available list to the Components Selected list. Remove - Moves the selected item from the Components Selected list to the Components Available list. Components Selected - Displays the components in the assembly. The support is built using the selected components in the order shown. Move Up - Moves the selected item one position higher in the assembly sequence. Move Down - Moves the selected item one position lower in the assembly sequence.

Spec Tab Controls parameters for setting the specification information for the support component. Size Start - Specifies the beginning size of a component. End - Specifies the ending size of a component. For example, if the range of sizes is 1/2 in. to 1-1/2, in., type 1.5. Enter values as the nominal size, not the actual size. Insulation Options Increase support size if component is insulated - Automatically selects a larger size support component based on the insulation thickness. For example, a six-inch nominal size pipe (6.625 inch actual OD) has four-inch thick insulation (14.625 inch OD). This makes the total pipe

82


Palette Panel diameter 6.625 inch actual OD plus 8 inch insulation OD. The software determines the support by looking it up in the data file. Use next larger size if exact size is not available - Specifies that if the calculated support is not available in the data file, the next larger size support is selected. Description Tag - Specifies an optional tag description for the component. Short - Specifies the abbreviated description for the component. This description is used by Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant. Long - Describes the component. This description is used in the bill of materials schedule and Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant. BOM Sort - Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If the same sort numbers are used for different components, they are placed in alphabetical order. Type - Specifies the type of bill of material item. Select Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Misc. Other Index Code - Specifies the index, or pointer, for generation of database codes placed within components. Type a value, or click Edit Codes to select a value. Index code values are found in the file defined by the DataBaseCodes startup variable. CAESAR II Type - Specifies the restraint type of the support for use in CAESAR II pipe stress analysis. ISOGEN SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information . Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information . Sketch - Specifies a .DWG AutoCAD file containing details about the support. Select the file from the Select detail sketch file dialog box. Message Type - Specifies the format of text displayed with the support. Text - Specifies text displayed with the support.

Insert a pipe support 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Single on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. Select a pipe support from the list. Click Insert. Select the pipe from the model. The Select Optional Values for [] dialog box displays. 5. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK. 6. Select the location on the pipe to insert the support. 7. Specify a rotation around the pipe and the length of the support. The software places the pipe support in the model.


83

Palette Panel

Insert an elbow support 1. Select an elbow support from the list on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. 2. Click Insert. 3. Select the elbow from the model. The Select Optional Values for [] dialog box displays. 4. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK. 5. Select the location to insert the support. The software places the pipe support in the model.

Insert multiple pipe supports 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Click Multiple on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. Select a pipe support from the list. Click Insert. Select the pipe from the model. The Select Optional Values for [] dialog box displays. This dialog box only displays when optional items are available. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK. Select the beginning location for the supports on the pipe. Select the ending location for the supports on the pipe. Type the distance between the supports, and press ENTER. The software places the pipe supports in the model.

Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) There are several types of support components that can be used to make an assembly. Each type has a data file which lists the parametric data needed to build the support. Sample data files are located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport\ folder. For each type, a sample drawing file shows how the data file parameters are used to draw the shape. For custom (TYPE=CUSTOM), a drawing file cannot be created for each size. The top of the .SUP file has information about the support type (TYPE=) and unit system of the file. The SHOWOPTIONAL setting can be used to control how different sizes are selected when the support is inserted. SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 - Uses the exact size match if it is found in the data file. The Select Optional Values dialog box does not display.

84


Palette Panel SHOWOPTIONAL = 1 - If multiple sizes are listed, a dialog box displays to select a size. In the example shown below, all 10" U bolts are shown in the dialog box for selection.


85

Palette Panel SHOWOPTIONAL = 2 - Shows the entire content of the file. This setting is useful for components that are not based on the connecting pipe or elbow, such as plates, rods, and spring hangers.

86


Palette Panel If several components in the assembly have the SHOWOPTIONAL setting of 1 or 2, a dialog box similar to the one below displays. Select the different components that make up the assembly. The rod, pipe, and spring hanger have an additional option for the length column in the data file. If the length column is set to -1, use the Enter length box to type the length of the component.

If SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 for all components in the assembly, the dialog box displays so that you can type the length of the component. The software prompts you for the length of the last variable-length component during the assembly insertion into the model.


87

Palette Panel

Insulation View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Insulation View Palettes toolbar: Insulation View Plant menu: Utility > Insulation Palette Plant menu: Palettes > Insulation View Command line: INSULATIONVIEW Creates a data file with an extension .INU. In this file, you can add, modify, and remove insulation configurations. After you create the insulation configuration data file you can apply these configurations to selected components.

Model

Insulation

88


Palette Panel Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 89) Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 90)

Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) Controls parameters for creating a data file with an .INU extension. In this file, you can add, modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components. Save - Saves the data in the Configuration Setup grid to the configuration file. Save As - Displays the Save As Insulation Data dialog box to save the current data in the Configuration Setup grid to a new file. Open - Displays the Open Insulation Data dialog box to load an insulation data file. The data contained in that file is displayed in the Configuration Setup grid and listed individually in the drop down categories. Configuration Setup Add to drawing - Saves the selected grid rows to the current AutoCAD drawing. If similar data already exists in the current drawing, it is not overwritten. All configurations that have been added, appear in the Apply tab of the palette. Options - Displays the Insulation Options dialog box. For more information, see Insulation Options Dialog Box below. Configuration Setup - Grid - Displays the content of the insulation data file in grid form. Thickness - Specifies the actual insulation thickness value. Type a numeric value greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration.  In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), type a value in inches.  In mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in inches or millimeters based on the setting from the Insulation Options dialog box. If you type inch values, the software automatically converts to millimeters when the insulation solid is created in the model. If you type a millimeter value, no conversion is done.  In metric units (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in millimeters. Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration. 3  In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in . 3  In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm . 3  In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm . Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value. Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value. Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value. Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value. User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value. Add - Adds the current values from the boxes to the grid. If similar data exists, the value is not added to the grid. Modify - Modifies the currently selected row in the grid using the values currently shown in the boxes. Each box corresponds to a column in the grid. Remove - Deletes the currently selected row in the grid.


89

Palette Panel Add, Modify, and Remove only change the data currently displayed in the grid. The data in the insulation file is not updated until you click Save or Save As.

Insulation Options Dialog Box Controls parameters for insulation options. Insulation Append "_I" to layer name - Adds the characters _I to the layer name to create the insulation layer name. For example, If the solid is on layer 1"-150-CWS, the insulation solid is on 1"-150-CWL_l. The insulation solid is grouped with the component solid and center line. New Layer Name - Indicates that the software creates a new layer. Name - Specifies the layer name for the insulation solids. Color - Displays the standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box. Select the default layer color for the insulation. Graphics Show Graphics for Gasket - Indicates whether gasket graphics display. Show Graphics for Weld gap - Indicates whether weld gap graphics display. Show Graphics for User Shapes - Indicates whether user shape graphics display. Metric/Inch Units system Millimeter - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in millimeters in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations. Inch - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in inches in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.

Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) Controls parameters for applying configurations to CADWorx components. For most CADWorx components, insulation is approximated with the use of single or multiple AutoCAD cylindrical components. Available Configuration - Displays the currently saved insulation configurations in the current AutoCAD drawing. Remove - Removes the highlighted row in the grid from the current drawing. Select Mode Select on screen - Indicates that you will select components in the drawing window. Line number - Indicates that you will select components by line numbers. Insulation Mode Data/Graphics - Adds both the insulation graphic and data. Data Only - Adds only the insulation data and no graphics. Insulation Add - Adds the insulation currently selected in the Available Configuration grid to components in the drawings. You are prompted to select CADWorx components. If any of the selected components are already insulated, this action is skipped. Modify - Modifies existing insulation graphics and data. Remove - Removes existing insulations graphics and data. Refresh - Generates the graphics from the insulation data stored in the component's centerline. Use this option if insulation graphics were deleted or lost.

90


Palette Panel Graphics Add - Adds insulation graphics to components that have had their graphics removed. The data previously stored in the components is used to generate the graphics. Remove - Removes the graphics from the selected components. The insulation data remains. These components do not show the insulation solid even if you later click Refresh. Visibility Isolate - Isolates insulation graphics by either selecting components on screen or by selecting line numbers from the list. Hide/Show - Hides or shows the insulation graphics by selecting components on screen or by selecting line numbers from the list. Show All - Shows all objects that have been previously hidden in the current drawing. Report - Creates a complete report, in HTML format, about all of the insulation components in the model. The report is itemized by the different types of insulation data and calculates the total weight, volume, and length. Filter - Filters the list of line numbers using wild cards. For example, type *25-1B* to limit the line number list to line numbers with 25-1B as part of the name. The text filter occurs regardless of where the text is in the line number name. Edit - Displays the Insulation Global Edit Objects dialog box so that you can edit the insulation data for all components having the selected insulation configuration. Right-Click Menu In Line Number selection mode, a right-click menu is available with additional options. The right-click menu changes what displays in the edit box. Select All / Clear All - Selects or clears all line numbers in the list. List Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only insulated line numbers. List Un-Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only uninsulated line numbers. List Data Only Line Numbers - Lists line numbers that have insulation data but no insulation graphics. List Un-Insulated Components - Lists only uninsulated components. List All - Refreshes the list. Modify - Replaces the selected insulation data with the highlighted insulation in the Available Configuration grid. This change applies to all components in the selected line number. Remove - Removes the insulation from all components in the selected line number.

Insulation Global Edit Objects Dialog Box Controls parameters for editing the insulation data on multiple objects. This dialog box applies the settings to all of the selected objects. Thickness - Displays the insulation thickness value. You cannot edit this value. Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration. 3  In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in . 3  In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm . 3  In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm . Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value. Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.


91

Palette Panel Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value. Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value. User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.

Discontinuity View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Discontinuity View Palettes toolbar: Discontinuity View Plant menu: Palettes > Discontinuity View Command line: DISCONTINUITYVIEW Checks for different types of modeling issues, such as disconnected, un-connected, overlapped, and not on line. Refresh - Refreshes the data in the grid. Show All Types - Displays all issues in the grid. Show Disconnected Only - Displays only disconnected and un-connected issues in the grid. Show Not On Line Only - Displays only not-on-line issues in the grid. Show Overlap Only - Displays only overlap issues in the grid. Tolerance Settings - Displays the tolerance settings. Color Settings - Displays the color and Auto Refresh settings. Remove Selected Overlaps - Deletes the selected overlaps from the model .DWG file. Export to File - Exports all data from the palette to a Microsoft Excel (*.CSV) file Help - Displays the help file. Tolerance Min - Specifies the minimum connection tolerance. Two components that are separated by a distance greater than the minimum tolerance but less the maximum tolerance ace are considered disconnected. Tolerance Max - Specifies the maximum connection tolerance. Two components that are separated by a distance greater than the maximum tolerance are considered un-connected. Color Arrow - Specifies the color for arrows. Color Text - Specifies the color for text. Auto Refresh - Indicates whether the software automatically updates the grid when you open the drawing. # - Displays a number from the palette that coincides with the highlighted number in the drawing. The arrow and text color setting is used for the graphics drawn in the model. Line Number - Displays the line number of the component. Type - Displays the discontinuity type for the component.  Disconnected - Displays components that are not connected within the minimum tolerance.  Un-connected - Displays components that are not connected with in the maximum tolerance.  Overlap - Displays components that are duplicated at the same location. The number in parenthesis (n) is the number of overlapping components at this location.  Not on line - Displays components that are not connected to the pipe centerline (typically OLET type components).

92


Palette Panel Gap - Displays the distance between the two components. This value is 0.0 for overlapping components. Long Description - Displays the long description of the component. Category - Displays the category of the component. Component Type - Displays the command named used to draw the component. (X,Y,Z) - Displays the global X-, Y-, Z-coordinates of the component center point.   

Pressing CTRL or SHIFT while left-clicking lets you select multiple items from the list. Left-click to zoom in to the location of the issue. Right-click to change the AutoCAD view to the location of the issue without zooming.

Pipe Support Report CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Report Command line: PIPESUPPORTREPORT Generates a report of all pipe supports found. You can report on the pipe supports found on a selected item, or the entire model. The software saves the report to a .CSV file which you can use with Microsoft Excel.


93

Palette Panel

P&ID View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > PID View Palettes toolbar: P&ID View Plant menu: Palettes > P&ID View Command line: PIDVIEW Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database. You must set up the following items to use this palette: 1. Create a CADWorx P&ID project that uses the P&ID live database system. 2. Create a CADWorx Plant project that uses the Plant live database system. 3. With Microsoft Access, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same Access file. With SQL Server and Oracle, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same database. 4. Create associations between in-line components and the main process line in the P&ID drawings with the Combine Process command. For more information, see "Combine Process" in the CADWorx P&ID User's Guide.

Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 94) Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 96)

Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) Controls parameters for linking matched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database. Select Configuration File The current configuration file (Project.CFG) displays. Browse - Select a different Project.CFG file Options - Displays available options. Available Line Numbers - Displays line numbers that are in both the P&ID database and the Plant database. Select - Specifies a component in the current Plant model drawing. The software sets the line number of this component to the current line number for P&ID View. Component Type - Displays the component tables from the P&ID database. Link - Links or unlinks P&ID and Plant components. Help - Displays on-line help. P&ID Data P&ID ID_Count - Lists the P&ID ID_COUNT from the P&ID database. Line Number - Lists the line number for the P&ID component. Tag - Lists the tag for the P&ID component. Size - Lists the size for the P&ID component. Spec- Lists the spec for the P&ID component. Drawing - Lists the drawing for the P&ID component. Right-Click Menu

94


Palette Panel Insert in model - Reads the size, spec, and component type from the P&ID database and inserts the component into the Plant model. View P&ID drawing - Displays a preview of the P&ID drawing. To zoom inside the viewer, use the two arrow buttons on the left side of the dialog box. Zooming inside the viewer can also be done by holding down the left mouse button while rotating the mouse scroll wheel. The viewer dialog box closes when you switch between drawings in the same session of AutoCAD. The dialog box must be started with every new AutoCAD session.

Left-click an item to update the P&ID drawing viewer dialog box if it is active. Double-click an item to run the Insert in model command. Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists. Options - Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set the colors of the items displayed in the P&ID and Plant data. Plant Data P&ID ID_Count - Displays the ID_COUNT of the P&ID component if a link between the P&ID component and the Plant component is made. The Plant database (PIPE table) saves the P&ID ID_COUNT in the RESERVE_10 column. Line Number - Displays the line number of the plant component. Tag - Displays the tag of the plant component. Size - Displays the size of the plant component. Spec - Displays the spec associated with the plant component. Drawing - Displays the drawing associated with the plant component. Description - Displays the description of the plant component. Right-Click Menu CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box. Zoom - Zooms and highlight the component in the model. List data from all drawings - Lists plant data from all drawings that have the line number. List data from current drawing - Lists plant data from the open drawing.


95

Palette Panel Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.

Options Dialog Box What do you want to do?  

Link components (on page 96) Unlink components (on page 96)

Link components 1. Select the check box next to an item in the P&ID Data list and an item in the Plant Data list. 2. Click Link. The P&ID ID_Count value in the Plant Data list updates. Vales, reducers, and nozzles can be linked. Instrument components cannot be linked.

Unlink components 1. Select two linked components. Link changes to Unlink. 2. Click Unlink. The software removes the link between the two components.

Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) Controls parameters for unmatched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database. Line number from P&ID table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the P&ID database that do not have corresponding line numbers in the Plant database. Line numbers from Pipe table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the Plant database (PIPE table) that do not have corresponding line numbers in the P&ID database. Line numbers from P&ID table with no in-line components - Displays line numbers from the P&ID database that do not have any P&ID components associated with them in the P&ID database. Export - Exports all data from the Unmatched tab to a report. The report is written to the same folder as the Project.CFG file. The file names of the reports are P&IDViewUnmatched1.HTML, P&IDViewUnmatched2.HTML, and P&IDViewUnmatched3.HTML. Refresh - Refreshes the data presented in the Unmatched tab. Line numbers - Displays line number information from the P&ID and Plant databases. In-line components - Displays in-line component information from the P&ID and Plant databases.

96


Palette Panel

Insert a drawing into the project When a Plant drawing is opened from the current project, Plant attempts to insert it into the project. The Insert Drawing into Project Database dialog box opens to confirm this action.

When Insert Into DB is clicked, rows are added to the appropriate tables within the database. Plant drawings created without a database have xdata attached to each component that allows the software to automatically add rows into the appropriate tables.

Clash View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Clash View Palettes toolbar: Clash View Plant menu: Palettes > Clash View Plant menu: Utility > Clash Command line: CLASH or CLASHVIEW Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing and any attached XREF drawings. Settings Clash On - Turns the clash system on. Clash Off - Turns the clash system off. Show Clashes - Displays clash entities that exist in the model. Options - Displays the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page 98). Layers - Displays the Layers dialog box. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 99). Refresh - Updates the clash list. Export - Writes the clash list to a text file. The file is exported to the same folder as the model drawing file. The name of the file is the drawing name with _Clash.TXT appended. Display by Status New - Displays new clashes in the list. Active - Displays active clashes in the list. Resolved - Displays resolved clashes in the list. Approved - Displays approved clashes in the list.


97

Palette Panel All - Displays all clashes in the list. Clash List # - Displays the number assigned to each clash. Component 1 - Displays the CADWorx data for the first component. Component 2 - Displays the CADWorx data for the second component. Status - Displays the clash status. Type - Indicates whether the clash was from a CADWorx Insulation View-created component. 

You can set the color of the grid items using the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page 98).  Left-clicking an item in the list generates the clash entity in the model and zooms to the clash. Right-Click Menu Clash Status New - Changes the status of a clash to New. Clash Status Active - Changes the status of a clash to Active. Clash Status Resolved - Changes the status of a clash to Resolved. Clash Status Approved - Changes the status of a clash to Approved. Clash Zoom To - Zooms to the clash point. Clash Viewer - Displays a dialog box with the two clashing components. Clash Isolate Selected - Isolates the selected clash. Clash Isolate All - Creates clash entities for all clashes, and isolates them. To remove all clash entities from the model, run the command CLASHDELETEALLOBJECTS. Clash Show All - Shows all components in the drawing.

Options Dialog Box Controls parameters for setting options on clash objects. Start up - Indicates whether clash detection runs on drawing start up.  On - Clash detection is always on for every drawing.  Off - Clash detection is off for every drawing. Display Prompt - The software prompt you every time a drawing opens. On clash detection - Indicates what happens when a clash is detected.  Do Not Report - The software does not notify you if a clash is detected.  Show Tray Notification - The software notifies you through the tray bubble notification that a clash has occurred.  Show Palette - The software displays the Clash View palette every time a clash is detected. Ignore connected steel - Indicates whether the clash detection system checks for connecting steel members. If this option is selected, steel members that are touching each other are ignored. Detect clashes within blocks - Indicates whether the software detects clashes inside blocks. If this option is selected, the system detects clashes within any blocks in the current drawing. Synchronize clashes from XREFs - Indicates whether the software checks for clash data inside external reference drawings and updates the master drawing data for that clash. Only New clashes in the master drawing which are from an XREF drawing have the status updated to match the status that is saved in the XREF drawing.

98


Palette Panel Synchronize layers from XREFs - Indicates whether the system checks for clash layer data inside externally reference drawings and updates the master drawing clash layer data to match. If a layer in an XREF is excluded from clash detection, the XREF layer is also excluded in the master drawing. Ignore insulation clashes - The system ignores all clashes generated from components created with the CADWorx Insulation View palette. Connectivity tolerance - Specifies the tolerance for checking component connectivity. If two components are connected, a clash is not reported, even if the actual solids intersect. Clash zoom factor - Specifies the zoom factor used during clash. Color Options - Specifies the color of the clash entity and the color of the list.

Layers Dialog Box Controls parameters for including or excluding certain layers from clash detection. By default, all layers are considered for clash detection. XREF layers are also displayed. Layers - Displays the available layers. Select the check box next to the layer name to include that layer in clash detection. Select all - Selects all of the layers in the list. Clear all - Clears the selection of all of the layers in the list.

Assembly View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Assembly View Command Line: ASSEMBLYVIEW Creates assemblies for placement in a model. The Assembly Manager has four options: create, edit, delete, and insert. Command Name Create Assembly - Creates a new assembly. For more information, see Create an assembly (on page 100).

Command Line MAKEASSEMBLY

Edit Assembly Selected - Edits the selected assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly (on page 100). Delete Assembly Selected - Deletes the selected assembly. For more information, see Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager (on page 101). Insert Assembly Selected - Inserts the selected assembly into the model. For more information, see Insert an assembly into the drawing (on page 101).

INSERTASSEMBLY

Help - Opens the help file. Edit Assembly Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 101).


ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS

99

Palette Panel Right- Click Menu Insert Assembly - Inserts an assembly. View Assembly - Opens the Assembly Viewer and displays the assembly. The assembly can be zoomed and rotated for a 360-degree view. a. Wireframe - Displays the model in wireframe view. b. Hidden - Displays the model in hidden view. c. Shaded - Displays the model with shaded view. Modify Assembly - Enables you to edit an assembly. New - Creates a new assembly. Rename - Renames an assembly. Delete - Deletes an assembly. Copy - Copies an assembly. Paste - Pastes an assembly. Reload Global File - Reloads the global assembly file. Edit File Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly. You can close the Assembly Manager at any time by typing ASSEMBLYCLOSE on the command line.

Create an assembly 1. Click Assembly View press ENTER. 2. 3. 4. 5.

. Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and

Click Create Assembly . Select all the components necessary for the assembly, and press ENTER Pick a point where you want to connect. Type a name on the command line, and press ENTER. The assembly appears in the Assembly Manager.

Edit an assembly 1. Click Assembly View press ENTER. 2. 3. 4. 5.

. Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and

Click Edit Assembly Selected . Make the changes to the drawing as needed. Click Close Assembly Editor. Click Yes to save the changes. To close the Assembly Editor without saving any changes, click No. The change is saved.

100


Palette Panel

Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager 1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select an assembly for deletion. 3. Click Delete Assembly Selected 4. Click OK to delete.

.

If you do not want to delete the object, click Cancel. The assembly disappears from the Assembly Manager.

Insert an assembly into the drawing 1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select an assembly from the Assemblies box. 3. Click Insert Assembly Selected . 4. Select a component to connect to. 5. Select a direction. The assembly appears in the drawing. If an assembly is built with a reducer and then attached to a component of a larger size you are prompted to change the size of the reducer. The assembly usually takes on the size and the specification of the component to which it is attached.

Edit an assembly path 1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS on the command line, and then press ENTER. 3. Select Project and then the name of the assembly from the popup. OR Select Global Assembly and then the name of the assembly from the popup. 4. Enter the subdirectory for the user shape path, and then press ENTER. OR Type B on the command line for the user shape path, press ENTER to open the Browse for Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER. 5. Enter the subdirectory for the Topworks path, and then press ENTER. OR Type B on the command line for the Topworks path, press ENTER to open the Browse for Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER. The assembly paths are updated.


101

Palette Panel

102


SECTION 4

ISOGEN Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN Command Name

Command Line

ISOGEN Out - Generates an isometric drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

ISOGENOUT

ISOGEN Batch - Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. For more information, see ISOGEN Batch (on page 106).

ISOGENBATCH

ISOGEN Supplemental - Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Supplemental (on page 107).

ISOGENSUPL

Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 108).

STOPSIGN

ISOGEN Start Point - Places ISOGEN start point symbols in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Start Point (on page 108).

ISOGENSTARTPT

Offset Tap - Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. For more information, see Offset Tap (on page 108).

OTAP

PCF Out - Creates a piping component (PCF) file from PCFOUT components selected in the drawing. For more information, see PCF Out (on page 112). PCF In - Imports components into the current drawing from PCFIN a piping component (PCF) file. For more information, see PCF IN (on page 112). Tap Connection - Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. For more information, see Tap (on page 112).


TAP

103

ISOGEN Panel

ISOGEN Out CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out Command line: ISOGENOUT Generates an isometric drawing. The components you select to use with this command must be generated with an authorized ISOGEN hardware lock, or this function cannot process them. The selection process has different options that allow you to perform more detailed selections.

Select ISOGEN Style Dialog Box Controls parameters for selecting ISOGEN projects, styles, and names of the automatically-generated isometrics. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113) for more in information on creating and managing these projects and styles. Directory - Specifies the directory of the ISOGEN project. Project - Specifies the active project. The list contains all of the available projects. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113) for information on creating these projects. Style - Specifies the active style. The list contains all of the available styles in the project. File Name - Specifies the name of the file. This allows you to name an isometric file if none of the components selected contain a line number. If the selected components contain line number information, the line number from the last component selected is used as the isometric file name. Path - Displays the Isometric folder that is used by the ISOGEN style. Select - Displays the Select Isogen Style Directory dialog box so that you can select an ISOGEN Style (ISOGEN.FLS) file. Use this command to select an ISOGEN style that is in a shared network folder. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104). Settings - Displays the ISOGEN Settings dialog box so that you can transpose the system by an X, Y, and Z offset distance. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104). The DXF edit box enables you to name a portion of the output file. The name appends a series of numbers. ISOGEN might break up the selected components into multiple sheets which would require this numbering sequence.

Select ISOGEN Style Directory Dialog Box Controls parameters for selecting an ISOGEN style directory file. Look in - Specifies the folder in which the file resides. File name - Specifies the style directory file name. Files of type - Specifies the file type (extension).

ISOGEN Settings Dialog Box Controls parameters for transposing the system by X, Y, and Z offsets. The whole system can be rotated by any angle. This allows any user-defined north arrow direction. X - Specifies the X-direction offset. Y - Specifies the Y-direction offset. Z - Specifies the Z-direction offset.

104


ISOGEN Panel Angle - Specifies the north arrow direction:  90 = World positive Y-axis as north direction. This is the default value.  180 = World positive X-axis as north direction.  270 = World negative Y-axis as north direction.  0 = World negative X-axis as north direction.

ISOGEN Project Data Setup Dialog Box Controls parameters for setting position text (POS) that can be displayed on the isometric drawing file. Review the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils\POS_Help.pdf file to locate the POS number associated with each item. These values are stored with the configuration file and are used when an isometric is exported. For I-Configure projects, this is the only option for setting these values. For Project Manager projects, these values can be set from the Project Manager > Project Default dialog boxes or with this dialog box. After typing a value, click the Use check box to store the value in the configuration file. To delete a value from the configuration file, clear the Use box. The values that have the Use box selected display at the top of the dialog box the next time it displays.

ISOGEN Results Dialog Box Controls parameters for reviewing the results of the ISOGEN extraction. The dialog box displays the success or failure of the extraction in a text box. Open Plot Files - Opens all the generated ISOs in the current session of AutoCAD. The AutoCAD SDI setting must be set to 0 for the option to be available. View Message File - Opens Notepad to display a message file that provides information that could be used when an error was produced. The text file that displays is an .MES file. For more information, read the ISOGEN documentation.

Extract ISOGEN files 1. Click ISOGEN Out . Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press ENTER. The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays. 2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. 3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box. Enter an option [Line number/Select component] . 5. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). or Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1. Processed 164 component(s) to file. The components must have been generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If not, the a message similar to the following displays. Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure... Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed... No components were written to file... The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays.


105

ISOGEN Panel

ISOGEN Batch CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch Command line: ISOGENBATCH Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. The command uses the default settings from the ISOGEN Project Manager. For more information, see ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113). ISOGENBATCH also exports line number continuation information to ISOGEN.

Extract batch ISOGEN files 1. Click ISOGEN Out . Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press ENTER. The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays. 2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104). 3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box. The software displays the Select Item dialog box which lists all the line numbers available in the model. 4. Select one or more from the available line numbers. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). CADWorx sends each line number to ISOGEN for processing. ISOGEN might break up the selected line numbers into multiple sheets. Messages similar to the following display: ********** Start processing (1"-IG-915-A1) ********** Sent 38 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing... 1 DXF file(s) created: E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-915-A1.DXF ********** End processing (1"-IG-915-A1) ********** ********** Start processing (1"-IG-918-A1) ********** Sent 9 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing... 1 DXF file(s) created: E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-918-A1.DXF ********** End processing (1"-IG-918-A1) ********** ***************************** ********** Summary ********** ***************************** *** Line(s) completed successfully *** 1"-IG-915-A1 1"-IG-918-A1

106


ISOGEN Panel *** Total DXF files: 2 *** Line(s) with errors *** None ISOGENBATCH log file written to: C:\Drawings\Model_ISOGEN.log The components must be generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If not, a message similar to the following displays. Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure... Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed... No components were written to file... As each line is processed, any errors encountered are displayed on the screen, and a log file is created. The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

ISOGEN Supplemental CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental Command line: ISOGENSUPL Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. There are several types of block available for export to ISOGEN:  ISOGEN_Arrow  ISOGEN_Wall  ISOGEN_Floor  ISOGEN_Instrument  ISOGEN_BreakIn Arrow, wall, and floor blocks must be inserted along the center line of a pipe component. Instrument blocks must have the instrument line connected to the end of an olet component, TAP component, or a weld gap component. Break in (Tie in) points must be connected to the end point of a component. To add other blocks to this menu, see Introduction. The block name must contain ISOGEN_Arrow, ISOGEN_Instrument, ISOGEN_Wall, ISOGEN_Floor, or ISOGEN_BreakIn for export to ISOGEN. For example, to add another instrument type, you could name the block ISOGEN_Instrument_4, and add it to the menu. If you are placing a flow arrow on a sloped line, align the UCS to the slope before inserting the arrow.

ISOGEN Supplemental Dialog Box Controls parameters for placing supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. The folder containing the ISOGEN supplemental blocks displays at the top of the dialog box. List - Displays the available ISOGEN supplemental blocks. Preview - Displays a preview of the selected block.


107

ISOGEN Panel

Stop Sign CADWorx Plant I tab: Stop Sign Misc toolbar: Stop Sign Command line: STOPSIGN Places stop sign symbols in the drawing. This symbol is used for designating the starting and ending locations for automatically-generated isometric output. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104). Stop signs must be at a weld or connection point on the piping system. You place these designators on the drawing and then exports them to the database. This could occur manually with Export Pipe (on page 143) or automatically with Setup Live Database (on page 142). If stop signs are present when using the Database option of the ISOOUT command, you are asked if stop signs should be used in generating the ISOs. Use Stop Signs [Yes/No] : If you select Yes, continuity is checked and the ISOs are broken at each stop sign. If there are no line numbers or stop signs present in the database, the following prompt displays. Database does not have any line number or stop signs... When exporting with the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box isometric generator (ISOGEN Out (on page 104) or ISOGEN Batch (on page 106)), stop signs are used, if selected.

ISOGEN Start Point CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN Start Point Command line: ISOGENSTARTPT Places start point symbols in the drawing.

Offset Tap CADWorx Plant I tab: Offset Tap Command line: OTAP Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. Offset taps are for use with large branches. After you create an offset tap connection for a component, you can route piping from that point. Use offset taps for all major branches of the main pipeline. Offset tap is more robust at processing branches then tap connection. Use an offset tap connection if ISOGEN reports discontinuity or tap connection does not produce the necessary results. Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component. The OTAP command allows several types of pipe-to-pipe connections. The default connection for OTAP is TANGENTIAL (TTSO). To change to another type of connection, change the symbol key (SKEY) value on the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64) for the OTAP component.

108

SKEY

Connection Type

TTSO

TANGENTIAL

TTRF

TANGENTIAL REINFORCED

TOSO

OFFSET


ISOGEN Panel TORF

OFFSET REINFORCED

TSSO

STUB IN

TSRF

STUB IN REINFORCED

TESO

SET ON

TERF

SET ON REINFORCED

If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the following results: TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:  The length of pipe for the cut list increases to include the OTAP length.  The dimension includes OTAP length. If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the following results: TORF, TOSO, TTRF, TTSO:  The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.  The dimension does not include OTAP length. If the OTAP connects two pipes that are of different sizes (reduction), ISOGEN Option Switch 2 is used for cut length calculation.

Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:


109

ISOGEN Panel  The length of pipe for the cut list is increased to include the OTAP length.  The dimension includes the OTAP length. Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO, TOSO:  The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.  The dimension does not include the OTAP length. Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:  The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.  The dimension includes the OTAP length. Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO:  The length of the pipe for the cut list is adjusted based on the diameter of the main and reduction pipe sizes.  The dimension does not include the OTAP length. Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point setting with SKEYs: TOSO:  The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.  The dimension does not include the OTAP length. Option switch 77 Generate PAD Item Code and Show Symbol on Iso option shows a reinforcement pad on OTAP connections with SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF. A CADWorx reinforcement pad does not have to be drawn in the model for these three SKEYs. For all other SKEYs, a CADWorx reinforcement pad must be drawn in the model for it to appear in the ISO drawing.

110


ISOGEN Panel ISOGEN option switch 77 No Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads, One Extra Weld added at Reinforcement Pads, and Two Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads settings control weld numbering at the reinforcement pads. Extra welds are only shown for the following SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF.

Place an offset tap 1. Click Offset Tap . Alternatively, type OTAP on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping component. 3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped. The software places the offset tap.


111

ISOGEN Panel

PCF Out CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF Out Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF Out Command line: PCFOUT Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing. This command displays the standard file selection dialog box and prompts for a file name.

Extract piping component files 1. Click PCF Out . Alternatively, type PCFOUT on the command line, and press ENTER. The Create dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the PCF file in the File name box, and click Save. Enter an option [Line number/Select component] . 4. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). or Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1. The software processes the components.

PCF In CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF In Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF In Command line: PCFIN Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. The PCF file is usually produced from some other plant design system. This command requires that proper CADWorx specification and data files exist. If the PCF file uses a specification that does not match the CADWorx specification exactly, the model created by PCF In does not function as expected. The function displays a standard file selection dialog box. There is an intervention level. For more information, see System In (on page 174).

Tap CADWorx Plant I tab: Tap Command line: TAP Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. The tap connection are used for small branches. After creating a tap connection for a component, piping can be routed from that point. The CADWorx ISOGEN interface automatically processes numerous types of taps without needing a tap connection. Only use a tap connection if ISOGEN reports a discontinuity. Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.

112


ISOGEN Panel

Place a tap 1. Click Tap . Alternatively, type TAP on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping component. 3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped. The software places the tap.

ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure Generates isometrics. All of the software included with ISOGEN is supplied with an Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This PDF file can be printed or viewed from the computer. The PDFs can be accessed from the program group that is created during installation. We suggest reading the PDF manual prior to contacting for technical support. ISOGEN is installed in a subfolder of CADWorx. There is not an option to install it anywhere else. The program group created during installation provides shortcuts to all the software within these folders. It also provides shortcuts for all the documentation. The information supplied in the CADWorx help file is for general use only. The Isogen_Utils folder contains all the editors that are used to control the format of the automatically generated isometrics. These utilities include the options editor, symbols editor, and others. These applications are required to control the appearance of the ISOGEN isometric. All of the applications have shortcuts in the program group. There are two applications available for creating and maintaining ISOGEN Styles: Project Manager and I-Configure. Project Manager is installed with CADWorx ISOGEN and is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\ISOGEN\Project_Manager\PIPMAN.EXE file. I-Configure is not installed with CADWorx ISOGEN. The installation executable for I-Configure is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\I-Configure\Setup.exe file. CADWorx can use ISOGEN styles created by Project Manager or I-Configure.

ISOGEN Information The following topics provide general ISOGEN information.

Material List Definition The Material List Definition (MLD) file allows you to customize the ISOGEN material list. The following table shows how CADWorx data is exported to an ISOGEN material list for use with the MLD file. cadworx data (as listed in component edit dialog box)

ISOGEN MLD

Alpha size

Not exported ('N.S.' in the MLD is based on the size stored within the component data.)

Short annotation

'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2'


113

ISOGEN Panel Long annotation

'DESCRIPTION'

Line Number

Not available as an MLD item.

Tag


Code

'ITEM-CODE' (If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 34) = Yes in current configuration settings)

Code

'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4' (If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 34) = No in current configuration settings)

Weight

'WEIGHT'

Sort sequence

Not exported

Length

'QTY'

Specification


SKEY Information The following ISOGEN SKEYs can be used by CADWorx when creating an isometric. ISOGEN SKEY definitions and symbol shapes are available in the Skey.pdf file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.

114

PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

1

PIPE

PIPE

(Blank)

2

ELBOW 90 LR BUTTWELD

ELBOW

ELBW

3

ELBOW 90 SR BUTTWELD

ELBOW

ELBW

4

ELBOW 90 REDUCING BUTTWELD

ELBOW-REDUCING

ERBW

5

ELBOW 45 BUTTWELD

ELBOW

ELBW

6

BEND 180 LR RETURN BUTTWELD

ELBOW

EUBW

7

BEND 180 SR RETURN BUTTWELD

ELBOW

EUBW

8

TEE STRAIGHT BUTTWELD

TEE

TEBW

9

TEE REDUCING BUTTWELD

TEE

TEBW

10

REDUCER CONCENTRIC BUTTWELD

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RCBW

11

REDUCER ECCENTRIC BUTTWELD

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

REBW

12

CAP BUTTWELD

CAP

KABW

13

STRAIGHT CROSS BUTTWELD

CROSS

CRBW

14

REDUCING CROSS BUTTWELD

CROSS

CRBW

15

LATERAL BUTTWELD

TEE

TSBW


ISOGEN Panel PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

16

STUB END BUTTWELD

LAPJOINT-STUBEND

FLSE

17

LONG WELD NECK

FLANGE / NOZZLE

FLWN / NZFS

18

FLANGE WELD NECK

FLANGE

FLWN

19

FLANGE SLIP ON

FLANGE

FLSJ

20

FLANGE BLIND

FLANGE-BLIND

FLBL

21

FLANGE LAP JOINT

FLANGE

FLLB

22

FLANGE SOCKET WELD

FLANGE

FLSW

23

FLANGE THREADED

FLANGE

FLSC

24

BOLT

BOLT

(Blank)

25

GASKET

GASKET

(Blank)

26

NIPPLE

COUPLING

NRSC

27

CONCENTRIC SWAGE

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

CSPL

28

ECCENTRIC SWAGE

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

ESPL

29

90 LR ELBOW SOCKET WELD

ELBOW

ELSW

30

90 STREET ELBOW SOCKET WELD

ELBOW

ELSW

31

90 REDUCING ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW-REDUCING

ERSW

32

45 ELBOW SOCKET WELD

ELBOW

ELSW

33

STRAIGHT TEE SOCKET WELD

TEE

TESW

34

REDUCING TEE SOCKET WELD

TEE

TESW

35

LATERAL SOCKET WELD

TEE

TSSW

36

STRAIGHT CROSS SOCKET WELD

CROSS

CRSW

37

REDUCING BUSHING SOCKET WELD

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

RBSC

38

CAP SOCKET WELD

CAP

KASW

39

COUPLING SOCKET WELD

COUPLING

COSW

40

HALF COUPLING SOCKET WELD

OLET

HCSW

41

UNION SOCKET WELD

UNION

UNSW

42

BLEED RING

MISC-COMPONENT

RP

43

90 LR ELBOW THREADED

ELBOW

ELSC

44

90 STREET ELBOW THREADED

ELBOW

ELSC

45

90 REDUCING ELBOW THREADED

ELBOW-REDUCING

ERSC

46

45 ELBOW THREADED

ELBOW

ELSC


115

ISOGEN Panel

116

PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

47

STRAIGHT TEE THREADED

TEE

TESC

48

REDUCING TEE THREADED

TEE

TESC

49

LATERAL THREADED

TEE

TSSC

50

STRAIGHT CROSS THREADED

CROSS

CRSC

51

REDUCING BUSHING THREADED

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RBSC

52

CAP THREADED

CAP

KASC

53

COUPLING THREADED

COUPLING

COSC

54

HALF COUPLING THREADED

OLET

HCSC

55

UNION THREADED

UNION

UNSC

56

PLUG THREADED

MISC-COMPONENT

PL

57

SOCKET WELD ELL-O-LET

ELBOLET

CESW

58

THREADED ELL-O-LET

ELBOLET

CESC

59

WELD ELL-O-LET

ELBOLET

CEBW

60

SOCK-O-LET

OLET

SKSW

61

THREAD-O-LET

OLET

THSC

62

WELD-O-LET

OLET

WTBW

63

BALL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

VBFL or VBBW

64

BALL VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VBSW

65

BALL VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VBSC

66

BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

VYFL or VYBW

67

CHECK VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

CKFL or CKBW

68

CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

CKSW

69

CHECK VALVE THREADED

VALVE

CKSC

70

GATE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE

VTFL or VTBW

71

GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VTSW

72

GATE VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VTSC

73

GLOBE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

VGFL or VGBW

74

GLOBE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VGSW

75

GLOBE VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VGSC


ISOGEN Panel PRGM #

CADWorx Name

76

PLUG VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE

VPFL or VPBW

77

PLUG VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VPSW

78

PLUG VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VPSC

79

RELIEF VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-ANGLE

ARFL or ARBW

80

RELIEF VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE-ANGLE

ARSW

81

RELIEF VALVE THREADED

VALVE-ANGLE

ARSC

82

NEEDLE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VNSW

83

NEEDLE VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VNSC

84

3-WAY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-3WAY

V3FL or V3BW

85

3-WAY VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE-3WAY

V3SW

86

3-WAY VALVE THREADED

VALVE-3WAY

V3SC

87

4-WAY FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-4WAY

V4FL or V4BW

88

4-WAY SOCKET WELD

VALVE-4WAY

V4SW

89

4-WAY VALVE THREADED

VALVE-4WAY

V4SC

90

CONTROL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

INSTRUMENT

CVFL

91

CONTROL VALVE SOCKET WELD

INSTRUMENT

CVSW

92

CONTROL VALVE THREADED

INSTRUMENT

CVSC

93

STRAINER FLANGED or BUTTWELD

FILTER

FIFL

94

STRAINER SOCKET WELD

FILTER

FISW

95

STRAINER THREADED

FILTER

FISC

96

ANGLE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-ANGLE

AVFL or AVBW

97

ANGLE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE-ANGLE

AVSW

98

ANGLE VALVE THREADED

VALVE-ANGLE

AVSC

99

GAGE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VKSW

100

GAGE VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VKSC

101

SPECTACLE BLIND

MISC-COMPONENT

SB

102

EXPANSION BELLOWS

MISC-COMPONENT

EXFL


ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

117

ISOGEN Panel

118

PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

103 to 107

Symmetrical user shapes: NCFL Non-symmetrical users shapes with two points: NCFL Non-symmetrical users shapes three or more points: XVFL

MISC-COMPONENT NCFL or (NCFL) or XVFL MULTI-PORT-COMPONEN T (XVFL)

108

ELBOW 22.5 BUTTWELD

ELBOW

ELBW

109

ELBOW 11.25 BUTTWELD

ELBOW

ELBW

110

WYE BW

TEE

TSBW

111

REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH SOCKET WELD HUB

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RCSW

112

REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH THREADED HUB

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RCSC

113

REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SOCKET REDUCER-ECCENTRIC WELD HUB

RESW

114

REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH THREADED HUB

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

RESC

115

FLANGE REDUCING SO

FLANGE-REDUCING-CON FLRC CENTRIC

116

FLANGE REDUCING THREADED


117

FLANGE REDUCING WN


118

COUPLING SOCKET WELD

COUPLING

COSW

119

COUPLING THREADED

COUPLING

COSC

120

LATERAL-O-LET SOCKET WELD

OLET

LASW

121

LATERAL-O-LET THREADED

OLET

LASC

122

LATERAL-O-LET WELD

OLET

LABW

123

NIP-O-LET THREADED

OLET

NISC

124

NIP-O-LET PLAIN

OLET

NIPL

125

PIPE FLANGED

PIPE-FIXED

FPFL

126

ELBOW 90 LR FLANGED

ELBOW

ELFL

127

ELBOW 45 FLANGED

ELBOW

ELFL

128

TEE STRAIGHT FLANGED

TEE

TEFL

129

REDUCER CONCENTRIC FLANGED

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RCFL

130

REDUCER ECCENTRIC FLANGED

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

REFL

131

WYE FLANGED

TEE

TSFL


ISOGEN Panel PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

132

DIAPHRAGM VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VDSW

133

DIAPHRAGM VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VDSC

134

DIAPHRAGM VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

VDFL or VDBW

135

ROTARY VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VRSW

136

ROTARY VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VRSC

137

ROTARY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

VRFL or VRBW

138

DUAL CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

CKSW

139

DUAL CHECK VALVE THREADED

VALVE

CKSC

140

DUAL CHECK VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE

CKFL or CKBW

141

XBODY GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD

VALVE

VTSW

142

XBODY GATE VALVE THREADED

VALVE

VTSC

143

XBODY GATE VALVE BW

VALVE

VTFL

144

ELBOW 90 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

ELBOW

EL**

145

ELBOW 90 REDUCING WITH SPECIAL ELBOW-REDUCING END TYPES

ER**

146

ELBOW 45 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

ELBOW

EL**

147

TEE STRAIGHT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE

TE**

148

TEE REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE

TE**

149

CROSS WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

CROSS

CR**

150

CROSS REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

CROSS

CR**

151

LATERAL WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE

TE**

152

REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC

RC**

153

REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC

RE**

154

STUB WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

CONNECTOR

MPBW

155

WYE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE

TS**

156

CAP WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

CAP

KA**


119

ISOGEN Panel

120

PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

157

NUT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

NUT (BNUT) or CLAMP (CLMP)

BNUT or CLMP

158

BALL VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VB**

159

BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VY**

160

CHECK VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VC**

161

GATE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VT**

162

GLOBE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VG**

163

PLUG VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE

VP**

164

3-WAY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE-3WAY

V3**

165

ANGLE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE-ANGLE

AV**

166

MULTIPORT 1 VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE, VALVE-ANGLE, VALVE-3WAY

ZG**, 2Z**, 3Z**

167


VALVE-MULTIWAY

MZ**

168


VALVE-MULTIWAY

MZ**

169

ELBOW 22.5 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

BEND

BE**

170

ELBOW 11.25 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

BEND

BE**

171

LATERAL REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE

TE**

172

U-BEND WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

Not exported

Not exported

173

WELD GAP

WELD

WW

174 to 197

(Future Components)

198

GENERIC INSERT

Not exported

Not exported

199

WELD GAP

WELD

WW


ISOGEN Panel PRGM #

CADWorx Name

ISOGEN Identifier

SKEY

200

BENT PIPE

ELBOW, BEND

ELBW, BUBW, PBBW,

201

MITER PIPE

GAP

(Blank)

202

ROLLED PIPE

MISC-COMPONENT

FXBW

203

RESTRAINTS

SUPPORT

(Blank)

204

PAD or SADDLE

REINFORCEMENT-PAD

(Blank)

205

RIGID ELEMENT

GAP

(Blank)

206

SKIPPED ELEMENT

GAP

(Blank)

207

SPECIAL RIGID

GAP

(Blank)

208

TUBING

PIPE or BEND (PB)

(Blank) or PB

209

STOP SIGN

ISO-SPLIT-POINT

(Blank)

210

TAP CONNECTION

TAP-CONNECTION

(Blank)

211

OFFSET TAP CONNECTION

TEE-SET-ON

TTSO

End Type Information CADWorx special end type components are written to the PCF based on the end type used in the data file. CADWorx End Type

ISOGEN End Type

0

PL

1

BW

2

FL

3

LN

4

LN

5

MP

6

MP

7

MP

8

MP

9

CL

10

CL

11

CL

12

CL

13

CL


121

ISOGEN Panel

122

14

SW

15

SC


SECTION 5

LNum Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum You can create and store line numbers in different configuration files for various requirements in a variety of formats. There can be any number of categories within a line number. When you start a new drawing, the line number system is not active by default. Click Setup to automatically assign line numbers when you place components. After you set the line number in the current drawing, it remains set until you change it. Command Name Setup - Modifies line number configurations. For more information, see Setup (on page 124).

Command Line NUMBERSETUP

Set - Sets line number from three different sources: a P&ID NUMBERSET project, the current drawing, or a component that you select. For more information, see Set (on page 125). Count - Sets the present line number count value. For more information, see Count (on page 126).

NUMBERCOUNT

Increment - Increases the line number count value. For more information, see Increment (on page 127).

NUMBER+

Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 127).

NUMBER-

Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on page 127).

NUMBERASSIGN

Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page 128).

NUMBERANNOTATE

Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a component that you select. For more information, see Line (on page 129).

COMP2LINE

Line Isolate - Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. For more information, see Line Isolate (on page 129).

LINEISOLATE


123

LNum Panel

Setup CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Setup Line Number toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Setup Command line: NUMBERSETUP Modifies any line number configuration. You can turn the line numbering system on or off. If the system is on, it can operate in a static or dynamic mode. In the dynamic mode, CADWorx adjusts the line number according to the size or specification. In the static mode, you must manually change the size and specification. Static is useful when all components and sizes of a particular piping run are required to have the same line number (such as, the 3/4” vent on an 8” process line needs a line number of 8”-150-2001-N). Static line numbering is also useful when selecting runs of piping for other functions with CADWorx. For more information, see LineNumberSystem (on page 37). This system also works with a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file. You can change the configuration file location in SETUP to use the same project configuration as any P&ID project. For more information, see Setup (on page 26). Click Add in the Category group in this dialog box to select additional fields located in the process lines table of a typical P&ID project database. When using a P&ID project, changes made to a line number configuration within CADWorx reflect within the P&ID project. If the system is not using a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file, the additional fields are obtained from the DATABASE.TBL file located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You must manually edit this file for any modifications required of the existing fields within the default line number system.

Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124)

Line Numbering System Dialog Box Controls parameters for line numbering systems. The name of the current configuration file displays at the top of the dialog box. You can also use a P&ID project configuration file. Category - Specifies the active process line item. The list contains the process line items from the Database.TBL file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You can add these items to any line number system. After you select an item, click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the item in the right list box, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system. You can also type in a value, and then click Add. Add - Adds the item from the Category box to the Category list. Delete - Removes the selected item from the Category list. Separator - Specifies a separator character. Type an alphanumeric value (including special characters such as -, ~, #, or SPACE). Click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the item in the Category list, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system. Add - Adds the separator character to the Category list. Delete - Removes the separator character from the Category list. Default Value - Adds any default value to any category included in the Category list. The size and specification are disabled if the system is set to the dynamic mode. System Off - Indicates that line numbers are not placed in the drawing.

124


LNum Panel System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) - Indicates that each component placed in the drawing receives a line number. When this option is cleared, the line number is not placed on the component. System On (Static Size/Spec) - Indicates that the line number system uses the value in the Default value box, including the size and specification. This allows you to type anything for the size and specification. Preview - Displays the line number based on the selected categories. The line number added to components looks similar to the Preview value. Move Up - Moves the selected item higher in the Category list. The new order also displays in the Preview box. Move Down - Moves the selected item lower in the Category list. The new order also displays in the Preview box.

Set CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Set Line Number toolbar: Set Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Set Command line: NUMBERSET Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected component. P&ID - Requires a valid CADWorx P&ID project using an Access database. If the configuration file is the same as an existing P&ID project, this option automatically supplies all the line numbers within that project from the process lines table. The line numbers supplied are of the same format as the project. If the configuration file is not the same, a standard file dialog box displays requesting the location of the database to use. Current Drawing - Sets the line numbers based on the current drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124). Component - Sets the line numbers based on a component that you select from the current drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144) What do you want to do?   

Set line numbers based on a P&ID project (on page 126) Set line numbers based on the current drawing (on page 126) Set line numbers based on a component (on page 126)


125

LNum Panel

Set line numbers based on a P&ID project 1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER. 2. Type P on the command line and press ENTER, or select Process drawings from the popup menu. The Select Database File dialog box displays. 3. Select the P&ID Access database file. 4. Click Open on the Select Database File dialog box. The software sets the line numbers.

Set line numbers based on the current drawing 1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER. 2. Type D on the command line and press ENTER, or select current Drawing from the popup menu. The Select Item dialog box displays. 3. If needed, use the Filter box to limit the items that display. 4. Select the item to use from the list. 5. Click OK. The software sets the line numbers.

Set line numbers based on a component 1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type C on the command line and press ENTER, or select Component from the popup menu. 3. Select the component in the drawing. The software sets the line numbers.

Count CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Count Line Number toolbar: Count Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Count Command line: NUMBERCOUNT Sets the present line number count value. This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 1. This is the same as selecting the System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

126


LNum Panel

Set the line count value 1. Click Count . Alternatively, type NUMBERCOUNT on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type the line count value on the command line, and press ENTER. The software sets the line count number.

Increment CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Increment Line Number toolbar: Increment Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Increment Command line: NUMBER+ Increases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0001, then this increments it to 0002.

Decrement CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Decrement Line Number toolbar: Decrement Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Decrement Command line: NUMBERDecreases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0002, this decrements it to 0001.

Assign CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Assign Line Number toolbar: Assign Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Assign Command line: NUMBERASSIGN Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. In the static mode, the line number is replaced exactly as it is previewed in the Setup dialog box. This means that a 3/4” line can be assigned a 8”-150-2001-N line number. When in dynamic mode, the line number is automatically adjusted and the 3/4” line receives a line number of 3/4”-150-2001-N. This is based on the present size and specification listed within the component's data. When selecting a component with a line number already attached, a message appears. Select Yes to assign the component the new line number. You can make your selection by window, fence, or by individually selecting a component. During the process, a rubberband cursor appears indicating which component is being assigned the new line number.


127

LNum Panel

Assign line numbers 1. Click Assign . Alternatively, type NUMBERASSIGN on the command line, and press ENTER. Current line number is 4"-150-HWS-3001-N. 2. Select all the components requiring a new number. 3. Press ENTER to finish the selection process. If the component already has a line number, a prompt appears confirming replacement. Component has existing line number of 4"-150-HWS-3001-N Replace with line number of 2"-150-HWS-3001-N 4. Type N on the command line and press ENTER, or select No from the popup menu to leave the line numbers as they are. Type Y on the command line and press ENTER, or select Yes from the popup menu to replace the line numbers. Type A on the command line and press ENTER, or select yes to All from the popup menu to skip all future prompts and replace the line numbers. The software assigns the line numbers.

Annotate CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Annotate Line Number toolbar: Annotate Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Annotate Command line: NUMBERANNOTATE Labels components with existing line numbers. The text size is based upon the AutoCAD environment variable TEXTSIZE and is placed on the default text layer. You can select individual components to annotate. During the labeling process, a rubberband cursor appears indicating which component is being labeled.

Label components with line numbers 1. Click Annotate . Alternatively, type NUMBERANNOTATE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the components to annotate. 3. Select the point for the annotation. 4. Select the direction for the annotation, or type the angle for the annotation on the command line and press ENTER. The software places the annotation.

128


LNum Panel

Line CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Line Setting toolbar: Line Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Line Command line: COMP2LINE Sets the current line number by selecting a component with the required line number. Any components created after running this command use the new line number. This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Set the current line number to that of a component 1. Click Line . Alternatively, type COMP2LINE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select a component in the drawing. CADWorx displays the line number.

Line Isolate Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate Command line: LINEISOLATE Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. You can use this command to isolate an entire line number or to isolate one line number and include surrounding buildings or equipment. It can also turn off any isolation of components or surrounding equipment and building. Isolate - Isolates only components with particular specifications or line numbers. This option hides all objects including non-CADWorx objects in the drawing. To make them visible again, run this command again and select the Show all option. Partial isolate - Works similar to the Isolate option, except that it leaves the surrounding graphics (building, equipment, dimensions, and so on) visible. This option has the same additional options as Isolate. Show all - Turns off any isolation and makes all objects in the drawing visible. Spec - Lists all specs used in the model. You can select one or more specifications to isolate. Line number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing. You can select one or more line numbers to isolate. List - Displays a dialog box listing either the specifications or line numbers within the drawing. You can select one or more items using the standard Windows selection methods. Select component - Select a component in the drawing.


129

LNum Panel

130


SECTION 6

Pipe BOM / DB Panel CADWorx Plant I tab > Steel BOM DB Panel Command Description

Command line

BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style BOMSETUP or layout that you need. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). Cut BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece BOMCUT of pipe with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Pipe Bill of Material (on page 134). Total BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for BOMTOTAL a total length of pipe in each size. For more information, see Total Pipe Bill of Material (on page 136). Single BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each BOMSINGLE selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single Pipe Bill of Material (on page 138). Export BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. For more information, see Export Pipe Bill of Material (on page 139).

BOMEXPORT

Import BOM - Imports a database into a Bill a Material schedule. For more information, see Import Pipe Bill of Material (on page 141).

BOMIMPORT

Delete BOM - Deletes all entities designated for Bill of Material. For more information, see Delete Bill of Material (on page 141).

BOMDELETE

Tag Toggle - Turns on and off the placement of tags. For more information, see Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141).

TAGTOGGLE

Tag Location - Moves a tag. For more information, see Tag Location (on page 141).

TAGRELOCATE

Insert Tag - Places a tag on the drawing without having to run a Bill of Material. For more information, see Insert Tag (on page 142).

TAGINSERT

Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. LIVEDB For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 142). Export Pipe - Exports CADWorx component information to a DBFGEN Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143). Import Pipe - Imports and draws CADWorx components from a DBFIN Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import Pipe (on page 145).


131

Pipe BOM / DB Panel Audit Pipe Database - Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. For more information, see Audit Pipe Database (on page 145).

DBAUDIT

Synchronize - Checks all components in the drawing and updates SYNC them according to the current value in the database. For more information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146). C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected pipe CG members. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page 147).

Bill of Material Setup CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Bill of Material > Setup Command line: BOMSETUP Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of over 30 different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Use the Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141) command to turn the tags on and off in the schedule.

Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the configuration file listed at the top of the dialog. Database Columns Available - Lists all the information that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add. There are six special columns: USER1, USER2, USER3, USER4, USER5, UNIT. These columns are blank in the BOM. You can manually enter data after the BOM is generated. PT4_X, PT4_Y and PT4 _Z are the world coordinate system location of the approximate center point of the component. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order to set the order by which these columns are sorted. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the Database Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking the column name in the list. Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column. Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down or start at the bottom and work its way up. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM. Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM.

132


Pipe BOM / DB Panel Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order. Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column. Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column. Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of pipe components in the BOM. For more information, see BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).

What do you want to do?    

Add or remove properties from BOM (on page 133) Change the column order (on page 133) Change text alignment in columns (on page 133) Change the BOM sorting and accumulation (on page 134)

Add or remove properties from BOM 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup

.

You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line. The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the Database Columns Available list. Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and the column width respectively. 3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Selected list. 4. Click OK.

Change the column order 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup

.

You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line. The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list. 3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right. 4. Click OK.

Change text alignment in columns 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line. The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected column. Click OK.


133

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

.

You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line. The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. Click Sort Order. The BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A. Click OK on the BOM Sort Order dialog box. Click OK on the Bill of Material Setup dialog box.

BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted. This dialog box also controls the accumulation of piping components. If two valves have different TAG values and you do not want these to accumulate, then you need to add TAG to the BOM Columns Selected list. BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their sort order from top to bottom. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the column name in the list. Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. If you want the BOM to sort from large size piping to small size piping, use Descending for MAIN_NOM and RED_NOM. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.

Cut Pipe Bill of Material CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Cut Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Cut Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Cut Command line: BOMCUT

134


Pipe BOM / DB Panel Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of pipe with a length and a tag. Identical items are accumulated in the quantity column. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.

A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to. CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only. This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).

What do you want to do?  

Cut BOM using Automatic placement (on page 135) Cut BOM using Manual placement (on page 136)

Cut BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut

.

You can also type BOMCUT in the command line. 2. Select the Automatic placement option. 3. Enter the placement angle for the tag. 4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.


135

Pipe BOM / DB Panel 5. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Cut BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMCUT in the command line. Select the Manual placement option. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Total Pipe Bill of Material CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Total Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Total Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Total Command line: BOMTOTAL Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of pipe in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).

136


Pipe BOM / DB Panel The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.



Total BOM using Automatic placement (on page 137) Total BOM using Manual placement (on page 137)

Total BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line. Select the Automatic placement option. Enter the placement angle for the tag. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Total BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line. Select the Manual placement option. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.


137

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Single Pipe Bill of Material CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Single Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Single Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Single Command line: BOMSINGLE Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.



138

Single BOM using Automatic placement (on page 139) Single BOM using Manual placement (on page 139)


Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Single BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line. Select the Automatic placement option. Enter the placement angle for the tag. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Single BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line. Select the Manual placement option. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Export Pipe Bill of Material CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export Plant menu: Bill of Material > Export Command line: BOMEXPORT Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). CADWorx can export the Bill of Material schedules to:  Access file (*.mdb)  Excel file (*.xls)  Text file (*.txt)  HTML file (*.htm) When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension Style settings Primary Units format to decimal. An additional command called BOMEXTERNAL is available to export a project database to a file based on the columns chosen in the BOMSETUP. 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export


.

139

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

140

You can also type BOMEXPORT in the command line. Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want. Type the file name, and specify the folder location. Click Save.


Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Import Pipe Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Import Command line: BOMIMPORT Imports a database into a Bill of Material schedule on the present drawing. The schedule is generated using the BOMSETUP parameters, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). You can import only Access files (*.mdb) formats created with the DBFGEN command. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143). This command cannot be used to import data from the files generated with the BOMEXPORT command because BOMEXPORT exports only partial field information. BOMIMPORT command expects all the fields to be present. 1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Import. You can also type BOMIMPORT in the command line. 2. Specify if you want an Cut length, Total length, or Single item BOM. 3. Select to use the current database or to select another database. The current database displays in the command line area. 4. Select the upper right corner location of the Bill of Material in the drawing.

Delete Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Delete Command line: BOMDELETE Deletes all entities that are on the layer designated for Bill of Materials in the current configuration settings. This option cannot be used for deleting partial tags or for deleting the schedule only. 1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Delete. You can also type BOMDELETE in the command line.

Tag Toggle Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle Command line: TAGTOGGLE Toggle Bill of Material tags in the schedule on and off. 1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle. You can also type TAGTOGGLE in the command line.

Tag Location Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Location Command line: TAGRELOCATE (EQUIPTAGRELOCATE in CADWorx Equipment) Relocates a tag. This command is useful when tags are placed on top of each other. Optionally, this command deletes the connector line from the item mark to the component. This is useful when multiple items are required for one location, such as gaskets and bolts associated with a flange. Tags and the associated leader lines are grouped. This makes them easier to manipulate. You can use the AutoCAD Group command to un-group the items and manually rearrange them.


141

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Insert Tag Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Insert Command line: TAGINSERT (EQUIPTAGINSERT in CADWorx Equipment) Places tags on the drawing without having to run the main Bill of Material generator. The tag is scaled according to the present text size.

Setup Live Database CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Setup Command line: LIVEDB CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that configuration file using a live database or not. 

When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then the item is deleted from the database.  All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session. On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing. Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed. Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an existing database. SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER. Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box. Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.  No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with the appropriate configuration file.  No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.  Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or not. Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

142


Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Export Pipe CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Export Command line: DBFGEN Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. When using live database, this command updates the appropriate database setup for the drawing. Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a Microsoft Excel file. Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of the dialog display the file name and folder in use. Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database file at the same time. New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type. 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export

2. 3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

.

You can also type DBFGEN in the command line. Enter an option [Line number/Select component] . Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). or Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. Select the components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The Select Database Type dialog box displays. Select Access or Excel to define the file type. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name. Select New if you are creating a new file. or Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file. Click OK. If live database is being used, the prompt Continue to update live database? [Yes/No] : displays. Click Yes to update the database. or Click No to stop updating the live database.


143

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Select Item Dialog Box Lists all the line number or specifications in the drawing (or database). You can select multiple items using the CTRL or SHIFT keys. Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.

Wildcards Character

Used to

# (pound)

Matches any single numeric digit

@ (at)

Matches any single alphabetic character

. (period)

Matches any single non-alphanumeric character

* (asterisk)

Matches any character sequence, including an empty one, and it can be used anywhere in the search pattern: beginning, middle, or end

? (question mark) Matches any single character ~ (tilde)

If it is the first character in the pattern, it matches anything except the pattern

[...]

Matches any one of the characters enclosed

[~...]

Matches any single character not enclosed

- (hyphen)

Used inside brackets to specify a range for a single character

, (comma)

Separates two patterns

` (reverse quote)

Escapes special characters (reads next character literally)

In the example below, lines with 2C or A1 display for selection.

144


Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Import Pipe CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Import Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Import Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Import Command line: DBFIN Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database. You can select one or more drawings to import. CADWorx then draws the imported components in single line mode. These can be converted to any other modes using the Mode Convert (on page 70) tools available. 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Import

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type DBFIN in the command line. The Select Database File dialog box displays. Browse to and select the file to import. Click Open. The Select Item dialog box displays. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing. Click OK.

Audit Pipe Database CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Audit Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Audit Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Audit Command line: DBAUDIT Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it. 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Audit

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type DBAUDIT in the command line. The Select Database File dialog box displays. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing. Click Open. The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.


145

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Synchronize Pipe Database CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Synchronize Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Synchronize Command line: SYNC Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database (on page 142) before using this command. When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the ALPHA_SIZE, SHORT_DESC, LONG_DESC, TAG, LINE_NUM, DB_CODE, and WEIGHT values in the PIPE table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing. If the SPEC_FILE column value is changed, the values in the other columns listed above are ignored. The SPEC_FILE column value must be changed to an existing valid specification. The column values listed above are updated according to the information derived from the specification. When a specification is changed, it must match the base rating of the specification. For example, changing a component from a 150 lb rated specification to a 300 lb rated specification causes discontinuity within the drawing. This discontinuity does not present itself until a mode convert is performed on the component.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize

.

You can also type SYNC in the command line. 2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.

146


Pipe BOM / DB Panel

C.G. Generator CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > C.G. Generator Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: C.G. Generator Plant menu: Accessory > C.G. Generator Command line: CG This routine provides center of gravity calculations for components drawn in X,Y planes (2D plans) or in X,Y,Z planes (3D Model). It does not provide center of gravity locations for equipment and other miscellaneous items that do not have a centerline xdata. You can use a generic attach (from Plant>Toolbars>Misc) which provides the center of gravity location and weight. Selection can be done by crossing, window, or selecting individual component centerlines. 1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator . Enter an option [Line number/Select component] . 3. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). or Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. Select objects: 99 found (not necessarily the number of components) 44 were filtered out. Select objects: select more or enter to end The next option writes the information to an external file. You can hit enter for no file or enter a file name. Enter name of file or enter for none: C:\CG\32-002.CGC View file [Yes/No] : enter to view items If you answered yes to the preceding prompt, they are able to view the contents of the file name above. If you just hit enter at the prompt asking for a file name, no file written, they are still be able to view the contents of CADWorx's default file. A list of items scrolls by of each component found. It is best to write to a file, then view it with a text editor (NOTEPAD). Total count...55 items Listing...finished Items.... Weight Sum = 1759.22 lb Sum (X * W) = 44829.7300 ft-lb Sum (Y * W) = 25511.6400 ft-lb Sum (Z * W) = 4750.8520 ft-lb The Center of Gravity X,Y,Z is 25.4827 ft 14.5017 ft 2.7005 ft Insert drawing marker [Yes/No] : To combine center of gravity reports from steel and piping components, take the weight summations and add them together. Take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.


147

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

148


SECTION 7

Misc Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc Command Name Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).

Command Line CONNECTOG

Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the GROUPTOG centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150). Weld Size - Sets the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. For more information, see Weld Size (on page 151).

WELDSIZE

Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn TOPWORKSADD in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on page 151) Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve. For more information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).

TOPWORKSCHANGE

System Out - Creates a CAESAR II input file. For more information, see System Out (on page 152).

C2OUT

Create - Creates symmetrical or non-symmetrical user shape components. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

USERCREATE

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 173).

GENERIC

System In - Reads a CAESAR II input file. For more information, see System In (on page 174).

C2IN

Elbow Centerline - Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. For more information, see Elbow Centerline (on page 175).

ELBOWCL

ISO Flag - Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).

ISOFLAG


149

Misc Panel Dim Adjustment - Adjusts a dimension when the pipe DIMADJUST segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified with the ISO flag command. For more information, see Dim Adjustment (on page 175). System Visibility - Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. For more information, see System Visibility (on page 177).

SYSVIS

Auto Connect CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Auto Connect Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Connect Settings toolbar: Command line: CONNECTTOG Turns automatic connection on or off. Auto connection provides minimum prompts and makes certain assumptions.  The last component placed in the drawing provides the starting point for the next component. The direction of the last component indicates the direction of the new component.  If you select a component which requires a second direction, such as an elbow, or tee, there are additional prompts requesting the direction.  Typical elbow - Prompts you for a direction.  Pipe with an arbitrary length - Prompts you for an end point.  Elbow pointing up or down - Prompts you for a direction. This is useful for placing components down a line. It can dramatically decrease the time required to place components in assemblies, such as control valve bypass loops. If you have run any type of mode conversion, the last point is not available. The software prompts you to pick the starting point. Auto Connect does not work in conjunction with Router (on page 191).

Group On/Off CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Group On/Off Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Group On/Off Settings toolbar: Command line: GROUPTOG Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. This is useful for selecting any piece of the component rather than only the centerline. By default, grouping is turned on.

150


Misc Panel

Weld Size CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Weld Size Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Weld Size Command line: WELDSIZE Specifies the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. This command also allows for the change of weld dots already placed in the drawing.


Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe (on page 151) Change all of the weld dots on a drawing Change individual weld dots

Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe 1. Click Weld Size . Alternatively, type WELDSIZE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Type the new weld size on the command line, and press ENTER. The software changes the weld dot size.

Top Works Add CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Add Operators toolbar: Top Works Add Command line: TOPWORKSADD Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model.

Top Works Change CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Change Operators toolbar: Top Works Change Command line: TOPWORKSCHANGE Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve.


151

Misc Panel

System Out CADWorx Plant I tab: MISC > System Out Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System Out Command line: C2OUT Creates a CAESAR II input file. This input file can then be used in CAESAR II without any modification. Components selected in the drawing convert to the appropriate elements for the stress model. For example, a tee connected to pipe in all directions is represented with one node at the intersection instead of four (three at the ends and one at the intersection). This provides the stress analyst a model that is ready for use. All pertinent information is transferred (weights, wall thickness, and so on). The selection process in the drawing environment is available in two ways. The first requires selecting the components with the standard selection processes in AutoCAD. This can include selection by crossing, window or any other preferred method. The second selection process allows the selection by line number or selecting a component with an existing line number. The database option is not available with this command.

Generate a CAESAR II input file 1. Click System Out . Alternatively, type C2OUT on the command line, and press ENTER. The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays. 2. Specify the location and file name for the file, and click Save. Enter an option [Line number/Select component] . 4. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144). or Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. Provide start locations [Yes/No] 5. Select Yes to provide a start and direction, or select No to process all of the components. 6. Press ENTER to finish the selection.

Example 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Select the starting point at node 10. Select anywhere along the centerline toward node 90 for a direction. Select the intersection at 30, and then select a direction toward 50. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 50. Select the intersection at 50 and then select a direction toward 70. You could let CAESAR II automatically node the rest of the model, or you could finish by manually selecting the next point at 30 and then selecting a direction toward 90. 7. Select a point at 50 and then select a direction toward 110. 8. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 150.

152


Misc Panel Make sure Ortho is off, and use OSnap NEArest to pick along centerlines for directions.

User Shapes CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create Misc toolbar: Create Command line: USERCREATE Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. Symmetrical shapes require you to draw an outline that can be used to create the user component. Non-symmetrical shapes require a block or an object completely drawn in 2D and 3D that represents the complete component. A symmetrical object can be converted from 2D to 3D Mode, or vice versa, using the mode convert (on page 70) commands. It does not allow double-line to single-line conversion in 2D mode. Non-symmetrical shapes can only convert between isometric and solids (Convert Isometric (on page 71) or 3D Solids (on page 71)). 1. Create the component. 2. Modify the specification.


153

Misc Panel 3. Click Create , or type USERCREATE on the command line and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. Each dialog box option is explained below. User shape components can also be tagged as optional components in the specification. This allows for an infinite number of additional components. For symmetrically shaped components, draw a 2D polyline indicating the outline of the shape. The symmetrical shape is limited to straight lines between vertices in the polyline. In other words, there cannot be a fillet radius on any corner of the polyline. If fillets exist, the routine draws them with chamfered corners. Draw only half of the shape on one side of the centerline. We recommend preparing an outline before trying to draw the polyline. For example, draw the component using standard AutoCAD methods or CADWorx components, and then draw a polyline around the contour. For symmetrical shapes, the polyline may overlap as shown in the example below for 2D solids (drawn to each indicated point, PT1, PT2, and so on). For use with 3D solids, the polyline cannot overlap (there cannot be a PT4 or PT7). If the polyline overlaps, an ACIS error occurs indicating the object cannot be revolved. For non-symmetrically shaped components, you must first create a 2D and 3D representation. This representation needs to show all the required details of the component. The 3D representation is used when in the 3D drawing mode. It can be used for orthographic and model-type representation. The 2D representation is used when in the 2D isometric drawing mode. After the polyline or components are complete, click Create . This creates a data file in the required folder with the required file name. For non-symmetrically shaped components, it also creates two drawing files: one 2D and one 3D. The drawing names have appended in square brackets, the size and drawing mode (for example, [4.0-3D]). The file name must be unique. User Shapes are stored in Product Folder]\Plant\Spec\UserShape_I. You can change were User Shapes are stored under Folder Settings in the Define User Shape dialog box. Make sure to set a default size and specification first. Create creating components with different sizes.

must be run multiple times for

Component Setup Name - Specifies the name of the user shape. There is a 20 character limit. Number - Specifies the number of the user shape. Select a number in the range of 1 to 5. Specification - Sets the specification for the user shape. Assign to Spec - Assigns the user shape to other specifications. Save to Catalog - Saves the user shape to the catalog.

Folder Settings Folder - Defines the save location for the user shape. Browse - Enables you to search the computer folders for a specific location.

154


Misc Panel Define Size and Geometry Type - Sets the type selection for the user shape.  Block - Specifies a block to form the shape. If the component is created on layer 0, it inherits the specification color when inserted. This option requires a fully developed component drawn to the correct size with AutoCAD or CADWorx. The software removes any attached extended entity data. This option is used with non-symmetrical components.  Select Polyline - Specifies a polyline to form the shape. The software automatically extracts all the points from the selected polyline. You must first select the reference and end points. This option is used with symmetrical components.  Pick Point - Specifies each point required to form the shape. You must first select the reference and end points (PT1 and PT37 in the following figure). This option is used with symmetrical components. Press ENTER to end the sequence.

Main Size - Sets the main size of the user shape. Reduction Size - Sets the reduction size of the user shape. Select 3D Solid - Creates 3D user shapes. Select 2D Double Line - Creates 2D double line user shapes. Select 2D Single Line - Creates 2d single line user shapes. Define Connections - Defines the end type connection for the user shape. You can select Buttweld, Socket, Threaded, or Flanges. The user shape must have been previously selected with either Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line. If the component is less than 1/16" long (2 mm when in metric mode), the associated xdata is in an inserted block named XATB. It is located on the default layer named SYSTEM instead of the CL layer so that it does not plot or display while this layer is turned off. If the component is non-symmetrical, there is an inserted block named NATB located at the start point. This block, like the XATB block, contains all the associated xdata and acts as any other component. When a 2D representation of a non-symmetrical component is not present (that is, only the 3D representation option is used) and the component is converted to the 3D mode, the NATB remains. This block can be converted to 2D but does not have any graphics in the 3D mode. The NATB and XATB blocks can be moved and controlled just as any other CADWorx component.


155

Misc Panel Spec Properties BOM Type - Sets the bill of material type for the user shape. Color - Sets the color of the user shape. Layer - Sets the layer for the user shape. This setting defaults to the layer named as the specification in the Define User Shape dialog box. Material - Sets the material type of the user shape. Density - Sets the density of the user shape. Weight - Sets the weight of the user shape Length - Sets the length of the user shape. Sort Sequence - Sets the sort sequence of the user shape. Optional Component - Sets the user shape as an optional component. With the use of optional components, a specification file can have an unlimited number of user shapes.

Description Long - Describes the component in long format. Short - Describes the component in short format. Tag - Tags the user shape with the entered information. Notes - Sets other information about the user shape.

Isogen Symbol Information Identifier - Identifies the isogenic information for the component. SKEY - Sets the SKEY for the user shape.

Rating Component Class - Sets the specification class for the user shape. Temperature Rating - Sets the highest temperature allowed for the user shape. Pressure Rating - Sets the highest pounds per square inch allowed for the component.

Define User Shape Dialog Box buttons OK - Creates the user shape. Cancel - Cancels creation of the user shape. Help - Displays the online help file.

When placing non-symmetrical user shapes Up - Rolls the component by 90 degrees. This option turns the component up if the non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion. Down - Rolls the component by –90 degrees. This option turns the component down if the non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion. Roll - Allows the non-symmetrical user shape to be rolled at any angle. When the component has been flipped with one of the mirror options, the angle may need to be negative. If the rolled angle input is incorrect, retype the angle as a negative to correct it. When the component has been turned up or down with one of the options above, rolling is from that location.

156


Misc Panel mirrorX - Mirrors the non-symmetrical user shape along the X-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position. mirrorY - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Y-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position. mirrorZ - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Z-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position. - Rotates the nonsymmetrical user shape by the angle you specify. This option causes the command to exit, and the options above become unavailable. This should be the last option chosen.

What do you want to do?           

Create a user shape file (on page 157) Edit an existing user shape (on page 158) Create a user shape from points (on page 162) Create a user shape from a polyline (on page 164) Create a user shape from a block (on page 165) Create a 3D user shape (on page 167) Create a 2D user shape (on page 168) Create a 2D single line user shape (on page 170) Add a user shape to a specification (on page 171) Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172)

Create a user shape file 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. 6. 7. 8. 9.

This is the default setting. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list. Select the main size in the Main Size list. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.

Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. 10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the prompts.


157

Misc Panel 11. Click Define Connections. Pick direction. 12. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. 13. Select an end type for the user shape. Pick connection 1 or . 14. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted and then press ENTER when finished. The Define User Shape dialog box displays.

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.

Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed. The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape.

The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Edit an existing user shape 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the name of the user shape, you want to modify, in the Name box.

158


Misc Panel The software auto-populates the boxes with the information you used when you initially created the shape. 3. Change any other data as needed. 4. When finished making changes to the file, click OK. The software updates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Edit by redefining connection points Command line: EDITUSERSHAPE Enables you to redefine connection points on user shapes. When you import legacy user shape data, the software may not map the connection points. Use EDITUSERSHAPE to define the user shape connection points. 1. Type EDITUSERSHAPE on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select the user shape to edit. 3. Select connection points for each point you want to change, and then select an end type. 4. Changing the connections points and end types, and then press ENTER to finish. The connection points update in the drawing and the catalog, with routing points added to the user shape.

ISOGEN Export Options Select connection points based on the images below, where one is the first pick, two is the second pick, and so on. For MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET, point 1 and point 2 are required. Point 3 and Point 4 are optional.

PCF Identification Valid SKEY Connection Connection Points Order Points NUT


BNUT

1

159

Misc Panel

160

SUPPORT

4 blank chars

1

CAP

KA**

2

MISC-COMPONEN T-RETURN

BR**

2


Misc Panel TEE

TE**, TS**

3

VALVE-3WAY

V3**

3

MISC-COMPONEN T-ANGLE

BA**

3


161

Misc Panel CROSS

CR**

4

MISC-COMPONEN T-OFFSET

BO**

4

Create a user shape from points 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 6. Select Pick Points in the Type list. 7. Click Select. Pick point.

162


Misc Panel 8. Select points on the drawing based on the following graphic.

9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

Pick insertion point. Select an insertion point on the shape. Pick end point. Select an end point on the drawing. If reducing is selected as the insertion point you receive the following prompt. If not skip to step 12. Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]. Select the required option. Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. Select the required option. Set End Type at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. Select the required option. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. Select the main size in the Main Size list. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153). Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box.


163

Misc Panel 27. Type the tag information in the Tag box. 28. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.

29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.

The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape.

The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Create a user shape from a polyline 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

This is the default setting. Select Polyline in the Type list. Click Select. Select polyline. Select the polyline that defines the shape. The Selection dialog box displays. Select the required option. Pick insertion point. Select the insertion point on the model. Pick end point. Select the end point on the model.

The prompt below only displays if you have a reducing component in the user shape. Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]. 12. Select the required option. Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. 13. Select the required option. Set EndType at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 14. Select the main size in the Main Size list.

164


Misc Panel 15. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. 16. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed. The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Create a user shape from a block 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 6. Select Block from the Type list. 7. Select the main size in the Main Size list. 8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.


165

Misc Panel The Reducing Size list becomes available. 9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14. 15.

16. 17.

166

Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the prompts. Click Define Connections. Pick direction. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. Select an end type for the connection. Pick connection 1 or . Select a connection point on the drawing. Pick direction. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. Select an end type for the connection. Pick connection 2 or . Press ENTER to finish. The Define User Shape dialog box displays.

18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.

31. 32. 33. 34.

The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.


Misc Panel 35. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. 36. Click OK. The software creates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Create a 3D user shape 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list. 7. Select the main size in the Main Size list. 8. If the component reduces, click the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. 9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. 10. Click Select 3D Solid. Select 3D solid representation. 11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish selection. Pick insert point. 12. Select an insertion point on the component. 13. Click Define Connections. Pick direction. 14. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. 15. Select an end type for the user shape. Pick connection 1 or . 16. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected. 17. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.


167

Misc Panel 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed. The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Create a 2D user shape 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list. 7. Select the main size in the Main Size list. 8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. 9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. 10. Click Select 2D Double Line. Select 2D double line representation.

168


Misc Panel 11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish selection. Pick insert point. 12. Select an insertion point on the component. 13. Click Define Connections. Pick direction. 14. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. 15. Select an end type for the user shape. Pick connection 1 or . 16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished. The Define User Shape dialog box displays.

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed. The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).


169

Misc Panel

Create a 2D single line user shape 1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. 2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box. 3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5. 4. Select a specification in the Specification list. 5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box. This is the default setting. 6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list. 7. Select the main size in the Main Size list. 8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box. The Reducing Size list becomes available. 9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list. 10. 11.

12. 13. 14.

15. 16.

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

170

Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file. Click Select 2D Single Line. Select 2D single line representation. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish selection. Pick insert point. Select an insertion point on the component. Click Define Connections. Pick direction. Select a direction in the drawing. Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]. Select an end type for the user shape. Pick connection 1 or . If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished. The Define User Shape dialog box displays. Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list. Type the density of the component in the Density box. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. Type the length of the component in the Length box.


Misc Panel 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file. Type the short description in the Short box. Type the tag information in the Tag box. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed. The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list. Type the component class in the Component Class box. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box. Click OK. The software creates the user shape. The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Add a user shape to a specification Adds a user shape to the specification. 1.

2. 3. 4.

If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2. Click Start Spec Editor on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Editor on the desktop. The Specification Editor software opens. Click File > Open. The Open File dialog box displays. Select a catalog, and then click Open. The Catalog Data window displays. Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder. The Data Tables list displays.

5. Right-click User Shapes, and select Add Data Table The New Usershape Table displays. 6. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 7. Select a user type in the Type list. 8. Select a size table in the Size Table list. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

.

You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis. Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component. Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box. Type the part number in the Part Number box. Type the description of the user shape in the Description box. Click OK.


171

Misc Panel The user shape file appears under the User Shape category in the Data Tables folder, and also to the right of Catalog Data, in the Main Table List View. 14. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. You can now enter information for the specifics of the user shape that you have added to this specification catalog. For more information, see Add a new data table in CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.

Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing 1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar. A list of numbered buttons displays.

2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place. 3. Select a point in the drawing. 4. Select a direction in the drawing, or type Up or Down. The software places the shape in the drawing.

Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing 1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar. A list of numbered buttons displays.

2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place. 3. Select the start point for the shape in the drawing. 4. Select the rotation option that meets your requirements. The software places the shape in the drawing.

172


Misc Panel

Generic Attach CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Generic Attachment Misc toolbar: Generic Attach Command line: GENERIC Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a component, use this routine to attach xdata information. You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component. To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.

Place a generic attachment in the drawing 1. Click Generic Attachment . Alternatively, type GENERIC on the command line, and press ENTER. The Generic Attach dialog box displays. 2. Alpha Size auto-populates with the main size already selected when you set up the drawing. Type the alpha size in the Alpha size box if you need to change it. 3. Type an abbreviated description, such as PUMP 2X1X8, in the Short annotation box. 4. Type a complete description, such as PUMP, INGERSOLL-RAND, MODEL HOC, 2X1X8, in the Long annotation box. 5. Type a line number in the Line number box, if you want to assign a line number to the component. 6. Type the tag in the Tag box. 7. Type the code in the Code box, if you want to assign a code to the component. 8. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box. 9. Type the sort sequence number for the bill of material schedule location in the Sort sequence box. 10. Type the length of the component in the Length box. 11. Change the Coordinates if available and needed. 12. Select Existing in the Miscellaneous column, if needed. 13. Change the BOM Item Type, if needed. 14. If BOM Mark Point is available, change as needed. 15. Click Attach. Select an entity. 16. Select the object to attach the information. The software attaches the information to the object, and a red arrow displays indicating where you attached the information. Select another entity or Enter to stop. 17. Select other objects as needed, and press ENTER when finished. The software attaches the information to the object.


173

Misc Panel

System In CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > System In Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System In Command line: C2IN Reads a CAESAR II input file. You must select the necessary ._A or .C2 file. This is the input file created by CAESAR II or the output facility in CADWorx. After you select the input file, a dialog box indicating that the file was read displays. Make sure that the CAESARVersion (on page 34) startup variable is set to match your CAESAR II installation. If this variable is set to 3.2, and the C2IN command is issued on a file created or modified with CAESAR II 4.40, then an error message displays indicating that the valid file is corrupt.

The next prompt requires that a specification be set. Although, there might be an existing specification set, confirmation or a new specification is required. The specification might not be used. The input facility in CADWorx attempts to determine the proper specification for the component being input from data in the CAESAR II input file. The input facility or the data in the input file does not always indicate a specification. Therefore, a default specification needs to be set for these components. Caesar - Derives the descriptive information within any new components from the material passed back from CAESAR II and the name of the purposed component located in the PRGM.TBL file. This file is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. The system automatically assigns all the required paths for data files which might be used later for reconstruction (such as mode conversion). If the material was not supplied in CAESAR II, then this option uses the description from the specification but does not populate the line number. Environment - Assigns the component information based on the default specification. It also assigns a line number if there is a current line numbering system setup. You are responsible for the correct line number being set before importing. This option overrides any material sent from CAESAR II. For example, if A-133-B material type was chosen in CAESAR II, and the default specification above dictated A-106-B as the material type, this option would override the A-333-B grade and place A-106-B in the component. The full description would be from the default specification set above.

174


Misc Panel

Read a CAESAR II input file 1. Click System In . Alternatively, type C2IN on the command line, and press ENTER. The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays. 2. Select the file to read, and click Open. 3. Set the default specification, or press ENTER to use the current specification. The software reads the CAESAR II input file. 4. Select the option that meets your requirements. The software writes the CAESAR II components in the drawing.

Elbow Centerline Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Elbow Center Line Command line: ELBOWCL Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. When toggled on, it provides square elbow centerlines which can be used for dimensioning. This also produces attractive isometrics.

ISO Flag Plant menu: Utility > ISO Flag Command line: ISOFLAG Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. This command only affects pipes and nipples. This is useful when adjusting a pipe which is to be used in an isometric. For example, if you use this command before stretching a pipe which was 120'-0" long to 5'-0" long, the Bill of Material generator reflects a 120'-0" long piece of pipe. The component’s xdata is flagged when using the CEDIT dialog box.

Dim Adjustment Pipe menu: Utility Dim Adjustment Command line: DIMADJUST Adjusts a dimension when the pipe segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified with the ISO flag command. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175). This command works with the associate dimensioning setvar DIMASSOC on. The command also adjusts the pipe’s stored xdata length. This is performed by using the dimension to adjust the pipe’s xdata. You can adjust the pipe with Dimension option, or adjust the dimension with Pipe option. Both options of this command read and write fractional characters used with the dimension routines.

Options Dimension - Adjusts the pipe to match an existing dimension. Select the dimension, then select the pipe’s centerline. Pipe - Adjusts the dimension to match the stored length in the pipe’s xdata.


175

Misc Panel Line - Adjusts the pipe distance to match the length of a line that you select. AutoCAD dimension lines stop at the back of the arrow, so they are not typically a good choice for this option. Pick reference points - Adjusts the pipe distance based on two reference points that you select. This the most commonly used option and can be used to pick each end of a pipe.

For this option, the following prompts requests the selection of the pipe(s) that were adjusted. Selection can be made by crossing, window or individually selecting the centerlines. Other components which might have been selected with crossing or window are simply ignored. This only detects adjusted pipe.

Adjust a dimension to match a pipe 1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select Pipe. 3. Select the reference points for the pipe. Press ENTER to finish.

Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension 1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select Dimension. 3. Select the dimension text. Press ENTER to finish.

176


Misc Panel

System Visibility Command line: SYSVIS Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. The command affects the components listed below.  Weld gaps  Pads / Saddles  Bolts  Gaskets


177

Misc Panel

178


SECTION 8

2D Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D Command Name

Command Line

2D Representation - Creates a 2D representation. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).

2DREP

2D Representation Hidden - Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. For more information, see 2D Representation Hidden (on page 180).

2DREPH

Box - Creates views based on a picked box. For more information, see Box (on page 180).

VIEWBOX

Edit - Edits a views box. For more information, see Edit (on page 181).

VIEWEDIT

Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more ZOOMLOCK information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181). Zoom Factors - Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. For more information, see Zoom Factors (on page 182).

ZOOMF

2D Representation CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation Command line: 2DREP EQUIP2DREP Creates a two-dimension representation from a three-dimensional model. This command removes hidden lines and retains layer and color information. It can work in model or paper space. In model space, the 2D representation is created as a block. An alternate command, 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment), is also available. This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP command. Solids - Generates 2D representations of native AutoCAD 3D solids. Centerlines - Copies selected CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines to the 2D representation. Lines - Copies selected AutoCAD 3dPolyline, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Leader, Line, Polyline, Spline and Helix to the 2D representation. This includes CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines. This command only processes native AutoCAD solid and line entities that are typically created by CADWorx. This command does not process any custom solid or line entities that are created by other add-on AutoCAD applications.


Create a 2D representation (on page 180) Create a 2D representation with hidden lines (on page 180)


179

2D Panel

Create a 2D representation 1. Type 2DREPEQUIP2DREP. 2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation. 3. Select the filter option that meets your needs. If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off. 4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on. This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.

2D Representation Hidden CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Hidden Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation Command line: 2DREPH Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP command. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).

Create a 2D representation with hidden lines 1. Type 2DREPHEQUIP2DREPH. 2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation. 3. Select the filter option that meets your needs. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179). If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off. 4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on. This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.

Box CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Box Command line: VIEWBOXEQUIPVIEWBOX Displays the View Creation dialog box. This dialog box creates clipped views by defining a 3D box. This command is useful in creating layout drawings in paper space.

View Creation Dialog Box View set name - Specifies the overall set name for the views. Each view created is named based on this name.

180


2D Panel First corner point Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the first corner point of the view box. Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes. X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box. Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box. Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first and second corner points.

Second corner point Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the second corner point of the view box. Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes. X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box. Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box. Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first and second corner points.

Views View Type - Indicates the orientation of the view. Name - Specifies the view name. The default name is a combination of the View set name value and the View Type. After you create the view set, the views display in the AutoCAD View dialog box. Available - Indicates whether the view is included in the set. Select the checkbox to include the view. Clear the checkbox to exclude the view. Select All - Selects all of the check boxes in the Available column. Delete All - Deletes all of the AutoCAD views that were previously created with this view set, and close the dialog box. Set Current - Sets the AutoCAD window to the selected view. Isolate Box - Hides all AutoCAD entities outside the view box. Entities that cross the boundaries of the view box are not hidden. Show All - Shows all of the entities in the drawing.

Edit CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Edit Command line: VIEWEDITEQUIPVIEWEDIT Edits the box created with the VIEWBOX command. For more information, see Box (on page 180)View Box. Double-clicking an existing view box runs this command.

Zoom Lock CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Zoom Lock Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Lock Settings toolbar: Command line: ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK


181

2D Panel Locks the AutoCAD ZOOM command to allow zooming in paper space only. This means that while you are in paper space with the MSPACE command activated (the cursors are in the Mview), you can zoom without resizing the model space viewport. Instead, this command intercepts the ZOOM command and changes to paper space before zooming. When you are finished zooming, the command returns the cursor and environment back to the Mview. This command simplifies working on CADWorx isometrics.


Turn on the zoom lock (on page 182) Turn off the zoom lock (on page 182)

Turn on the zoom lock 

Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK. Paperspace zoom lock toggled on.

Turn off the zoom lock 

Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK. Paperspace zoom lock toggled off.

Zoom Factors Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Factors Command line: ZOOMF Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. This command zooms to a perfect scale for your current Mview. If you use this command from model space (tilemode 1), it displays a warning that tilemode has to be set to 0 (paper space). After selecting the scale from one of the menus, a prompt displays requesting the center of the view.

182


SECTION 9

Bolt CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt Command Name

Command Line

Auto Gasket - Place gaskets automatically after the last AUTOGASKET flange face drawn. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184). Auto Weld - Places weld gaps automatically after the last butt AUTOWELD weld drawn. For more information, see Auto Weld (on page 185). Weld Total - For more information, see Weld Total (on page 186).

WELDTOTAL

Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).

STDBOLT

Non Standard - Places nonstandard stud bolts at the selected NONSTDBOLT location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page 187).

Auto Gasket CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Gasket Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Gasket Command line: AUTOGASKET Places a gasket on flange sets, and valves. Automatic - Places a gasket into the drawing automatically. Manual - Places a gasket into the drawing manually. This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46).

Place a gasket automatically 1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for Automatic. 3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set. 4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish. 5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish. The gasket is placed.


183

Bolt

Place a gasket manually 1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER. 3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set. 4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish. 5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish. The gasket is placed.

Automatic CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Automatic Command line: AUTOBOLT Assigns stud bolt sets with similar sizes and specifications to all gaskets within the current selection set. Gaskets of different sizes and specifications are automatically handled. Automatic - Places a bolt into the drawing automatically. Manual - Places a bolt into the drawing manually. When the Bolt Insertion rule is turned on and you place a flange in the drawing it does not have a bolt until you place a flange or a valve on the other side. Only then is the bolt automatically inserted into the drawing when necessary. This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).

Place stud bolts automatically 1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for Automatic. 3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set. 4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish. The bolt is placed.

Place stud bolts manually 1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER. 3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set. The bolt is placed.

184


Bolt

Auto Weld CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Weld Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Weld Command line: AUTOWELD Places weld gaps on every end of any butt weld and socket weld component or only on every end of any butt weld when the component is selected. Three different scenarios can occur when the weld gaps are placed: 1. When a weld gap is automatically placed on the end of a butt weld or socket weld component, do one of the following to place the next component:  Press ENTER to place the component at the weld gap.  Pick the end point of the weld gap symbol. 2. When a component, such as a tee, is inserted into a pipe, and the weld gaps are placed at each end of the tee, the weld gaps automatically break and cut back the pipe on both sides of the tee. If one exists, the branch connection pipe is also broken. 3. When a component is placed against another component that cannot be cut back, a weld gap must already exist. For example, if you are placing a flange against an elbow, the elbow must have an existing weld gap. If not, the software places the flange against the elbow without any gap. In this scenario, it is your responsibility to place a weld gap before placing the flange. Automatic - Places a weld gap into the drawing automatically. Manual - Places a weld gap into the drawing manually.  

This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47). Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit welds.

Place weld gaps automatically 1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER for Automatic. 3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when finished. 4. Select branches to add welds, or press ENTER to finish. 5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. The software displays the number of welds added.


185

Bolt

Place weld gaps manually 1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER. 3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when finished. 4. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish. The software displays the number of welds added.

Weld Total CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Weld Total Command line: WELDTOTAL Counts weld gaps on a drawing for estimating purposes. 

 

An example of the typical output is shown below. You can copy this information and paste it into a text file or to a Microsoft Excel workbook. Qty.

Spec.

Nominal

Actual

Thk.

Linear Lg.

5

A0

2.000

2.375

0.154

37.310

4

A0

3.000

3.500

0.216

43.980

14

A1

10.000

10.750

0.365

472.810

1

A1

14.000

14.000

0.375

43.980

150

A1

2.000

2.375

0.154

1119.190

The ability to export the drawing to a database using the DBFGEN or LIVEDB command can also help manage weld gaps. Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit welds.

What do you want to do? 

Count weld gaps automatically (on page 186)

Count weld gaps automatically 1. Click Weld Total . Alternatively, type WELDTOTAL on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select the objects you want to have automatically counted, and then press ENTER. The software displays a prompt showing the total number of welds in the drawing.

186


Bolt

Standard CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Standard Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Standard Command line: PLACEBOLT Inserts stud bolt sets into the drawing environment for Bill of Materials extraction. You can insert a stud bolt set anywhere in the drawing. However, stud bolt sets must be attached to a flange set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. Size and specification must be set accordingly. This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.

Place standard stud bolts 1. Click Standard . Alternatively, type PLACEBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER. 2. Select a point in the drawing. If placing bolt you must have a set of flanges to place the bolt. If there is not a flange set you get the response Flange set not found. If you connect it to a pipe component you get the response Component Stud Bolts cannot be inserted by a Pipe component. The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD TextStyle setting.

Non Standard CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Non Standard Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Non Standard Command line: NONSTDBOLT Inserts a stud bolt set anywhere. However, nonstandard bolt sets must be attached to a flange set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. You can also insert special bolts. Size and specification must be set accordingly. This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.

Place nonstandard stud bolts 1. Click Non Standard . Alternatively, type NONSTDBOLT on the command line and then press ENTER. 2. Type the required text. For example, you can type NON STD STUD BOLTS. 3. Type the required description. For example, you can type STUD BOLTS W/ DOUBLE NUTS & WASHERS. 4. Type the stud diameter. You must enter the value as a real number, such as 5/8". 5. Type the length. You must enter a real number, such as 7.25 or 7-1/4".


187

Bolt 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Type the required stud value. Type the required weight. Type a string, a real number, or press ENTER to accept the default. Type the value, or press ENTER to accept the default. Select a point in the drawing. Use the compass to pick a direction in the drawing, and click to finish. The bolt is placed in the drawing.

The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD TextStyle setting.

188


SECTION 10

RT Panel CADWorx Plant I tab: RT Command Name

Command Line

Auto Route - Provides the ability to draw components continuously without selecting them from the toolbar or palette. For more information, see Auto Route (on page 189).

AUTOROUTE, ROUTE

Router - Provides routing lines with various options such as slope and elevation changes. For more information, see Router (on page 191).

ROUTER

Buttweld LR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected ROUTEBWLR routing line. For more information, see Buttweld LR (on page 192). Buttweld SR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Buttweld SR (on page 193).

ROUTEBWSE

Threaded - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Threaded (on page 193).

ROUTETRHD

Socket Weld - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 194).

ROUTESW

Auto Route CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Auto Route Command Line: AUTOROUTE, ROUTE You can also use the PIPW command to start routing pipe. Starts the ROUTE in the X-Y plane as needed. This command can be used to route pipe from one component to another without accessing the pipe, or elbow commands. The command is best used to start a new route of pipe, but it also works to continue routing a previous section of pipe. However, the most useful way to continue routing pipe is to use the + sign on the ends and middle of the pipe. For more information on continuing routing, see Continue Routing (on page 191). last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing. Slope - Starts the pipe in a slope direction. a. Meter - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on meters. b. Foot - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on feet. c. Rise - Places the slope rise or drop based on the degrees entered.


189

RT Panel Elevation - Starts the pipe perpendicular to the plane for routing. Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on the command line and press ENTER to reorient the compass direction. Reference - Starts the line at a distance based on the reference point chosen. Fitting mode - Starts the pipe as either Short Radius Buttweld or Long Radius Buttweld, depending on your selection. Undo - Undoes the last piece of routed pipe. Connect - Connects to a component or other piece of pipe. a. Components - Displays all possible connecting directions to the component or pipe using an image of piping. b. Lines - Displays specific lines in a box form for connecting to the component or pipe. Toggle length - Toggles the dimension of the pipe from the start point. Alignment - Starts the pipe at a chosen alignment. a. Center - Center of pipe b. BOP - Bottom of pipe c. TOP - Top of pipe d. Left - Left of pipe e. Right - Right of pipe TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.


Start a new route (on page 190) Continue Routing (on page 191)

Start a new route 1. Click Auto Route . Alternatively, type AUTOROUTE, or ROUTE on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select a start point. 3. Select an end point, or select one of the options in the list. CADWorx lets you continue routing pipe as needed, using the component List and other options to allow you to route to components as needed. 4. When finished routing pipe, press ENTER. The new pipe is inserted in the drawing.

190


RT Panel

Continue Routing This procedure does not require a command to start. However, the ROUTE command used to start new piping can be used to continue routing pipe but is not required. 1. In a model click on the component you want to route from. 2. Click the plus grip point . 3. Continue to route pipe as needed in any direction, or select an option. As you click, the pipe stops at that point, and allows you to go in any other direction. Do not click on the screen unless you want the pipe to stop. Turning on Auto Connect (on page 150) allows you to continue routing from your last point without having to click the grip point or without pressing ENTER. Turn off Auto Connect to start from a different point, or to start a new point in the drawing.

Router CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Router Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Router Command line: ROUTER Draws a 3D polyline for the previous welded, threaded, and socket automatic routing routines. 

If you are using known 3D points, the UCS must be at the world position: Type UCS on the command line, and press ENTER.  Unlike a normal 3D polyline, the elevation must be controlled with the Elevation option of the Router command or the UCS position. Slope - Specifies the known slope or drop per foot to the next point in degrees (positive or negative). Alternatively, use one of the options listed below to define the slope. This option does not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Slope option and then select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.  Meter - Defines the rise or drop in millimeters per meter.  Foot - Defines the rise or drop in inches per foot.  Drop - Defines the drop to the next point as a real number, such as 1'-8  Rise - Defines the rise to the next point as a real number, such as 2'-9.  Continuous - Turns constant sloping on or off. Position - Starts the 3D polyline at an elevated position. This option does not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Position option and then select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.  Nominal - Determine the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.  Size - Determines the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.  BOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size upward.  TOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size downward.  Centerline - Default when starting this routine. You can change to the bottom of pipe BOP option, then change back with this option. Reference - Starts the line at a given distance from a reference point. After you provide this reference point, you must provide relative/polar coordinates with an @ location.


191

RT Panel Elevation - Changes the elevation in conjunction with the present UCS coordinate system. The elevation change can be expressed using a positive or a negative numbers .  World - Specifies the elevation in the world coordinate system.  Pick - Establishes the working elevation based on a point selected in the drawing. You can use object snap, if necessary. Undo - Removes the last 3D polyline segment, and prompts you to enter the next point. Specify next point - Selects the next point along the 3D polyline segment. Press ENTER to end the selection.

Router commands The CADWorx Plant auto route commands listed below provide a quick and effective way of drawing pipe. You can draw long radius, short radius, threaded, or socket weld pipe.  Buttweld LR (on page 192)  Buttweld SR (on page 193)  Threaded (on page 193)  Socket Weld (on page 194) All commands have the same options.

Buttweld LR CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld LR Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld LR Command line: ROUTEBWLR Draws a long radius pipe. Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run. Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place, followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are drawn along each construction point.  

An elbow is not placed at the starting and ending locations. The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not polylines. Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides rolling offsets. For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 191).

192


RT Panel

Buttweld SR CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld SR Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld SR Command line: ROUTEBWSR Draws a short radius pipe. Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run. Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place, followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are drawn along each construction point.  


Threaded CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Threaded Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Threaded Command line: ROUTETHRD Draws threaded pipe. Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run. Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place, followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are drawn along each construction point.  



193

RT Panel

Socket Weld CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Socket Weld Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Socket Weld Command line: ROUTESW Draws socket weld pipe. Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run. Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place, followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are drawn along each construction point.  


194


SECTION 11

Dimension Panel CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions Command Name

Command Line

Automatic - Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

AUTODIM

Horizontal - Places horizontal dimensions. For more information, see Horizontal (on page 196).

DIMH

Vertical - Places vertical dimensions. For more information, see Vertical (on page 197).

DIMV

Set - Sets the elevation. For more information, see Set (on page 197).

ELEV

Rotated - Places rotated dimensions. For more information, see Rotated (on page 198).

DIMR

Horizontal with Tail - Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more information, see Horizontal with Tail (on page 198).

DIMTAILH

Vertical with Tail - Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more information, see Vertical with Tail (on page 198).

DIMTAILV

Change - Changes the elevation. For more information, see CHANGEELEV Change (on page 199). Component - Places component annotation. For more information, see Component (on page 199).

ANOTCOMP

Elevation - Places component elevation annotation. For more information, see Elevation (on page 200).

ANOTELEV

Coordinates - Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. For more information, see Coordinates (on page 200).

DIMCOORD

Tick Mark - Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on. For more information, see Tick Mark (on page 201).

TICK

ISO Text - Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. For more information, see ISO Text (on page 202). Height - Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. For more information, see Height (on page 202).


TEXTHEIGHT

195

Dimension Panel

Automatic CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Automatic Plant menu: Dimension > Automatic Command line: AUTODIM Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. Options to set the offset distance and whether to include flanges are also provided.

Options Flange - Dimensions flange faces. You specify whether flange dimensioning is turned On or Off. Offset - Specifies the distance from the dimension line to the component. Selection - Starts the dimensioning process.

Place automatic dimensions 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTODIM on the command line, and press ENTER. Type S on the command line, and press ENTER to select objects to dimension. Select the objects to dimension. Press ENTER when you are finished. Select the centroid for the dimensions. For example, if you selected two pieces of parallel pipe with elbows attached to each end to dimension, and then selected a point between the two pieces of pipe, the software would place the dimension lines to the outside. The software displays the dimensions.

If you try to place automatic dimensions on two pieces of parallel pipe with no elbows, an error code displays. Combined components must have at least one turn.

Horizontal CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Horizontal Command line: DIMH Places horizontal dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place horizontal dimensions 1. Click Horizontal . Alternatively, type DIMH on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the origin location for the first extension line. 3. Select the origin location for the second extension line. The software continues to prompt you for extension lines. 4. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence. 5. Select a location for the dimension line. 6. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension. The software displays the dimension.

196


Dimension Panel

Vertical CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Vertical Command line: DIMV Places vertical dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place vertical dimensions 1. Click Vertical . Alternatively, type DIMV on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the origin location for the first extension line. 3. Select the origin location for the second extension line. The software continues to prompt you for extension lines. 4. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence. 5. Select a location for the dimension line. 6. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension. The software displays the dimension.

Set CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Set Pipe menu: Utility > Elevation > Set Command line: ELEV Places piping at a preset elevation. This is the standard AutoCAD Elev command. When using this option, remember to place the elevation back to 0'-0" for the proper elevation placement of all future components. Use this command with caution. An alternative is to use the Flat (on page 229) command built into CADWorx (VIEWFLAT). Refer to the AutoCAD documentation for complete details regarding this command (ELEV).

Set the Elevation 1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Set on the Dimensions panel. Alternatively, type ELEV on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select a point in the drawing to specify a new elevation. 3. Select a second point in the drawing. 4. Enter a thickness value. Piping is now at the new elevation. Remember to set it back to 0'-0" when you are finished with the new elevation.


197

Dimension Panel

Rotated CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Rotated Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Rotated Command line: DIMR Places rotated dimensions. You are prompted for the angle of rotation and the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place rotated dimensions 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Rotated . Alternatively, type DIMR on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the dimension angle, or select two points to indicate the angle. Select the origin location for the first extension line. Select the origin location for the second extension line. The software continues to prompt you for extension lines. 5. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence. 6. Select a location for the dimension line. 7. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension. The software displays the dimension.

Horizontal with Tail CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal with Tail Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Horizontal Command line: DIMTAILH Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.

Place horizontal tailed dimensions 1. Click Horizontal with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILH on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the reference point for the dimension. 3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end. 4. Select the location for the dimension. 5. Press ENTER to end the sequence. When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the reference point or use the previous reference point.

Vertical with Tail CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical with Tail Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Vert Command line: DIMTAILV Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.

198


Dimension Panel

Place vertical tailed dimensions 1. Click Vertical with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILV on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the reference point for the dimension. 3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end. 4. Select the location for the dimension. 5. Press ENTER to end the sequence. When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the reference point or use the previous reference point.

Change CADWorx Plant II: Dimensions > Change Command line: CHANGELEV Moves all selected entities (blocks, lines, polylines and so on) to a new elevation in reference with the world coordinate system. You can also change a component elevation to 1/2 its actual outside diameter. Arbitrary - Places the component anywhere in the drawing. BOP Correction - Aligns the pipe bottom with the center of the connected piece.

Change the Elevation 1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Change on the Dimensions panel. Alternatively, type CHANGEELEV on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER to select the default. 3. Select a point in the drawing, or enter a numerical value. 4. Select a point in the drawing. 5. Select the needed objects for elevation, and press ENTER. 6. Select a point in the drawing. The component appears at the new elevation.

Component CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Component Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Component Command line: ANOTCOMP Places component annotation.

Options Tag - Annotates the component with its tag. Long - Annotate the component with its long description and appends the size to the front. Short - Annotates the component with its short description and appends the size to the front.


199

Dimension Panel Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation. Leader - Adds a leader to the text. Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.

Place component annotation 1. Click Component . Alternatively, type ANOTCOMP on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the annotation type. 3. Select the component to annotate. 4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification. 5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle. The software displays the annotation.

Elevation CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Elevation Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Elevation Command line: ANOTELEV Places component elevation annotation.

Options BOP - Labels the bottom of the pipe elevation. TOP - Labels the top of the pipe elevation. Centerline - Labels the centerline elevation. Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation. Leader - Adds a leader to the text. Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.

Place component elevation annotation 1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ANOTELEV on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the component to annotate elevation. 3. Specify the elevation option to use. The software displays a rubber band to the selected component. 4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification. 5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle. The software displays the annotation.

Coordinates CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Coordinates

200


Dimension Panel Plant menu: Dimension > Coordinates Command line: DIMCOORD Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. You can place the text at the coordinate with or without a leader. TEXTSIZE is controlled by DIMSCALE and DIMTXT.

Options Leader - Places a leader. Other point - Places the dimension text in an alternate location without a leader. Same point - Places the dimension text at the same location which is picked without a leader. Centerline - Places the dimension text either with a north or east designation. This option labels a vertical dimension as east and a horizontal dimension as north. The following AutoCAD setvars affect the dimensioning routines: DIMALT, DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMASZ, DIMBLK, DIMEXE, DIMEXO, DIMLFAC, DIMTXT, DIMZIN, DIMSCALE, LUNITS, LUPREC, and UNITMODE.

Place coordinates 1. Click Coordinates . Alternatively, type DIMCOORD on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. If necessary, press ENTER, or type Y on the command line and press ENTER, to change to the world coordinate system. 3. Select an extension line point. 4. Select an option. 5. Follow the prompts to place the coordinates. The coordinates display.

Tick Mark CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Tick Mark Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Tick Mark Command line: TICK Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on. This command is dependent upon the DIMSCALE being set properly. For example; if the gasket thickness was set to 1/8" and the scale of the drawing was set to full, the distance from the extension line to the tick mark would be 1/8". If the scale of the drawing was set to 3/4"=1'-0", the distance from the tick mark to the extension line would be 3/8". This insures that the tick mark is visible on a plotted drawing. The initial prompt allows you to set the thickness, but does not appear again during the single drawing session. Changing the thickness is allowed in the next prompt.


201

Dimension Panel

Place tick marks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Click Tick Mark . Alternatively, type TICK on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the thickness, or press ENTER to accept the default. Type C on the command line, and press ENTER if you need to change the thickness. Type a value for the thickness. Select the point. Select a direction parallel with the extension line. Select the gasket side. Select the extension line. Select a direction parallel with the extension line. Select the gasket side. The software displays the tick mark.

ISO Text Plant menu: Text > ISO Text Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. These commands are similar to the AutoCAD DTEXT command.

Height Plant menu: Text > Height Command line: TEXTHEIGHT Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. This is useful when you are zoomed to an unknown factor in paper space.

Options Entire drawing - Chooses all text on the drawing. Layer - Specifies a layer for selection. CADWorx’s default text layer is TEXT. Selection - Matches the height of text that you select.

202


SECTION 12

Graphics / Pipe Ends CADWorx Plant II tab: Graphics / Pipe Ends Command Name Section - Opens the Sections dialog box in which you can select a section graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Section (on page 206).

Command Line SECTIONS

Detail - Opens the Details dialog box in which you can select DETAILS a detail graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Detail (on page 207). Plan - Opens the Plan dialog box in which you can select a plan graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Plan (on page 208).

PLANS

Elevation - Opens the Elevations box in which you can select ELEVATIONS an elevation graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Elevation (on page 209). Arrow - Opens the Arrows dialog box in which you can select ARROWS an arrow head graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Arrow (on page 210). Weld - Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box in which you select a weld symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Weld (on page 211).

WELDS

ISO - Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box in which you ISOS can select an ISO symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see ISO (on page 211). Misc - Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box in which you can select a miscellaneous symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Misc (on page 213).

MISC

Instrument - Opens the Instruments dialog box in which you can select an instrument graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Instrument (on page 214).

INSTRUMENTS

Dots - Opens the Dots dialog box in which you can select a weld dots graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Dots (on page 215).

DOTS

Fitting Width - Controls the appearance of all flanged, socket weld, and threaded fittings. For more information, see Fitting Width.

FITTINGWIDTH

Single Line Width - Specifies the line width for single-line components. For more information, see Single Line Width.

LINEWIDTH


203

Graphics / Pipe Ends Each of the Graphics commands opens a related dialog box, which is used to preview and select a graphic for placement in the drawing. A drawing file is used to display the preview graphic in the dialog box. These graphic drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. They can be modified to meet your specific project requirements. A modified graphic drawing file must contain the same number of attributes as are currently in the drawing.

Adding preview graphics If necessary, you can add more graphics to any of the graphics dialog boxes by modifying the contents of the Pipe_alt.dat file. This file contains the definitions for each graphic type. The example below shows the graphics group in the Pipe_alt.dat file that is referenced in the Sections dialog box. [Sections] s1s.dwg Head graph1 “s1” 1 s2s.dwg Head w/ Attrib graph1 “s2” 2 s3s.dwg Head w/ 2 Attrib graph1 “s3” 3 s4s.dwg End w/ Attrib graph1 “s4” 4 Columns must start at positions 1, 40, and 75 and define the information outlined below.

  

COL1 (Position 1) - Drawing used in the dialog box for preview image.

    

Before you modify the Pipe_alt.dat file, make a backup copy. If the columns are not at the required positions, the drawing function fails. There must not be any blank lines located within a section. There must be a blank line at the beginning and at the end of a section. The scale of the graphics inserted into the drawing, excluding isometric symbol graphics, is based upon the value of the AutoCAD setvar DIMSCALE. If DIMSCALE is set to 0, as is required for paper space, the software inserts graphics at a scale of 1. Isometric symbol graphics are inserted at a scale of 1 regardless of the DIMSCALE setting.

COL2 (Position 40) - Name displayed in the dialog box for graphic name. COL3 (Position 75) - Function used to draw the graphic in the drawing with arguments.

System Prompts The system prompts required to draw the graphic types delivered with the software are outlined in the table below.

204

Function

System Response

Prompt 1

Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER

Prompt 2

Pick left justified insertion point: pick point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick direction or enter angle Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER

Prompt 3

Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction in the drawing or enter angle Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106) Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")


Graphics / Pipe Ends Prompt 4

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)

Prompt 5

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER ( ex: 106)

Prompt 6

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection or other direction: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 7

Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing Pick mark location: pick point in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)

Prompt 8

Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)

Prompt 9

Pick left end point: pick a point in the drawing Pick right end point: pick a point in the drawing Enter title: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: ELEVATION NORTH) Enter scale: enter a string (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")

Prompt 10

Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: SDV) Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 1)

Prompt 11

Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: PI) Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106) Enter third level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: B)

Prompt 12

Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle

Prompt 13

Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Prompt 14

Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Pick direction: pick a direction

Prompt 15

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing (not center insertion, outside edge) Pick direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 101)Weld

Prompt 16

Pick leader start point: pick a point in the drawing Pick intermediate point: pick a point in the drawing Pick direction for tail: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 17

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 18

Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Prompt 19

Pick insertion point on line: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 20

Pick location: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation or [Up/Down/Roll/mirrorX/mirrorY/mirrorZ]: select an option or pick the rotation


205

Graphics / Pipe Ends

Section CADWorx Plant II tab: Section Pipe menu: Graphics > Section Command line: SECTIONS Opens the Sections dialog box, which allows you to select a section graphic for placement in the drawing.

Sections Dialog Box Displays the sections graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each section graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the section graphics that display in the Sections dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Sections Graphic Name

AutoCAD Drawing Name

Function Name

Head

S1S.dwg

Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib

S2S.dwg

Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib

S3S.dwg

Prompt 3

End w/ Attrib

S4S.dwg

Prompt 4

End w 2Attrib

S5S.dwg

Prompt 5

End

S6S.dwg

Prompt 6

Middle

S7S.dwg

Prompt 6

Place a section graphic 1. Click Section . Alternatively, type SECTIONS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Sections dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

206



Detail CADWorx Plant II tab: Detail Pipe menu: Graphics > Details Command line: DETAILS Opens the Details dialog box, which allows you to select a detail graphic for placement in the drawing.

Details Dialog Box Displays the detail graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each details graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the detail graphics that display in the Details dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Detail Graphic Name


Function Name

Head

D1S.dwg

Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib

D2S.dwg

Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib

D3S.dwg

Prompt 3

Mark w/ Attrib

D4S.dwg

Prompt 7

Mark w 2Attrib

D5S.dwg

Prompt 8

Place a detail graphic 1. Click Detail . Alternatively, type Details on the command line and then press ENTER. The Details dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.


207


Plan CADWorx Plant II tab: Plan Pipe menu: Graphics > Plans Command line: PLANS Opens the Plans dialog box, which allows you to select a plan graphic for placement in the drawing.

Plans Dialog Box Displays the plan graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each plan graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the plan graphics that display in the Plans dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Plan Graphic Name


Function Name

Head

P1S.dwg

Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib

P2S.dwg

Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib

P3S.dwg

Prompt 3

Place a plan graphic 1. Click Plan . Alternatively, type PLANS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Plans dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

208



Elevation CADWorx Plant II tab: Elevation Pipe menu: Graphics > Elevations Command line: ELEVATIONS Opens the Elevations dialog box, which allows you to select an elevation graphic for placement in the drawing.

Elevations Dialog Box Displays the elevation graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each elevation graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the elevation graphics that display in the Elevations dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Elevation Graphic Name


Function Name

Head

E1S.dwg

Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib

E2S.dwg

Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib

E3S.dwg

Prompt 3

Generic Head

L1S.dwg

Prompt 9

Place an elevation graphic 1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ELEVATIONS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Elevations dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.


209


Arrow CADWorx Plant II tab: Arrow Pipe menu: Graphics > Arrows Command line: ARROWS Opens the Arrows dialog box, which allows you to select an arrow head graphic for placement in the drawing.

Arrows Dialog Box Displays the arrow head graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each arrow head graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the arrow head graphics that display in the Arrows dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Arrow Graphic Name


Function Name

North

N1S.dwg

Prompt 14

Prevailing

N2S.dwg

Prompt 12

Model Iso North

N3S.dwg

Prompt 12

Paper Iso North

N4S.dwg

Prompt 14

Small

A1S.dwg

Prompt 12

Medium

A2S.dwg

Prompt 12

Large

A3S.dwg

Prompt 12

Place an arrow head graphic 1. Click Arrow . Alternatively, type ARROWS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Arrows dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

210



Weld CADWorx Plant II tab: Weld Pipe menu: Graphics > Weld Command line: WELDS Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select a weld symbol graphic for placement in the drawing.

Weld Symbols Dialog Box

Place a weld symbol graphic 1. Click Weld . Alternatively, type WELDS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Welds dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

ISO CADWorx Plant II tab: ISO Pipe menu: Graphics > ISO Command line: ISOS Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select an isometric symbol graphic for placement in the drawing.

Isometric Symbols Dialog Box Displays the isometric symbol graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each isometric symbols graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the isometric symbol graphics that display in the Isometric Symbols dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Isometric Symbol Display Name


Function Name

Adjustable Base Ell

Adjustable_Base_Ell.dwg

Prompt 20


211


212

Angle

Angle.dwg

Prompt 20

Arrow1

Arrow1.dwg

Prompt 20

Arrow2

Arrow2.dwg

Prompt 20

Arrow3

Arrow3.dwg

Prompt 20

Base Support

Base_Support.dwg

Prompt 20

Channel

Channel.dwg

Prompt 20

Column

Column.dwg

Prompt 20

Column Knee Brace

Column_Knee_Brace.dwg

Prompt 20

DummyLeg

DummyLeg.dwg

Prompt 20

Floorwall Penetration

Floorwall_Penetration.dwg

Prompt 20

Grating Penetration1

Grating_Penetration_1.dwg

Prompt 20



Prompt 20



Prompt 20

Hanger Clamp

Hanger_Clamp.dwg

Prompt 20

Hanger Clamp 1

Hanger_Clamp_2.dwg

Prompt 20

Hanger Clevis

Hanger_Clevis.dwg

Prompt 20

Hanger Clevis 1

Hanger_Clevis_1.dwg

Prompt 20

Insulation Saddle

Insulation_Saddle.dwg

Prompt 20

Knee Brace

Knee_Brace.dwg

Prompt 20

Pipe Clamp

Pipe_Clamp.dwg

Prompt 20

Pipe Shoe Extrude

Pipe_Shoe_Extrude.dwg

Prompt 20

Pipe Shoe Faced

Pipe_Shoe_Faced.dwg

Prompt 20

Spring Hanger Clamp

Spring_Hanger_Clamp.dwg

Prompt 20

T Support

T_Support.dwg

Prompt 20

Ubolt

Ubolt.dwg

Prompt 20

Ubolt 1

Ubolt_2.dwg

Prompt 20

Wide Flange Beam

WFlange_Beam.dwg

Prompt 20



Place an isometric symbol graphic 1. Click ISO . Alternatively, type ISOS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Isometric Symbol dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

Misc CADWorx Plant II tab: Misc Pipe menu: Graphics > Misc Command line: MISC Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box, which allows you to select a graphic for placement in the drawing.

Miscellaneous Dialog Box Displays the set of miscellaneous graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each listed graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the graphics that display in the Miscellaneous dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Sections Graphic Name


Function Name

Small Circle

M1S.dwg

Prompt 15

Small Hexagon

M2S.dwg

Prompt 15

Small Square

M3S.dwg

Prompt 15

Small Rev

M4S.dwg

Prompt 15

Large Circle

M5S.dwg

Prompt 15

Large Hexagon

M6S.dwg

Prompt 15

Large Square

M7S.dwg

Prompt 15

Large Rev

M8S.dwg

Prompt 15


213


Place a miscellaneous graphic 1. Click Misc . Alternatively, type MISC on the command line and then press ENTER. The Miscellaneous dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

Instrument CADWorx Plant II tab: Instrument Pipe menu: Graphics > Instruments Command line: INSTRUMENTS Opens the Instruments dialog box, which allows you to select an instrument graphic for placement in the drawing.

Instruments Dialog Box Displays the instrument graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each instrument graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the instrument graphics that display in the Instruments dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

214

Instrument Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name

Function Name

2 Attrib Local

F1S.dwg

Prompt 10

3 Attrib Local

F2S.dwg

Prompt 11

2 Attrib Board

F3S.dwg

Prompt 12



Place an instrument graphic 1. Click Instrument . Alternatively, type INSTRUMENTS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Instruments dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

Dots CADWorx Plant II tab: Dots Pipe menu: Graphics > Dots Command line: DOTS Opens the Dots dialog box, which allows you to select a weld dot graphic for placement in the drawing.

Dots Dialog Box Displays the weld dot graphics that are currently defined in the software. Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic. Each weld dot graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203). The table below lists the weld dot graphics that display in the Dots dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204). Dots Graphic Name


Function Name

Head

S1.dwg

Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib

S2.dwg

Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib

S3.dwg

Prompt 3

End w/ Attrib

S4.dwg

Prompt 4

End w 2Attrib

S5.dwg

End

S6.dwg

Prompt 6

Middle

S7.dwg

Prompt 6


Prompt 5

215


Place a weld dot graphic 1. Click Dots . Alternatively, type DOTS on the command line and then press ENTER. The Dots dialog box appears. 2. Select the required graphic in the list. The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing. 4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing. The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.

216


SECTION 13

Layers Panel CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers Command Name

Command Line

Change Layer - Changes an object’s layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. For more information, see Change Layer (on page 218).

LAYERCHANGE

Set Layer - Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. For more information, see Set Layer (on page 218).

LAYERSET

Delete Layer - Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Delete Layer (on page 218).

LAYERDELETE

Layer Off - Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Layer Off (on page 219).

LAYEROFF

On - Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer On (on page 219).

LAYERON

Match Layer - Changes an object’s properties to match those of another object that you select. For more information, see Match Layer (on page 219).

MATCH

Isolate Layer - Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Isolate Layer (on page 220).

LAYERISOLATE

Un-isolate Layer - Turns all of the layers back on that LAYERUNISO were turned off with the Isolate Layer command. For more information, see Un-Isolate Layer (on page 220). Previous - Sets the current layer back to the previous layer LAYERRESTORE when you have placed dimensioning or text. For more information, see Previous (on page 220).


217

Layers Panel

Change Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Change Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Change Command line: LAYERCHANGE Changes an object’s layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. You can select the objects to change individually or with a fence.

Change the layer associated with an object 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Change Layer . Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Select additional object to change layers, or press ENTER to end the selection process. Select an object on the layer to which you want to move the objects. The software moves the selected object to the new layer.

Set Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Set Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Set Command line: LAYERSET Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. You must select an individual object.

Set the active layer 1. Click Set Layer . 2. Select the objects whose layer you want to be the active layer. The software sets the active layer to that of the selected object.

Delete Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Delete Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Delete Command line: LAYERDELETE Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For example, you can delete all the entities, such as lines, text, and so on, on layer 0. You must select an individual entity. If you select the VIEWL layer, the software displays a warning message. Deleting the VIEWL layer deletes a block named CPM which the software inserts when beginning a new drawing. This block contains information (sizes, specification, and so on) that are used when opening an existing drawing. If you delete this layer, this information is not available for the next drawing session. You can re-enter this information.

218


Layers Panel

Delete a layer 1. Click Delete Layer . 2. Select the object whose layer you want to delete. The software deletes the layer associated with the selected object.

Layer Off CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer Off Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Off Command line: LAYEROFF Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. You must select an Individual entity.

Turn off a layer 1. Click Layer Off . 2. Select the object whose layer you want to turn off. The software turns off the display of the layer associated with the selected object.

Layer On CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer On Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > On Command line: LAYERON Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer Off (on page 219). No selection is required.

Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command 

Click Layer On . The software redisplays the layer.

Match Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Match Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Match Command line: MATCH Changes an object’s layer to match that of another object that you select.


219

Layers Panel

Match an object's layer 1. Click Match Layer . 2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Press ENTER to end the selection. 3. Select an object on the layer that you want to match. The software changes the layer of the objects.

Isolate Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Isolate Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Isolate Command line: LAYERISOLATE Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select.

Display only the layer associated with an object 1. Click Isolate Layer . 2. Select an object on the layer to isolate. The software turns off all layers except for the layer associated with the selected object..

Un-Isolate Layer CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Un-Isolate Layer Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Un-Isolate Command line: LAYERUNISO Turns all of the layers on. No selection is required.

Turn on all layers 

Click Un-Isolate Layer . The software turns on display for all layers.

Previous Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Previous Command line: LAYERRESTORE Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text. This command is only available after these two items are placed. This command does not restore a previous layer that has been changed with the Layer or Ddlmodes commands.

220


SECTION 14

Restraints Panel CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below. Command Name

Command Line

Reinforcing Pad - Inserts intelligent information indicating a REINFPAD reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad (on page 222). Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts intelligent information indicating REINFSAD a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing Saddle (on page 222). Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For more information, see Translational (on page 223).

TRANSLATIONAL

Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more information, see Anchor (on page 224).

ANCHOR

Spring Hanger- Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).

SPRING

Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more information, see Rotational (on page 225).

ROTATIONAL

Snubber - Creates a snubber-type restraint. For more information, see Snubber (on page 226).

SNUBBER

Guide - Creates a guide-type restraint. For more information, see Guide (on page 226).

GUIDE

Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees. The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can position a rotational restraint at any vector. 



The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is sloped. All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID, SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.


221

Restraints Panel 

You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.

Reinforcing Pad CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Pad Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Pad Command line: REINFPAD Attaches a reinforcement pad to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement pad is represented by the alpha-identifier P. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link. For information about showing reinforcement pads on an ISOGEN isometric drawing, see Offset Tap (on page 108).

Insert a reinforcement pad 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Reinforcing Pad on the Restraints panel. Select a component. Select the branch pipe component. Type the thickness of the reinforcement pad on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER. The software places the reinforcement pad and notates the drawing with the reinforcing pad alpha-identifier.

Reinforcing Saddle CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Saddle Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle Command line: REINFSAD Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.

222


Restraints Panel

Insert a reinforcement saddle 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Reinforcing Saddle on the Restraints panel. Select a component. Select the branch run of the component. Type the thickness of the reinforcement saddle on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER. The software places the reinforcement saddle and notates the drawing with the reinforcing saddle alpha-identifier.

Translational CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Translational Restraints toolbar: Translational Command line: TRANSLATIONAL Creates a translational-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H1.dwg file.

Place a translational restraint 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Translational on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the transitional placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.


223

Restraints Panel The transitional is placed in the drawing.

Anchor CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Anchor Restraints toolbar: Anchor Command line: ANCHOR Creates an anchor-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H2.dwg file.

Place an anchor 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Anchor on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the anchor placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER. The anchor is placed in the drawing.

Spring Hanger CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Spring Hanger Restraints toolbar: Spring Hanger Command line: SPRING Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H3.dwg file.

224


Restraints Panel

Place a spring hanger 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Spring Hanger on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the spring hanger placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER. The spring hanger is placed in the drawing.

Rotational CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Rotational Restraints toolbar: Rotational Command line: ROTATIONAL Creates a rotational-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H4.dwg file.

Place a rotational restraint 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Rotational on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the restraint placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER. The restraint is placed in the drawing.


225

Restraints Panel

Snubber CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Snubber Restraints toolbar: Snubber Command line: SNUBBER Creates a snubber-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H5.dwg file.

Place a snubber 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Snubber on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the snubber placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER. The snubber is placed in the drawing.

Guide CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Guide Restraints toolbar: Guide Command line: GUIDE Creates a guide-type restraint. This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H6.dwg file.

Place a guide 1. 2. 3. 4.

226

Click Guide on the Restraints panel. Click where you want the guide placed. Select a direction in the drawing. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER. The guide is placed in the drawing.


SECTION 15

UCS Panel CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS Command Name Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).

Command Line VIEWFLAT

Next - Places the current user coordinate system in the next UCSNEXT position. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 230). Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see Compass (on page 230).

COMPASS

North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north position. For more information, see North (on page 230).

VIEWNORTH

South - Places the current user coordinate system in the south position. For more information, see South (on page 231).

VIEWSOUTH

East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east VIEWEAST position. For more information, see East (on page 232). West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west position. For more information, see West (on page 231).

VIEWWEST

UCS Object - Orients the current user coordinate system UCS according to an object that you select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 232).

Point and Shoot UCS AutoCAD allows you to manipulate the X, Y, Z coordinate system UCS (user coordinate system). You must be familiar with the Point and Shoot system of manipulating the UCS. The UCSICON option needs to be On (visible) and set to Origin. This lets you see exactly where the icon is at all times. Although it isn’t necessary, it is highly recommended that it be somewhere on the centerline of the components you are drawing. This keeps everything in the same plane. If you must turn into another plane, use the UCS NEXT command, or choose the appropriate plane (North, South, East, West, or Flat) and place the icon on the centerline of the new plane. If you cannot see the rubber band effect, or if it doesn’t appear correctly, you are out of plane. Pay attention to the icon as it shows where you are. If the broken pencil icon appears, and there are strange lines on the screen instead of pipe and components, your current plane is perpendicular to the viewpoint. Use the Undo command, or change the viewpoint.


227

UCS Panel When dimensioning or annotating an isometric or 3D model, place the UCS icon on a node or a centerline on the run you are working on. The text has the same orientation as the icon. Xtext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the X-axis. When you view a model from the bottom side using a view point with a negative angle from the X-Y plane, text and dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the X-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change from a negative to positive angle from the X-Y view point, you must replace the text for the proper orientation. Ztext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the Z-axis. When viewing a model from the back side using a view point with a 0 to 180 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X axis, text and dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the Z-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change to a rear view position (180 - 360 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X-axis), you must replace the text for the proper orientation. Elevation - Sets the elevation to the present UCS. This command does not set the depth in a North, South, East, or West plane. Setting an elevation of 10' (when the present elevation is 0') raises the UCS to 10' regardless of the position. Rotate - Rotates the present UCS around the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For example, rotating the UCS to 45 degrees after inserting a 45 degree elbow allows you to place other components in line with the 45 degree elbow. COordinate - Specifies an exact X, Y, Z-coordinate in relation to the WCS (world coordinate system). CLip - Clips the view at the present plane set by the UCS. This plane can be established with the Point and Shoot UCS options or any three-point UCS position. The plane can be skewed at any angle. On - Turns on view clipping with clipping distances as set by the Back and Front options. Off - Turns off view clipping. Back - Sets the distance to the back of the clipping area. This value must be a negative number. If this value is positive, it can clip past the front clipping area and leave nothing in the view. Front - Sets the distance to the front of the clipping area. This value must be a positive number. If this value is negative, it can clip past the back clipping area and leave nothing in the view. The CLip option is also available as the command VIEWCLIP. Pick point - Moves the 0,0,0 user base to a point you select. Press Enter to keep the UCS at the same origin but switch to a new plane. For example, press Enter to change from the north plate to a west plane. You must enter other UCS positions with AutoCAD’s UCS command. Two extremely useful options in this command are the OBject and 3 Point. Leave the UCSICON on and set to origin when using any method of rearranging the UCS.

228


UCS Panel If you select a point close to the screens edge, and the UCS icon is on and set to origin, the icon may not remain at this point. AutoCAD requires that the whole icon be visible and places the icon in the lower left corner of the screen. If this happens, zoom out a little or pan toward the new UCS position.

Flat CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > Flat UCS toolbar: Flat Plant menu: UCS > Flat Command line: VIEWFLAT Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position.


229

UCS Panel

UCS Next UCS toolbar: Next Plant menu: UCS > UCS Next Command line: UCSNEXT Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions.

Compass UCS toolbar: Compass UCS toolbar: Compass Command line: COMPASS Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. The symbol displays at the point you select.

As the display's orientation changes, the symbol changes accordingly. The aliases VF, VN, VS, VE, and VW are also available.

North CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > North UCS toolbar: North Plant menu: UCS > North Command line: VIEWNORTH Places the current user coordinate system in the north position.

230


UCS Panel

South CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > South UCS toolbar: South Plant menu: UCS > South Command line: VIEWSOUTH Places the current user coordinate system in the south position.

West CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > West UCS toolbar: West Plant menu: UCS > West Command line: VIEWWEST Places the current user coordinate system in the west position.


231

UCS Panel

East CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > East UCS toolbar: East Plant menu: UCS > East Command line: VIEWEAST Places the current user coordinate system in the east position.

UCS Object UCS toolbar: UCS Object Plant menu: UCS > UCS Object Command line: UCS Orients the UCS according to an object that you select. Please refer to the AutoCAD documentation on the UCS (User Coordinate System) for more detail. This command is useful for rearranging dimensions in the model space (MSPACE) of a CADWorx isometric model. Run this command, and then select the dimension. The software places the UCS according to the position of the dimension allowing it to be stretched and moved.

232


SECTION 16

Steel Shapes Panel CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Shapes Shape Name

Command Line

Wide Flange

WSHAPE

Channel

CSHAPE

Angle

LSHAPE

Tee

TSHAPE

Pipe

PSHAPE

Tube

TSSHAPE

Flat Bar

FBSHAPE

Round Bar

RBSHAPE

Channel with Lip

CLIPSHAPE

Angle with Lib

LLIPSHAPE

Z

ZSHAPE

Double Angle

2LSHAPE

Shapes CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Shapes panel Plant > Steel > Shapes Command line: STEEL Draws many different steel shapes in the drawing. When placing steel shapes, you can:  attach steel shapes to lines or you can specify the end points.  place members into the current UCS.  define the location of the centerline and the angle about the centerline.  place steel on arcs.  copy, stretch, or edit the size with the edit function.

Draw Steel Dialog Box Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth). Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.


233

Steel Shapes Panel Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active location. Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of the component. Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen. Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and position of the line define the component. Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box. User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Properties Dialog Box Displays the available properties of the selected member. The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top. Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight yourself. Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length. The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing. The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage distance.

234


Steel Shapes Panel User Input Dialog Box Defines custom dimensioned components. Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of which dimension is which. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length, and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and placed. Description - Defines the component description. Density - Defines the material density for the component. Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable. Steel channel and angle shapes cannot be modified using the AutoCAD MIRROR command. Use Flip Flange in the dialog to mirror channel and angle shapes. When editing shape data files, remember these rules:  Columns have to be separated by two or more spaces.  First column has to be called "MEMBER". The member name cannot have two consecutive spaces.  Required columns have to in the exact order listed for each type of steel shape to generate the AutoCAD solid.  All columns after the required columns are optional. These optional columns display in the Properties dialog box for reference. The Ix (Inertia about X-axis), Iy (Inertia about Y-axis), and J (torsion) columns might be used by the SEXPORT command when export to CAESAR II Steel (*.str) files.  The cross sectional area (AREA) and fillet radius (R) columns are required in the data file but are not used by the software to generate the AutoCAD solid shape. These values are not stored with the component.  For imperial sizes:  Weight (WGT) column is in pounds per foot (lbs/ft) 2  Area (AREA) column is in square inches (in )  All other required columns are in inches (in)  For metric sizes:  Weight (WGT) column is in kilograms per meter (kg/m) 2  Area (AREA) column is in square centimeters (cm )  All other required columns are in millimeters (mm)


235

Steel Shapes Panel

Wide Flange Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=W)

Required columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Depth WEB_THK - Web Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used)

236


Steel Shapes Panel

Channel Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=C)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) WEB_THK - Web Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)


237

Steel Shapes Panel

Angle Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=L)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length LEG2 - Leg 2 length THK - Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

238


Steel Shapes Panel

Tee Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=WT)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Depth STEM_THK - Stem Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)


239

Steel Shapes Panel

Pipe Shapes Data file sample (Type=P)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) OD - Outside Diameter WALL_THK - Wall Thickness (not used)

240


Steel Shapes Panel

Tube Shapes Data file sample (Type=TS)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) SIDE1 - Side 1 length SIDE2 - Side 2 length THK - Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used)


241

Steel Shapes Panel

Flat Bar Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=FB)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) WIDTH - Width THK - Thickness

242


Steel Shapes Panel

Round Bar Shapes Data file sample (Type=RB)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) OD - Outside Diameter


243

Steel Shapes Panel

Channel Shape with Lip Data file sample (TYPE=C_LIP):

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Web Thickness THK - Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width LIP - Lip Length X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)

244


Steel Shapes Panel

Angle Shape with Lip Data file sample (TYPE=L_LIP):

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length THK - Thickness LEG2 - Leg 2 length LIP - Lip Length X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)


245

Steel Shapes Panel

Z Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=Z):

Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WEIGHT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) HEIGHT - Height THK - Thickness LEG1 - Leg 1 length LIP1 - Lip 1 length (optional) LEG2 - Leg 2 length (optional) LIP2 - Lip 2 length (optional) THK_LEG1 - Leg 1 thickness (optional) THK_LEG2 - Lip 1 thickness (optional) THK_LIP1 - Leg 2 thickness (optional) THK_LIP2 - Lip 2 thickness (optional)

246


Steel Shapes Panel

Angle Double Shape Data file sample (TYPE=2L)

Required Columns: MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length LEG2 - Leg 2 length THK - Thickness Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)


247

Steel Shapes Panel

248


SECTION 17

Steel Draw Panel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Draw panel Command Description

Command line

Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, SPLATE see Plate (on page 250). Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page 252).

SBPLATE

Steel Bolt - Places a bolt in the drawing. For more information, see Steel Bolts (on page 255).

BTSHAPE

Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting COMP2STEEL an existing component in the model. For more information, see Set Size by Component (on page 257). Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic SGENERICD AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attachment (on page 257). User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page 258).

SUSER

Loft - Creates loft steel components. For more information, see Loft (on page 260).

SLOFT

Steel Single Line - Places steel single line components in SLS the drawing. For more information, see Single Line Steel (on page 261). Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use to build structural steel models. For more information, see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268).

SFRAME

Annotate - Annotates and dimensions frame lines. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).

SFRAMEANOT

Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the SLADDER drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271). Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more information, see Handrail (on page 273).

SHRAIL

Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see Stair (on page 275).

SSTAIR


249

Steel Draw Panel

Plate CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Plate Steel Draw toolbar: Plate Plant menu: Steel > Plate Command line: SPLATE Creates plates in the model using existing shapes or by specifying a minimum of three plate corners. You define the extrusion direction after selecting the shape or defining the corners. Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define plate data files location. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.

Draw Plate Dialog Box Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself. Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box. Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight defined in the data file.

250


Steel Draw Panel Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when editing an existing plate in the model. Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners. Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape. Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.


Place plate by points (on page 251) Place plate by closed polyline (on page 251) Place plate by curves (on page 252)

Place plate by points 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

.

You can also type SPLATE in the command line. The Draw Plate dialog box displays. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list. Edit the Details boxes as needed. Click Pick points. Define the first corner location of the plate. Continue to define the corners of the plate. When you are finished, right-click and then select Enter on the menu. Select Positive or Negative from the context menu. You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.

Place plate by closed polyline 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

.

You can also type SPLATE in the command line. The Draw Plate dialog box displays. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list. Edit the Details boxes as needed. Click Select line(s). Select an existing closed polyline shape in the model. Right-click and, then select Positive or Negative from the context menu. You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.


251

Steel Draw Panel

Place plate by curves 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

.

You can also type SPLATE in the command line. The Draw Plate dialog box displays. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list. Edit the Details boxes as needed. Click Select curve(s). Select the existing curves in the model. Right-click. Enter the width distance for the plate. Click in the model to indicate which direction to apply the width. Select Bottom, Center, or Top for the insertion location.

Base Plate CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Base Plate Steel Draw toolbar: Base Plate Plant menu: Steel > Base Plate Command line: SBPLATE Places base plates in open space or attached to the end of a steel member. CADWorx automatically copes the steel member with the base plate.

Base Plate Dialog Box Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order.

Details Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header.

252


Steel Draw Panel Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself. Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box. Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight defined in the data file.

Plate Dimensions Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement. X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid. Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.

Hole Dimensions On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate without holes. Row count - Enter the number of hole rows. Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the holes. Column count - Enter the number of hole columns. Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of the holes. Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole. Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate. Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from the hole center. X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center. Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center. Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.


Place a base plate (on page 254) Place a base plate with holes (on page 254)


253

Steel Draw Panel

Place a base plate 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

.

You can also type SBPLATE in the command line. The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list. Edit the Details boxes as needed. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed. Clear the On/Off option to place the base plate without holes. Click Pick point. The prompt Specify center base point displays. Define the location for the base plate center. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.

Place a base plate with holes 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

254

.

You can also type SBPLATE in the command line. The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list. Edit the Details boxes as needed. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed. Select the On/Off option to place the base plate with holes. Enter the values for the hole dimensions and locations. Click Pick point. The prompt Specify center base point displays. Define the location for the base plate center. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.


Steel Draw Panel

Steel Bolts CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Steel Bolts Steel Draw toolbar: Steel Bolts Command line: BTSHAPE Draws bolts in the drawing. You can place bolt shapes on lines, or you can specify the end points.

Draw Steel Dialog Box Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth). Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active location. Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of the component. Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen. Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and position of the line define the component. Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box.


255

Steel Draw Panel User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Properties Dialog Box Displays the available properties of the selected member. The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top. Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight yourself. Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length. The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing. The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage distance.

User Input Dialog Box Defines custom dimensioned components. Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of which dimension is which. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length, and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and placed. Description - Defines the component description. Density - Defines the material density for the component. Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.

256


Steel Draw Panel

Set Size by Component CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Set Size by Component Steel Draw toolbar: Set Size by Component Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Size by Component Command line: COMP2STEEL Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model. 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Set Size by Component . 2. Select an existing component in the model that has the size that you want to use.

Generic Attachment CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Generic Attachment Steel Draw toolbar: Generic Attachment Command line: SGENERICD Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a component, use this routine to attach xdata information. You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component. To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it reflect the CG correctly, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint or NEArest to the end of the centerline or the exact known location.

Generic Attach Dialog Box Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25. Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6. Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345. Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid. Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid. BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was attached.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Generic Attachment

.

You can also type SGENERICD in the command line. The Generic Attach dialog box displays. 2. Enter the information to attach in the appropriate boxes. 3. Click Attach. 4. Select the nonCADWorx object to which to attach the information.


257

Steel Draw Panel

User Shape CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > User Shape Steel Draw toolbar: User Shape Plant menu: Steel > User Shape Command line: SUSER Places a component using a custom user shape. You select the component to draw based on the user shape DWG file that you previously created. The extrusion direction and distance is based on points picked or line selected in the drawing. Roll angle can edited along with the standard annotations.

User Shapes Dialog Box Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Length - Specifies the length of the shape. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape. Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing. Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes. For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.ini must be in the same folder as the user shape drawing files. The Type.ini must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder ..\CADWorx (version)\Steel_I\User Shape is used to store the user shape drawing files.

258


Steel Draw Panel The figure below shows the parameters stored in a user created DWG file that can be used to create a roof purlin user shape.

After selecting the user shape from the dialog, you pick points or select a line to define the extrusion length. See the figure below.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click User Shape

.

You can also type SUSER in the command line. The User Shapes dialog box displays. 2. In the Select Member box, select the user shape to use. 3. Enter values in the Details boxes as needed.


259

Steel Draw Panel 4. Click Pick points to place the component by defining the two end locations. -orClick Select line to select an existing line in the drawing on which to place the component.

Loft CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Loft Steel Draw toolbar: Loft Command line: SLOFT Creates lofted steel components. You must have two cross sections and the path curve between them defined in the drawing before using this command. The cross sections define the shape of the resulting steel component. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.

1. Draw the two cross sections and the path curve in the drawing. 2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Loft 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

260

.

You can also type SLOFT in the command line. Enter the material density. Select the first cross section. Select the second cross section. Right-click to indicate you are finished selecting cross sections. Select the path curve. Define the annotations, descriptions, part number, and material.


Steel Draw Panel

Single Line Steel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Single Line Steel Steel Draw toolbar: Single Line Steel Command line: SLS

Using the Steel Single Line program 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Generate the 3D model of the steel in Model Space. Create viewports in the Layouts. Configure the object settings on the General tab. (see below). Generate the viewports. Apply new settings to objects. Configure the dimension settings on the Dimension tab (see below). Dimension the viewport.

This feature is only part of CADWorx Steel Professional Plus or CADWorx Plant Professional.

Using the Steel Drawing Manager The palette can be resized, docked and hidden like any AutoCAD palette. The command SLSSHOWPALETTE shows the palette if it is hidden. The column line between the field labels and the settings can be moved left or right to resize the columns.


261

Steel Draw Panel General Tab

Tools

262


Steel Draw Panel Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another drawing Load Settings From File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file. Add Setting - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse. Delete Setting - Delete a named setting from the list. Match Settings - Apply settings from one object to other objects. Turn off Vertical symbols - Used to turn off vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis objects. Generate - Generate the steel member drawing objects in a viewport. Set to Object - Apply new settings to a viewport or individual steel components already drawn. Update - Updates the existing objects to match changes made to the model Reset Settings - Resets individual member objects back to the viewport settings and link them back to the view port. Archive drawings - Detaches all intelligence from the drawing objects. Underlying models can be removed. Turn of Vertical Symbols - Used to turn on vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis objects previously turned off. Settings List Box - Choose the named settings.

Line Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layer for New Steel Color - AutoCAD object color for New Steel Linetype - Loaded AutoCAD linetype for New Steel Weight - AutoCAD line weight for New Steel


263

Steel Draw Panel Layer Exist - AutoCAD Layer for Existing Steel Color Exist - AutoCAD object color for Existing Steel Weight Exist - AutoCAD line weight for Existing Steel Gap Style - Used to set either Manual gap distance or automatic gap distance  Automatic uses the steel member end gap type to gap the lines set by the Gap Distance setting  Manual applies the Gap Distance to all ends regardless of gap type Gap Distance - This is a paper space distance for the coping gaps

Tag Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layers Color - AutoCAD object colors Text Style - Loaded text styles Text Height - Paper space text height Offset - Set an offset above the line / symbol for the test to be placed Justification - AutoCAD text justifications Style - Short or Long descriptions Display - Display of the tag, on or off

Symbol Settings

Layer Main - AutoCAD Layers for visible parts of the symbol Color Main - AutoCAD object colors for visible parts of the symbol Linetype Main - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for visible parts of the symbol Layer Minor - AutoCAD Layers for hidden parts of the symbol

264


Steel Draw Panel Color Minor - AutoCAD object colors for hidden parts of the symbol Linetype Minor - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for hidden parts of the symbol Scale - Width scale based on the actual visual width in the viewport Length - Paper space length Offset - Set the distance between parallel elements for visual effect Display - Display of the symbol, on or off

Dimension Tab

Tools

Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another drawing.


265

Steel Draw Panel Load Settings from File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file. Add Named Style - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse. Delete Named Style - Delete a named setting from the list. Generate Plan Dimension - Generate the plan style dimensions of a selected viewport. Generate Elevated Dimension - Generate the elevation style dimensions of a selected viewport. Clear Dimensions - Remove all dimensions of a selected viewport. Update Dimensions - Update existing dimensions of a selected viewport. Settings List Box - Used to choose the named settings. Dimension Level - Select how many dimension levels to use.

Dimension Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layers Dim Style - AutoCAD Dimension Styles Dim Type - Select the dimension type.  Baseline Type  Continue Type  Ordinate Type Offset - The distance from the edge of the viewport to place the first level dimensions Elevation Value - The relative elevation of the selected origin point Elevation Prefix - Prefix for the elevation dimensions

266


Steel Draw Panel Tag Settings

Display - To display the column tags on the plan dimensions Layer - AutoCAD Layer of the column tags and text Color - AutoCAD color of the column tags and text Style - Text style for the column tags and text Height - Text height for the column tag text Balloon Size - Diameter of the column tags Orientation - The order of the automatic numbering of the column tags.  LR-BT left to right, bottom to top  LR-TB left to right, top to bottom  RL-BT right to left, bottom to top  RL-TB right to left, top to bottom Vertical - Vertical column tag numbering start and style  Letter (A)  Letter + Number (A1)  Number (1)  Number + Letter (1A) Horizontal - Horizontal column tag numbering start and style.  Letter (A)  Letter + Number (A1)  Number (1)  Number + Letter (1A) Vertical Inc - The increment value of the tag number  Increments the second value of a combination tag  Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2" Horizontal Inc - The increment value of the tag number  Increments the second value of a combination tag  Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"


267

Steel Draw Panel

Frame Creation CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Creation Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Creation Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Creation Command line: SFRAME Create intelligent frames that you can use to build structural steel models.

Frame Creation Dialog Box Name - Specifies the name for the current frame. The frame name is required only when you create more than one frame in the same drawing. If you do not specify a name and you save the frame configuration, the software uses the file name as the frame name. Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the frame insertion point with your mouse. Clear this option to use the coordinate location specified in the X, Y, and Z boxes as the frame insertion location. Repeat Rows/Columns - Select this option to repeat the same rows and columns as the first plan for all subsequent plans. This option provides a quick way to create large frames without repeatedly entering the same information. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration. Create Clipped Views - Select this option to create clipped views for each plan, row, and column. These views can then be accessed using the View command in AutoCAD. The views are clipped in the front and back making them excellent to use in annotation layouts. You need to select the Update Layer option in the View command dialog for the view to be set correctly. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration. Rotation Angle - Enter the rotation angle for the entire frame. The rotation is about the specified insertion point. The rotation angle is saved with the frame configuration. Draw Sloped Vertical Lines - Select this option to make the vertical lines sloped according to each plans X and Y offsets. This option is useful when creating platform frames and requires that each plan have the same number of rows and columns. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration. Plan - Defines the plans for the current frame. Specify the distance from one plan to the next in the Distance column for each plan. You can also specify X and Y offset values from the insertion point before the row and column lines for this plan are created. CADWorx automatically creates labels for each plan based on the distance specified. The elevation label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl with the PLAN_LABEL_START setting. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. The label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270). Click Add to add a new plan to the current frame. Click Remove to delete the selected plans from the current frame. If Repeat Rows/Columns is not selected, Remove deletes all rows and columns associated with the plan that is being removed. Row - Defines the rows for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one row to the next in the Distance column for each row. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the rows are for the currently selected plan. CADWorx automatically creates labels for each row. The row label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [ROW] section contains the characters used in making the label. If there are more rows and available characters, the labels are concatenated.

268


Steel Draw Panel For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270). Columns - Defines the columns for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one column to the next in the Distance column for each column. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the columns are for the currently selected plan. CADWorx automatically creates labels for each column. The column label default settings is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [COLUMN] section contains the characters used in making the label. If there are more columns than available characters, the labels are concatenated. For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270). New - Click to create a new frame. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame. Save - Click to save the current frame to a file. You are prompted to enter a name and specify the location to save the frame configuration. Save As - Click to save the current frame under a different file name. OK - Click to draw the frame in the current drawing. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame.


Create a new frame configuration (on page 269) Edit a frame configuration (on page 270) Place a frame in the drawing (on page 270)

Create a new frame configuration 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

.

You can also type SFRAME in the command line. The Frame Creation dialog box displays. Define the insertion point for the frame. Define the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove. Click Save As. Enter the frame name, and specify of folder location. Click Save.


269

Steel Draw Panel

Edit a frame configuration 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SFRAME in the command line. The Frame Creation dialog box displays. Click Browse, and then open the frame to edit. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove. Click Save. Click Save As to save the frame to a different file.

Place a frame in the drawing 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SFRAME in the command line. The Frame Creation dialog box displays. Click Browse, and then open the frame to place. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove as needed. Click OK. You are prompted to save any edits that you have made to the frame.

Frame Annotation CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Annotation Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Annotation Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Annotation Command line: SFRAMEANOT Annotates and dimensions frame lines. This command can also create the dimensions in call outs in paper space. Dimensions only - Draws only the dimension for the selected frame line. You are prompted to pick the dimension side. The distance the dimensions are offset from the frame line is controlled by the AutoCAD setvar DIMDLI. This option respects the current DIMSCALE setting. Call outs only - Creates the call out and places the label of the selected frame line in a block with attribute. The M5 block located in the [Product Directory]\Support folder is used for the call out. You are prompted to pick the call out location. Both - This option creates both dimensions and call outs. 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Annotation 2. 3. 4. 5.

270

.

You can also type SFRAMEANOT in the command line. Select the frame line in the drawing. Select Dimensions only, Call outs only, or Both. Select the side of the frame line to place the annotation. Pick the location of the annotation.


Steel Draw Panel

Ladder CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Ladder Steel Draw toolbar: Ladder Plant menu: Steel > Ladder Command line: SLADDER Creates ladders by specifying the start and end points of the ladder and rotation angle of the ladder. Click Browse to load a predefined ladder into the dialog box. Use Save As to save a ladder configuration for use later.

Position Tab Start point / End point - Defines the location of the ladder. Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the start and end ladder locations interactively in the model. Clear this option to define the locations using the X, Y, and Z coordinate boxes. Rotation angle - Defines the rotation angle for the entire ladder. Select Specify On-screen to define the rotation interactively in the drawing. Clear the option to use the rotation value specified in the Angle box.

Dimension Tab Sloped ladder - Select to allow the ladder to be sloped. The slope is determined by the difference between the X or Y start and end locations in the Position Tab. Rail width - Enter the inside distance from rail to rail. Above platform - Enter the distance the ladder rails (offset extension of rail) are to extend above the top rung. Rail top exit width - Enter the inside to inside distance of the ladder opening above the platform. Rung spacing - Enter the center to center distance of the ladder rungs. Offset (+/-) - Enter the distance the ladder is offset from the platform.

Cage Tab Cage ladder - Select to place a cage on the ladder if the height of the ladder is over the minimum distance. Curved - Select to connect the hoop bars to the ladder using a curved connection. Max. hoop spacing - Enter the distance from center to center of the intermediate hoops. Cage bar spacing - Enter the distance from the center to center of the vertical bars on the cage. Bottom hoop clearance - Enter the distance from the base elevation or grade to the bottom hoop. Distance to middle - Enter the distance from the ladder rungs to the center of the cage. Small hoop radius - Enter the radius of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is available only when Curved is selected. Connection distance - Enter the distance of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is available only when Curved is not selected. Top hoop radius - Enter the radius of the top hoop from the center of the cage.


271

Steel Draw Panel Intermediate hoop radius - Enter the radius of the intermediate hoop from the center of the cage. Bottom hoop radius - Enter the radius of the bottom hoop from the center of the cage. Top hoop opening - Defines the direction of the hoop opening. If you select Open Left or Open Right, you need to define the side outlet width and extension distances. Side outlet width - Enter the width of the cage side opening. Side outlet extension - Enter the length of the side outlet extension.

Sizes Tab The bars, rungs, hoops, and cage bars rows allows the selection of different components to be used with the ladder. Type - Select the member type. Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration settings. Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected. Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section. Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis. Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member. Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis. Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member. Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.


Place a ladder interactively (on page 272) Place a ladder using key-ins (on page 273) Place a ladder with a cage (on page 273)

Place a ladder interactively 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder . You can also type SLADDER in the command line. The Ladder dialog box displays. 2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place. 3. Select the Position tab. 4. Select the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points. 5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs. 6. Click OK. 7. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse. 8. Define the location of the ladder bottom. 9. Define the location of the ladder top.

272


Steel Draw Panel

Place a ladder using key-ins 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

.

You can also type SLADDER in the command line. The Ladder dialog box displays. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place. Select the Position tab. Clear the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points. Enter the ladder start and end points using the X, Y, and Z boxes. The bottom of the ladder is defined on the left. The top of the ladder is defined on the right. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs. Click OK. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse. The ladder is placed in the drawing.

Place a ladder with a cage 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

.

You can also type SLADDER in the command line. The Ladder dialog box displays. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place. Select the Cage tab. Select the Caged ladder option. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Position, Dimension, and Size tabs. Click OK. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse. The ladder is placed in the drawing.

Handrail CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Hand Rail Steel Draw toolbar: Hand Rail Plant menu: Steel > Hand Rail Command line: SHRAIL Creates handrails in the drawing using specified corner points of the handrail or a polyline or 3D polyline that defines the path of the handrail. You are prompted to specify the offset direction after the points have been picked, or the polyline has been selected.

Dimensions Tab Post below platform (+/-) - Enter the distance to place the hand rail above or below the platform to which it is attached to. Platform offset dist (+/-) - Enter the distance to offset the hand rail. The hand rail can be offset away from or over the platform.


273

Steel Draw Panel Start/end offset - Enter the distance from the end of the hand rail to place the post or stanchion. This distance applies to both ends of the hand rail. Max post spacing - Enter the maximum distance between the post or stanchions. Spacing distance - Enter the vertical spacing between the rails. Use Add and Remove to change the number of rails.

Sizes Tab The top rail, intermediate rail, bottom rail, and post can have different components for the hand rail. Type - Select the member type. Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file. Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected. Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section. Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis. Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member. Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis. Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member. Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.


Place hand rail by points (on page 274) Place hand rail by polyline (on page 275)

Place hand rail by points 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

274

.

You can also type SHRAIL in the command line. The Hand Rail dialog box displays. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs. Click Pick points. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse. Specify the starting location for the hand rail. Continue placing vertex points for the hand rail path. Right-click, and then select Enter. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.


Steel Draw Panel

Place hand rail by polyline 1. Place a polyline or 3D polyline in the drawing that defines the hand rail path. 2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

.

You can also type SHRAIL in the command line. The Hand Rail dialog box displays. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs. Click Select line. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse. Select the polyline in the drawing. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.

Stair CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Stair Steel Draw toolbar: Stair Plant menu: Steel > Stair Command line: SSTAIR Creates stairs in the drawing by specifying the top point of the stair and then a base elevation.

Position Tab Top point - Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the top of the stairs. You can click Specified On-screen to select a point in the drawing. Base elevation - Enter the elevation at the bottom of stringer. You can click Specified On-screen to select a point in the drawing. Rotation angle - Enter the rotation in degrees. You can click Specified On-screen to define the rotation in the drawing.

Dimension Tab Tread Boxes are disabled until the top point and bottom elevation are entered in the Position Tab. The software then calculates initial values based on the top point and bottom elevation. Changes made to

Recalculates

(A) Total rise

(C) Rise

(B) Riser count

(C) Rise, (E) Run

(C) Rise

(A) Total rise

(D) First rise

(C) Rise

(E) Run

(F) Total run


275

Steel Draw Panel (F) Total run

(E) Run

(A) Total rise - Enter the distance between the bottom elevation and the top point. (B) Riser count - Enter the number of risers (steps or treads) in the stair. (C) Rise - Enter the distance between from the top of one riser to the top of the next riser. (D) First rise - Enter the distance from the bottom elevation to the top of the first riser. (E) Run - Enter the depth of the riser (if you were standing in front of the stair). (F) Total Run - Enter the total length (measured horizontally) of the stair.

Stringer Width - Enter the inside distance between the two stringers. (H) Top extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the riser. (J) Top clear - Enter the distance between the top of the stringer and the top point defined for stair. (K) Base extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the edge of the first riser. (M) Base clear - Enter the distance between the bottom of the stringer and the bottom elevation point.

Miscellaneous (N) Stair offset - Enter the offset distance from the top stair location point. (P) Angle - Enter the stair angle measured from horizontal.

Sizes Tab You can define different components to use for the riser and the stringer. Type - Select the member type. Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file. Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected. Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.

276


Steel Draw Panel Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports. X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis. Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member. Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis. Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member. Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point. 1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Stair

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

.

You can also type SSTAIR in the command line. The Stair dialog box displays. Using the Specify On-screen button or the X, Y, and Z boxes, define the top point for the stairs. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Z box, define the base elevation for the stairs. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Angle box, define the rotation for the stairs. Select the Dimension tab. Review and edit the tread and stringer properties as needed. Refer to Dimension Tab if needed. Select the Sizes tab. Define the components sizes for the treads and the stringers. Click OK.


277

Steel Draw Panel

278


SECTION 18

Steel Edit Panel CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Edit Command Description

Command line

Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).

SCOPE

Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more information, see Miter (on page 280).

SMITER

Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more information, see Cut (on page 281).

SCUT

Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on page 282).

SUNION

Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see Edit (on page 282).

SCEDIT

Global Edit - Edits the annotation, description, part number, and material of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 286).

SGCEDIT

Global Edit All - Edits multiple components of the same member shape. For more information, see Global Edit All (on page 287).

SGCEDITALL

Annotate Component - Places the long or short annotation of the component in the drawing. For more information, see Annotate Component (on page 289).

SCOMPANOT

Convert Solid - Converts components to solids. For more information, see Convert Solid (on page 289).

SCONVERTSOLID

Layer Change - Moves steel solid or center lines to a new layer. For SLAYERCHANGE / more information, see Layer Change (on page 290). SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For more information, see Select Control (on page 290).

SELECTCONTROL

Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page 290).

SAUTOCOPE


279

Steel Edit Panel

Cope CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cope Steel Edit toolbar: Cope Plant menu: Steel > Cope Command line: SCOPE Copes steel members to other steel members. You can place bolted coping or welded coping. Bolted coping is controlled by SteelCopeBoltDistance (on page 39) and provides a gap between the coped member and the boundary member. Welded cope is controlled by SteelCopeWeldDistance (on page 40) and provides a gap between the coped member and the boundary member. You can:  Cope a single member to another single member that provides the cope boundary.  Cope many members to many other members.  A member that crosses another member is cut into two separate members. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cope

.

You can also type SCOPE in the command line. 2. Select the members to cope. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. 3. Select the members to cope against. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. 4. Select bolted or welded cope. Bolt - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeBoltDistance startup variable. Weld - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeWeldDistance startup variable.

Miter CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Miter Steel Edit toolbar: Miter Plant menu: Steel > Miter Command line: SMITER Miters two structural pieces to fit each other. The two structural pieces must be in the same plane and have connected member ends. You miter multiple member pairs in each command pass. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Miter

.

You can also type SMITER in the command line. 2. Select the members to miter. 3. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. The software miters the selected members.

280


Steel Edit Panel

Cut CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cut Steel Edit toolbar: Cut Plant menu: Steel > Cut Command line: SCUT Cuts steel members along a plane that you define by an existing line or by points placed in the drawing. The software updates the lengths, weight, and other affected properties of the cut members. You cannot cut plate members with this command. Line - Defines the plane using the two end points of the line and its extrusion direction (the Z-axis of the plane the line was drawn in). Points - Defines the plane using three points you pick in the drawing.


Cut members by line (on page 281) Cut members by three-point plane (on page 281)

Cut members by line 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SCUT in the command line. Select Line. Select the line to use to define the plane. Select the members to cut. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.

Cut members by three-point plane 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SCUT in the command line. Select Points. Pick three points in the drawing to define the cutting plane. Select the members to cut. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.


281

Steel Edit Panel

Union CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Union Steel Edit toolbar: Union Plant menu: Steel > Union Command line: SUNION Joins two or more steel members into one member. The members must have the same properties for:  Member size (W10x30 for example)  Insertion location  Centerline location  Rotation angle  Data file  Short annotation  Long annotation  Description  Material  Part number In addition, the two center lines must meet each other but not intersect or overlap. Curved members cannot be joined with straight members. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Union

.

You can also type SUNION in the command line. 2. Select the first member to join. 3. Select the second member to join. 4. Continue to select members. When you are finished, right-click or press ENTER to join the members.

Edit CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Edit Steel Edit toolbar: Edit Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Local Edit Command line: SCEDIT Edits the properties of steel shapes and plates in the drawing. You can start this command from the command line, the command icon, or by double-clicking the object you want to edit.

Draw Steel Dialog Box Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth). Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display

282


Steel Edit Panel for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active location. Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of the component. Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen. Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and position of the line define the component. Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box. User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Properties Dialog Box Displays the available properties of the selected member. The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top. Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight yourself. Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length. The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing.


283

Steel Edit Panel The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage distance.

User Input Dialog Box Defines custom dimensioned components. Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of which dimension is which. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length, and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and placed. Description - Defines the component description. Density - Defines the material density for the component.

Draw Plate Dialog Box Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself. Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box. Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight defined in the data file.

284


Steel Edit Panel Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when editing an existing plate in the model. Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners. Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape. Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.

Base Plate Dialog Box Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order.

Details Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself. Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box. Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight defined in the data file.

Plate Dimensions Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate. Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement. X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid. Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.


285

Steel Edit Panel Hole Dimensions On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate without holes. Row count - Enter the number of hole rows. Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the holes. Column count - Enter the number of hole columns. Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of the holes. Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole. Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate. Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from the hole center. X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center. Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center. Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.

Global Edit CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit Command line: SGCEDIT Edits short annotation, long annotation, description, part number, and material for multiple components at one time. Changes to any or all of the edit boxes are made to each selected component. Leave the edit boxes blank for those properties you do not want to edit.

Steel Global Edit Dialog Box Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name. Generally, this is the member name up to the first "X" character (for example, W10 is the short annotation name for W10X30). Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name (for example, W10X30). Description - Defines the component description. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. Material - Specifies the material for the component. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit . You can also type SGCEDIT in the command line. 2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays. 3. Edit the appropriate property boxes. Leave blank the properties that you do not want to change. 4. Click OK.

286


Steel Edit Panel

Global Edit All CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit All Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit All Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit All Command line: SGCEDITALL Edits multiple components of the same member shape. After selecting multiple components or maybe your entire drawing, you can filter the component to edit by member shape.

Draw Steel Dialog Box Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth). Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle. Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active location. Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of the component. Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically. Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate. Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character. Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file. Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header. Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable. Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header. Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen. Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and position of the line define the component. Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box.


287

Steel Edit Panel User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Properties Dialog Box Displays the available properties of the selected member. The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top. Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight yourself. Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length. The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing. The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage distance. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit All

.

You can also type SGCEDITALL in the command line. 2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.

3. Select the member shapes you want to edit. You can select more than one group to edit, although you edit the groups one at a time. 4. Click OK. The Component Edit dialog box displays.

288


Steel Edit Panel 5. Edit the member properties as needed. See Draw Steel Dialog Box for more information about this dialog. 6. Click OK. The software displays the number of components that were updated. 7. If you selected more than one group, the Component Edit dialog box displays the next group. 8. Edit the member properties as needed. 9. Click OK.

Annotate Component CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Annotate Component Command line: SCOMPANOT Places the short or long annotations of selected steel members in the drawing. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Annotate Component

.

You can also type SCOMPANOT in the command line. 2. Select the component to annotate. Type Auto to have the software automatically determine the annotation rotation and location. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. 3. Select Long to place the defined long annotation. or Select Short to place the defined short annotation. 4. Define the annotation starting location. 5. Define the annotation rotation.

Convert Solid CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Convert Solid Steel Edit toolbar: Convert Solid Command line: SCONVERTSOLID Creates the solid representation of component. When you have deleted the solid representation and have been modeling using only centerlines, this command is used to re-create the solid cross-section representation of the component. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Convert Solid

.

You can also type SCONVERTSOLID in the command line. 2. Select the components to convert. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. The software creates the solids.


289

Steel Edit Panel

Layer Change CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Layer Change Steel Edit toolbar: Layer Change Command line: SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST Edits the existing flag for steel members and changes layers for steel solid and centerline graphics. The software automatically moves steel plates and base plates centerlines to whichever layer is chosen for the corresponding solid. 1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Layer Change . 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

You can also type SLAYERCHANGE in the command line. Select All to select all components in the drawing. -orSelect Select to manually select steel members. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. Select Yes to change the solid layer of the selected components. Select the new layer, and then click OK. Select Yes to change the centerline layer of the selected components. Select the new layer, and then click OK.

Select Control CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Select Control Steel Edit toolbar: Select Control Command line: SELECTCONTROL Toggles whether grip points are displayed on solids. To change the length of pipe or steel, you can grip stretch the pipe or steel centerline. However, it may be difficult to select the center line endpoint grip for steel shapes when solid grip points are on. Turning off the solid grip points with this toggle makes it easier to grip stretch components.

Auto Cope CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Auto Cope Steel Edit toolbar: Auto Cope Plant menu: Steel > Auto Cope Command line: SAUTOCOPE Toggles the automatic coping of members on or off. When two members are coped and this feature is on, the system automatically reapplies the cope when one of the members is changed. Select this command again to turn off the automatic coping feature.

290


SECTION 19

Steel BOM / DB Panel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel BOM DB Panel Command Description Steel BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. For more information, see Steel BOM Setup (on page 292).

Command line SBOMSETUP

Cut Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each SBOMCUT piece of steel with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Steel Bill of Material (on page 294). Total Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size. For more information, see Total Steel Bill of Material (on page 296).

SBOMTOTAL

Single Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single Steel Bill of Material (on page 297).

SBOMSINGLE

Export Steel BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. For more information, see Export Steel Bill of Material (on page 299).

SBOMEXPORT

Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. SLIVEDB For more information, see Setup Live Database Steel (on page 300). Export Steel Database - Exports steel components to Microsoft SDBFGEN Access or Microsoft Excel. For more information, see Export Steel (on page 301). Import Steel Database - Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import Steel (on page 301).

SDBFIN

Audit Steel Database - Compares the database with the drawing displaying any differences between the two. For more information, see Audit Steel Database (on page 302).

SDBAUDIT

Synchronize Steel Database - Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value within the database tables. For more information, see Synchronize Steel Database (on page 302).

SSYNC

Export Steel Model - Exports the steel model to CAESAR II, Robobat, or CIS/2 files. For more information, see Export Steel Model (on page 303).

SEXPORT

Import Steel Model - Imports a CIS/2 file into the current drawing. SIMPORT For more information, see Import Steel Model (on page 303).


291

Steel BOM / DB Panel C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected SCG steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page 304).

Steel BOM Setup CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Setup Command line: SBOMSETUP Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order. Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.

Steel Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the configuration file listed at the top of the dialog. BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order to set the order by which these columns are sorted. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the column name in the list. Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column. Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down or start at the bottom and work its way up. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM. Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM. Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order. Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column. Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column. Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of steel components in the BOM. For more information, see Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 294).

What do you want to do?    

292



Steel BOM / DB Panel

Add or remove properties from BOM 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup

.

You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line. The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Available list. Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and the column width respectively. 3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Selected list. 4. Click OK.

Change the column order 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup

.

You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line. The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list. 3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right. 4. Click OK.

Change text alignment in columns 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line. The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected column. Click OK.

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup . You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line. The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Click Sort Order. The Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays. 3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list. 4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM. 5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A. 6. Click OK on the Steel BOM Sort Order dialog box. 7. Click OK on the Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box.


293


Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted. This dialog box also controls the accumulation of steel components. For example, if two members have different Short Annotation values and you do not want these to accumulate, Short Annotation would have to be added to the BOM Columns Selected list. BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their sort order from top to bottom. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the column name in the list. Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.

Cut Steel Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Cut Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Cut Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Cut Command line: SBOMCUT Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of steel with a length and a tag. Identical items are accumulated in the quantity column. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this: BILL OF MATERIALS MARK

QTY

LONG ANNOTATION

LENGTH

WEIGHT

1

2

W14X74

120.00

1480.00

TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00 The steel component could have been converted with the Existing option. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed.

294


Steel BOM / DB Panel Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.




Cut BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line. Select the Automatic placement option. Enter the placement angle for the tag. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Cut BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut

.

You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line. 2. Select the Manual placement option. 3. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.


295

Steel BOM / DB Panel 4. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. 5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Total Steel Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Total Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Total Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Total Command line: SBOMTOTAL Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this: BILL OF MATERIALS MARK

QTY

LONG ANNOTATION

LENGTH

WEIGHT

1

1

W14X74

240.00

1480.00

TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00 The component could have been converted with the Existing option. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.

296


Steel BOM / DB Panel A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to. CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only. This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).



Total BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line. Select the Automatic placement option. Enter the placement angle for the tag. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Total BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line. Select the Manual placement option. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Single Steel Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Single Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Single Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Single Command line: SBOMSINGLE Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:


297

Steel BOM / DB Panel BILL OF MATERIALS MARK

QTY

LONG ANNOTATION

LENGTH

WEIGHT

1

1

W14X74

120.00

740.00

2

1

W14X74

120.00

740.00

TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00 The component could have been converted with the Existing option. Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.



298




Single BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line. Select the Automatic placement option. Enter the placement angle for the tag. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Single BOM using Manual placement 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single 2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line. Select the Manual placement option. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Export Steel Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Export Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Export Command line: SBOMEXPORT Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Steel BOM Setup (on page 292). CADWorx can export the Bill of Material schedules to:  Access file (*.mdb)  Excel file (*.xls)  Text file (*.txt)  HTML file (*.htm) When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.


299

Steel BOM / DB Panel 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

.

You can also type SBOMEXPORT in the command line. Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want. Type the file name, and specify the folder location. Click Save.

Setup Live Database Steel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup Plant menu: Steel > Database > Setup Command line: SLIVEDB CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that configuration file using a live database or not. 

When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then the item is deleted from the database.  All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session. On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing. Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed. Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an existing database. SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER. Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box. Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.  No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with the appropriate configuration file.  No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.

300


Steel BOM / DB Panel 

Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or not.

Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

Export Steel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Export Plant menu: Steel > Database > Export Command line: SDBFGEN Exports CADWorx steel information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a Microsoft Excel file. Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of the dialog display the file name and folder in use. Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database file at the same time. New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export 2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

.

You can also type SDBFGEN in the command line. Select the steel components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The Select Database Type dialog box displays. Select Access or Excel to define the file type. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name. Select New if you are creating a new file. or Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file. Click OK.

Import Steel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import Plant menu: Steel > Database > Import Command line: SDBFIN Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database. Use the Export Steel (on page 301) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file to import.


301

Steel BOM / DB Panel 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SDBFIN in the command line. The Select Database File dialog box displays. Browse to and select the file to import. Click Open. The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing. Click OK.

Audit Steel Database CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Audit Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Audit Plant menu: Steel > Database > Audit Command line: SDBAUDIT Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Audit

2. 3. 4. 5.

.

You can also type SDBAUDIT in the command line. The Select Database File dialog box displays. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing. Click Open. The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.

Synchronize Steel Database CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Synchronize Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize Plant menu: Steel > Database > Synchronize Command line: SSYNC Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database Steel (on page 300) before using this command. When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and MATERIAL fields in the STEEL table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize

302

.


Steel BOM / DB Panel You can also type SSYNC in the command line. 2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.

Export Steel Model CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Export Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Export Command line: SEXPORT Exports selected CADWorx steel components to one of three data format: CIS/2, CAESAR II, or RoboBat. The export to CIS/2 requires installing the "ST-Runtime" in [Product Folder]\System\struntime.msi. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export

.

You can also type SEXPORT in the command line. 2. Select the steel components to export. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The Select Export Output File Type dialog box displays. 3. Select the file type to save in the Save as type box. 4. Specify the folder and file name, and then click Save. If you selected CAESAR II, a prompt displays. 5. Enter the starting node number for the CAESAR II file. 6. Enter the node increment value.

Import Steel Model CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Import Command line: SIMPORT Imports a CIS/2 data file and creates CADWorx steel components. The import requires that the CADWorx steel parametric data file be available for the components that are being imported from the CIS/2 file. This command requires installing the "ST-Runtime" from [Product Folder]\System\struntime.msi. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import . You can also type SIMPORT in the command line. 2. Select the file to import. 3. Click Open.


303


CG Generator CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > C.G. Generator Steel toolbar: C.G. Generator Plant menu: Steel > C.G. Generator Command line: SCG Calculates the center of gravity (CG) of the steel members (including plates) in a drawing. You must select the members for which to calculate the center of gravity. To combine center of gravity reports for piping and steel components, take the weight summations and add them together. Then take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight. 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator 2. 3. 4. 5.

304

.

You can also type SCG in the command line. Select the members to cope. Type All in the command line to select all the members in drawing. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished. Select Yes to save the center of gravity report to a text file. Provide the file name and folder information if you choose to save the report. Select Yes to view the weight summation in the command area. Select Yes to place a smaller round marker in the drawing indicating the calculated center of gravity.


SECTION 20

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Command Description HVAC Shapes - Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).

Command line HVAC

HVAC Shapes Catalog - Places HVAC shapes and cable tray HVACC shapes that are defined in a data file library. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308). User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310).

HUSER

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313)

HGENERIC

Edit - Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. For more information, see HCEDIT Edit (on page 314). GC Edit - Edits global HVAC component data. For more information, see GC Edit (on page 315).

HGCEDIT

HVAC BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to HBOMSETUP any style or layout that you need. For more information, see HVAC BOM Setup (on page 315). Cut HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing HBOMCUT each piece of HVAC with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut HVAC Bill of Material (on page 318). Total HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one HBOMTOTAL tag for a total length of HVAC in each size. For more information, see Total HVAC Bill of Material (on page 319). Single HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single HVAC Bill of Material (on page 321).

HBOMSINGLE

Data Remove - Removes CADWorx data from components. For more information, see Data Remove (on page 322).

HDATAREMOVE

Layer Change - Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components. For more information, see Layer Change (on page 322).

HLAYERCHANGE

Export HVAC - Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a HDBFGEN Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Export HVAC (on page 323).


305

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Import HVAC - Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import HVAC (on page 324).

HDBFIN

Audit HVAC Database - Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. For more information, see Audit HVAC Database (on page 324).

HDBAUDIT

Synchronize HVAC Database - Checks all components in the HSYNC drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. For more information, see Synchronize HVAC Database (on page 325).

HVAC CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes Plant menu: HVAC > Shapes Command line: HVAC Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.

Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box Controls parameters for placing HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing. The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape. Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension boxes that are not required are disabled. Options Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top. Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value. Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting. Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow. Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size. Details Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape. Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape.

306


HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight. Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing. Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.

Component Edit Dialog Box Controls parameters for modifying HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing. The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape. Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension boxes that are not required are disabled. Options Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top. Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value. Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting. Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow. Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size. Details Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape. Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight. Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.


Add an HVAC shape to the drawing (on page 308) Modify an HVAC shape (on page 308)


307

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel

Add an HVAC shape to the drawing 1. Click HVAC Shapes . Alternatively, type HVAC on the command line, and press ENTER. The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays. 2. Select the shape to place from the Select Shape list. The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes. 3. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. 4. Click Pick points. 5. Select the first point for the shape. 6. Select the end point for the shape. The software places the shape in the drawing.

Modify an HVAC shape 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing. The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape. 2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306). 3. Click Apply. The software changes the parameters of the shape.

HVAC Shapes Catalog CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes Catalog HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes Catalog Command line: HVACC Places HVAC shapes and cable tray shapes that are defined in a data file library. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.

Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box Select Data File - Specifies the data file that contains the components to place. The list contains all the data files located in the folder defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35) startup variable. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units. Select Type - Specifies the shape to place. The list contains the folders defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.INI file specifying the shape type in that folder (Square Straight, Oval Straight, and so forth). Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order. Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension boxes that are not required are disabled. Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top.

308


HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value. Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting. Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow. Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size. Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape. Part Name - Specifies the part name for the shape. Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape. Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the MATERIAL= value in the data file header. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight. Length - Specifies the length of the shape. Area - Specifies the area of the shape. Manual - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from the catalog. Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing. Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.

Component Edit Dialog Box What do you want to do?  

Place an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310) Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310)


309


Place an HVAC shape from the catalog 1. Click HVAC Shapes Catalog . Alternatively, type HVACC on the command line, and press ENTER. The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays. 2. Select the data file to use from the Select Data file list. The software populates the Select Type list with the available types. 3. Select the type of shape to use from the Select Type list. The software populates the Select Member list with the available members. 4. Select the member to use from the Select Member list. The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes. 5. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308). 6. Click Pick points. 7. Select the first point for the shape. 8. Select the end point for the shape. The software places the shape in the drawing.

Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing. The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape. 2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308). 3. Click Apply. The software changes the parameters of the shape.

User Shape CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > User Shape HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: User Shape Command line: HUSER Places a component using a custom user-defined shape. You select the component to draw based on an existing user-shape DWG file. The extrusion direction and distance is based on points picked or a line selected in the drawing. You can edit the roll angle along with the standard annotations. For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.INI must be in the same folder as the user shape drawing files. The Type.INI file must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder (...\CADWorx\Plant\\HVAC\) contains the user shape drawing files.

310


HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Shown below are the parameters stored in a user-created .DWG file that can be used to create a user shape. The user shape profile must be a closed polyline or an AutoCAD Region entity.

After you select the shape from the dialog box, you can pick points or select a line to determine the extrusion length.

The default insert location for the user shape is 0,0,0. To specify a different insert location, add an AutoCAD POINT entity to the profile .DWG to locate the insert point.

User Shapes Dialog Box Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.


311

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Length - Specifies the length of the shape. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape. Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing. Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.

Component Edit Dialog Box Controls parameters for modifying user-defined shapes in the drawing. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape. Length - Specifies the length of the shape. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape. Manual Update - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from the drawing. Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing. Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.


312

Place a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313) Modify a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313)



Place a user-defined HVAC shape 1. Click User Shape . Alternatively, type HUSER on the command line, and press ENTER. The HVAC User Shapes dialog box displays. 2. Select the folder that contains the Type.INI data file to use from the Select Directory list. The software populates the Select Member list with the available shapes. 3. Select the shape to use from the Select Member list. The preview and details for that shape display in the Details boxes. 4. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310). 5. Click Pick points. 6. Select the first point for the shape. 7. Select the end point for the shape. The software places the shape in the drawing.

Modify a user-defined HVAC shape 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing. The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape. 2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310). 3. Click Apply. The software changes the parameters of the shape.

Generic Attach CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Generic Attach Command line: HGENERIC Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a component, use this routine to attach xdata information. You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component. To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.

Generic Attach (Create) Dialog Box Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25. Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6. Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345. Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid.


313

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid. BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was attached.

Generic Attach (Edit) Dialog Box Controls parameters for modifying information on generic AutoCAD objects. Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25. Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange. Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6. Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345. Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid. Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid. BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was attached.


Place a generic attachment in the drawing (on page 314) Modify a generic attachment (on page 314)

Place a generic attachment in the drawing 1. Click Generic Attach . Alternatively, type HGENERIC on the command line, and press ENTER. The Generic Attach (Create) dialog box displays. 2. Set up the attachment parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313). 3. Click Attach. 4. Select the non CADWorx object to which to attach the information.

Modify a generic attachment 1. Double-click a generic attachment in the drawing. The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays the parameters associated with the attachment. 2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313). 3. Click Apply. The software changes the parameters of the attachment.

Edit CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Edit Command line: HCEDIT Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. This command displays the same dialog box that was used to place the shape. You cannot change the object shape using this command. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).

314



GC Edit CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > GC Edit Command line: HGCEDIT Edits global HVAC component data.

HVAC Global CEdit Dialog Box Controls parameters for editing global HVAC component data. Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top. Alter solid - Specifies whether the way the components are drawn can be changed. Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting. Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow. Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Open Bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes. Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size. Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape. Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape. Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape. There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight.

Edit HVAC components globally 1. Click GCEdit . Alternatively, type HGCEDIT on the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the objects to edit, and press ENTER. The HVAC Global CEdit dialog box displays. 3. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see GC Edit (on page 315). 4. Click OK. The software applies the parameters to the selected components.

HVAC BOM Setup CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Setup HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Setup Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Setup Command line: HBOMSETUP


315

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user-specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.

Table Setup Tab Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the configuration file listed at the top of the dialog. BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order to set the order by which these columns are sorted. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column. Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down or start at the bottom and work its way up. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM. Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM. Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order. Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column. Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column.

Sort Order Setup Tab Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the configuration file listed at the top of the dialog. BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add. BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order to set the order by which these columns are sorted. Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column. Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down or start at the bottom and work its way up. Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM. Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM. Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order. Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column. Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column.

316


HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel What do you want to do?    


Add or remove properties from BOM 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in the command line, and press ENTER. The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. To add a property to the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Available list, and then click Add. Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and the column width respectively. 3. To remove a property from the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Remove. 4. Click OK.

Change the column order 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in the command line, and press ENTER. The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list. 3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right. 4. Click OK.

Change text alignment in columns 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in the command line, and press ENTER. The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list. 3. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column. 4. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected column. 5. Click OK.

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in the command line, and press ENTER. The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays. 2. Select the Sort Order Setup tab.


317

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel 3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list. 4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM. 5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A. 6. Click OK.

Cut HVAC Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Cut HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Cut Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Cut Command line: HBOMCUT Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each HVAC component with a length and a tag. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.


318


HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel What do you want to do?  


Cut BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Automatic placement option. 3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER. 4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Cut BOM using Manual placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Manual placement option. 3. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 4. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. 5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Total HVAC Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Total HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Total Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Total Command line: HBOMTOTAL Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of HVAC components in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).


319

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.




Total BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Automatic placement option. 3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER. 4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Total BOM using Manual placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Manual placement option. 3. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 4. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. 5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

320



Single HVAC Bill of Material CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Single HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Single Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Single Command line: HBOMSINGLE Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule. Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags. Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed. Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32). The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.





321


Single BOM using Automatic placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Automatic placement option. 3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER. 4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The BOM is generated.

Single BOM using Manual placement 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the Manual placement option. 3. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule. 4. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. 5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected. The BOM is generated.

Data Remove CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Data Remove Command line: HCDATAREMOVE Removes CADWorx data from components.

Remove CADWorx data from components 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Data Remove . Alternatively, type HDATAREMOVE in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the objects from which to remove the CADWorx data, and press ENTER. A dialog box displays asking if you are sure that you want to remove the data. 3. Click Yes. The software removes the CADWorx data from the selected components.

Layer Change CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Layer Change Command line: HLAYERCHANGE Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components.

322



Change the layers associated with HVAC components 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Layer Change . Alternatively, type HLAYERCHANGE in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the objects to change, and press ENTER. 3. If you want to change the solid layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the popup menu. The Please select Layer dialog box displays. 4. Select the layer with which to associate the solid part of the component, and click OK. 5. If you want to change the centerline layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the popup menu. The Please select Layer dialog box displays. 6. Select the layer with which to associate the centerline of the component, and click OK. The software changes the layers.

Export HVAC CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Export HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Export Command line: HDBFGEN Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.

Select Database Type Dialog Box

Export CADWorx HVAC data 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Export . Alternatively, type HDBFGEN in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Select the HVAC components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished. The Select Database Type dialog box displays. 3. Select Access or Excel to define the file type. 4. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name. 5. Select New if you are creating a new file. or Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file. 6. Click OK.


323


Import HVAC CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Import HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Import Command line: HDBFIN Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database. Use the Export HVAC (on page 323) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file to import.

Import CADWorx HVAC data 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Import . Alternatively, type HDBFIN in the command line, and press ENTER. The Select Database File dialog box displays. 2. Select the file to import. 3. Click Open. The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays. 4. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing. 5. Click OK.

Audit HVAC Database CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Audit HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Audit Command line: HDBAUDIT Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to ignore it.

Audit the HVAC database 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Audit . Alternatively, type HDBAUDIT in the command line, and press ENTER. The Select Database File dialog box displays. 2. Select the file to audit against the drawing. 3. Click Open. Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database. 4. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays. 5. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.

324



Synchronize HVAC Database CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Synchronize HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize Command line: HSYNC Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database. When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and MATERIAL fields in the HVAC table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing.

Synchronize the HVAC database 1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize . Alternatively, type HSYNC in the command line, and press ENTER. 2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.


325


326


SECTION 21

Toolbars In This Section Accessing and Docking the Toolbars ............................................ 327 Aliases and Command Names ...................................................... 328 Connecting to components ............................................................ 328 Compass ........................................................................................ 328 Plane versus Isometrics view modes ............................................ 328 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling .................................................. 329 Buttweld ......................................................................................... 329 Flanges .......................................................................................... 361 Flgd/BW Valves ............................................................................. 375 Lined .............................................................................................. 389 Fiberglass ...................................................................................... 394 Sanitary .......................................................................................... 412 Victaulic.......................................................................................... 447 Threaded/Socket ........................................................................... 450 Thrd/SW Valves ............................................................................. 481 Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................. 495 Restraints ....................................................................................... 497 Misc ................................................................................................ 498 Operators ....................................................................................... 504 Line Numbers ................................................................................ 504 UCS ............................................................................................... 505 Steel ............................................................................................... 505 Settings .......................................................................................... 507 Palettes .......................................................................................... 509

Accessing and Docking the Toolbars Toolbars duplicate commands available on the CADWorx Plant I and CADWorx Plant II tabs. You may find it useful to open toolbars containing frequently-used commands when screen space for the tab is limited. To open a Plant toolbar, click Plant > Toolbars, and select the needed toolbar. You can also open an alternate set of toolbars from View tab > Windows panel > Toolbars > PIPEALT, PIPEFLY, or PIPERIB. To dock a toolbar, drag it to any edge of the window. Press CTRL to drag a toolbar without docking it. You can then drag a toolbar off of the window space. The AutoCAD Toolbar command opens the Customize User Interface dialog box. You can choose any needed toolbars for AutoCAD or CADWorx Plant.


327

Toolbars

Aliases and Command Names Ribbon, toolbar, and menu commands have a command name that you can type in the command line. A command alias is an abbreviation that you type at the command line instead of typing the entire command name. Command aliases created for Plant are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Flow_alt.pgp file. You can change alias names but should avoid conflicts with aliases already defined in the .pgp file for AutoCAD.

Connecting to components In connecting to components, Piping Rules effect the behavior of prompts when set to No or Show Options. If selecting a component from a palette or toolbar, the selected component prompts you if unable to derive information from the surrounding components due to the piping rules. When the rules are set to Automatic, the process is simplified for connecting components to appropriate valued objects. For instance, when inserting a flange to a pipe, if both have the same size and specification you are not prompted and the flange inserts automatically. For more information, see Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) or all other Piping Rules (on page 46). Prompts depend on the settings you have chosen for the piping rules. Also, you may be prompted in certain situations based on the components of the model. Most of the components are built to work as smart objects. They connect using the previous information of the last point of a component. If you change sizes while working with a component, you are prompted accordingly. In addition, you may not receive prompts based on the actions of connection to components. Prompts depend on the actions you take, and some prompts appear only when not connecting to a previous component.

Compass Enables 360 degree navigation for placement of components. You can turn the compass on and off in Setup (on page 26). You are also provided with the option to change the color. When the compass is turned on the screen displays a circle around the components when they are pulled into the drawing space.

Plane versus Isometrics view modes When plotting components using Plane views, some prompts appear differently when working in 3D Solids then when plotting components in Isometric views. This is based on the directional limitations of those views. The prompts do not differ when you are working in 2D Double Line or 2D Single Line. All commands in the following sections are based off the isometrics view for all modes of modeling.

328


Toolbars

3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling The CADWorx option for working in 3D modeling and 2D modeling is set up in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. All commands on the toolbars work in both modes, however some commands are ideally designed for working in 3D mode versus working in 2D mode. The commands are grouped according to which commands are better suited for either 3D modeling or 2D modeling. You can use the commands as needed, but in 3D modeling some of the commands better suited for 2D have the same response as those better suited for 3D. For more information, see Setup (on page 26) and CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box.

Buttweld Plant menu: Toolbars > Buttweld The commands on the Buttweld toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Pipe - Places a butt-welded pipe component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

PIPW

Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page 333).

90LR

Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page 334).

90SR

Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).

45LR

Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in 90RD the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell (on page 335). Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Tee (on page 336).

TESW

Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y TERW plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page 337). Plan 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 LR Return (on page 337).

18LR

Plan 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return 18SR in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 SR Return (on page 338).


329

Toolbars Command Name

Command Line

Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on page 339).

CONC

Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page 339).

ECC

Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cap (on page 340).

CAPW

Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 340).

CRSW

Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Cross (on page 341).

CRRW

Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane. LATW For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341). Miters - Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Miters (on page 342).

MPIP

Rolled Pipe - Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. For more information, see Rolled Pipe (on page 343).

SPIP

Adjustable Bend - Places an adjustable pipe bend. For more information, see Adjustable Bend (on page 344).

BENT

90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end R90LR rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 90 LR Ell (on page 345). 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 90 SR Ell (on page 345).

R90SR

45 LR Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 45 LR Ell (on page 346).

R45LR

Tee - Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see Tee (on page 346).

RTESW

Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y 11LR plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 347).

330

Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 348).

22LR

Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).

YB


Toolbars The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D. Command Name

Command Line

Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal H90LR to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on page 349). Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 SR Ell (on page 350).

H90SR

Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 45 Ell (on page 350).

H45LR

Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351).

V45LR

Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 Reducing Ell (on page 351).

H90RD

Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the HTESW X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 352). Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 353).

VTESW

Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).

HTERW

Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 354).

VTERW

Side 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return H18LR normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 180 LR Return (on page 354). Vert 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 LR Return (on page 355).

V18LR

Side 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return H18SR normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 180 SR Return (on page 355). Vert 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return V18SR normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 SR Return (on page 356).


331


Command Line

Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch HCRSW normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross (on page 356). Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).

HCRRW

Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with VCRRW the main branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).

332

Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Side Lateral (on page 357).

HLATW

Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Lateral (on page 358).

VLATW

Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page 358).

H11LR

Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page 359).

V11LR

Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 359).

H22LR

Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 360).

V22LR

Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye (on page 360).

HYB

Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Wye (on page 361).

VYB


Toolbars

Modeling in 3D These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D and 2D modeling.

Pipe Buttweld toolbar: Pipe Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tubing Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Pipe Command line: PIPW You can also now use PIPW1 for buttweld piping, PIPF1 for socket weld or threaded piping, and PIPFL1 for flanged piping, to draw singular pipe. PIPW starts the pipe router. Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis

Place a pipe 1. Click a pipe component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. 3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. The pipe component is drawn.

Plan 90 LR Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell Command line: 90LR Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.


333

Toolbars Place a 90 degree plan elbow 1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the selection. 3. Click in the direction of the corner. 4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Plan 90 SR Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell Command line: 90SR Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Place a 90 degree plan elbow 1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the selection. 3. Click in the direction of the corner. 4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

334


Toolbars

Plan 45 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 45 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 45 Ell Command line: 45LR Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Place a plan elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a plan elbow command. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Plan 90 Reducing Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell Command line: 90RD Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. For this component, this option switches to the reducing side.


335

Toolbars Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Plan Tee Buttweld toolbar: Plan Tee Victaulic toolbar: Plan Tee Command line: TESW Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.

Place a plan tee 1. 2. 3. 4.

336

Click a plan tee command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the tee. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The tee component is drawn.


Toolbars

Plan Reducing Tee Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee Command line: TERW Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.



Plan 180 LR Return Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 LR Return Command line: 18LR Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.


337

Toolbars Place a 180 degree plan return 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 180 degree plan return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Click in the direction of the end of the return. The return component is drawn.

Plan 180 SR Return Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 SR Return Command line: 18SR Places a 180 degree short radius return in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Place a 180 degree plan return 1. 2. 3. 4.

338

Click a 180 degree plan return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Click in the direction of the end of the return. The return component is drawn.


Toolbars

Conc Reducer Buttweld toolbar: Conc Reducer Victaulic toolbar: Conc Reducer Command line: CONC Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. If you are connecting to another component where the large end is the same size as the last component, press ENTER to attach to the last component drawn.

Place a concentric reducer 1. Click a concentric reducer component command. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer. The reducer component is drawn.

Ecc Reducer Buttweld toolbar: Ecc Reducer Victaulic toolbar: Ecc Reducer Command line: ECC Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.

Place an eccentric reducer 1. Click an eccentric reducer component command. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. or Select Small end, and press ENTER. 3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer. 4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side. or To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down. The reducer component is drawn.


339

Toolbars

Cap Buttweld toolbar: Cap Victaulic toolbar: Cap Command line: CAPW Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.

Place a cap 1. Click a cap component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap. The cap component is drawn.

Plan Cross Buttweld toolbar: Plan Cross Victaulic toolbar: Plan Cross Command line: CRSW Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.

Place a plan cross 1. Click a four-way straight cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

340


Toolbars

Plan Reducing Cross Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross Command line: CRRW Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the reducing branch of cross tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the cross.

Place a plan reducing cross 1. Click a four-way plan reducing cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

Plan Lateral Buttweld toolbar: Plan Lateral Victaulic toolbar: Plan Lateral Command line: LATW Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. Branch - Places the branch of the lateral at the start point. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.


341

Toolbars Place a plan lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a plan lateral command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral. The lateral component is drawn.

Miters Buttweld toolbar: Miters Command line: MPIP Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created with Polyline . A miter is placed on the pipe at each vertex of the polyline. For more information, see PLINE in AutoCAD Help.

This command can also be used to create pipe with bends. For more information, see CHAMFER in AutoCAD Help.

Mitered pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.

342

. For more


Toolbars Place a mitered pipe 1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline 2. Draw the needed polyline.

.

3. Click Miters . 4. Select the polyline. The mitered pipe component is drawn.

Rolled Pipe Buttweld toolbar: Rolled Pipe Command line: SPIP Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created with Polyline and edited with the Fit or Spline options of Edit Polyline . For more information, see PLINE and PEDIT in AutoCAD Help.

Fit Example

Spline Example

Rolled pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.


. For more

343

Toolbars Place a rolled pipe 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline Draw the needed polyline. On the Modify panel, click Edit Polyline . Select the polyline. Select Fit or Spline.

.

6. Click Rolled Pipe . 7. Select the polyline. The pipe component is drawn.

Adjustable Bend Buttweld toolbar: Adjustable Bend Command line: BENT Places a pipe bend based on the selected method: Enter radius, Trimmed elbow, or Select arc. Enter radius - Places a pipe bend by typing a radius, and then selecting the bend center, start, and end points in a counterclockwise direction. This is the most common type of adjustable bend.  Degree - Defines the total angle of the bend from the start point. For example, if the start point is at 91°, and the value for Degree is 180°, the end point is at 271° and the total angle of the bend is 180°.  Angle - Defines the angle of the bend as the value minus the angle defined by the start point from the positive X-axis. For example, if the start point is at 91°, and the value for Angle is 180°, the end point is at 180° and the angle of the bend is 79°.  Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0. Trimmed elbow - Places an elbow by selecting the center of the bend arc, the start point, and the end point.  Short radius - Defines a short radius elbow according to the current specification.  Long radius - Defines a long radius elbow according to the current specification. Select arc - Places a pipe bend on an arc created with an arc command. For more information, see Draw Arcs in AutoCAD Help.  Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.

344


Toolbars

90 LR Ell Buttweld toolbar: 90 LR Ell Command line: R90LR Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction. Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.  

This command is only available for welded fittings. The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD Help.

Place a 90 degree rolled elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

90 SR Ell Buttweld toolbar: 90 SR Ell Command line: R90SR Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction. Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.  



345

Toolbars Place a 90 degree rolled elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

45 LR Ell Buttweld toolbar: 45 LR Ell Command line: R45LR Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. This command is only available for welded fittings. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction. Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.  


Place a 45 degree rolled elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click 45 LR Ell . Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Tee Buttweld toolbar: Tee Command line: RTESW Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the positive Z direction. Down - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the negative Z direction. This command is only available for welded fittings.

346


Toolbars Place a rolled tee 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click a rolled tee command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the tee. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. Select Up or Down. The tee component is drawn.

Plan 11.25 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell Command line: 11LR Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.




347

Toolbars

Plan 22.5 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell Command line: 22LR Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.



Plan Wye Buttweld toolbar: Plan Wye Victaulic toolbar: Plan Wye Command line: YB Places a wye in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye. Branch - Places the branch of the component at the start point. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

348


Toolbars Place a plan wye 1. Click a plan wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye. The wye component is drawn.

Modeling in 2D Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only in a 2D drawing.

Side 90 LR Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell Command line: H90LR Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a side or vertical elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side or vertical elbow component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Select Up or Down. The elbow component is drawn.


349

Toolbars

Side 90 SR Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell Command line: H90SR Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Side 45 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 45 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 45 Ell Command line: H45LR Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


350



Toolbars

Vert 45 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Vert 45 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Vert 45 Ell Command line: V45LR Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Side 90 Reducing Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell Command line: H90RD Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


351

Toolbars Place a side reducing elbow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click a side reducing plan elbow component command. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Select Up or Down. The elbow component is drawn.

Side Tee Buttweld toolbar: Side Tee Victaulic toolbar: Side Tee Command line: HTESW Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.

Place a side tee 1. 2. 3. 4.

352

Click a side tee component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the tee. Select Up or Down. The tee component is drawn.


Toolbars

Vert Tee Buttweld toolbar: Vert Tee Victaulic toolbar: Vert Tee Command line: VTESW Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.

Place a vertical tee 1. Click a vertical tee component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The tee component is drawn.

Side Reducing Tee Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Tee Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Tee Command line: HTERW Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.




353

Toolbars

Vert Reducing Tee Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee Command line: VTERW Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.


Side 180 LR Return Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 LR Return Command line: H18LR Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return. Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree side return 1. 2. 3. 4.

354

Click a 180 degree side return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Select Up or Down. The return component is drawn.


Toolbars

Vert 180 LR Return Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 LR Return Command line: V18LR Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return. Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree vertical return 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 180 degree vertical return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Select Up or Down. The return component is drawn.

Side 180 SR Return Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 SR Return Command line: H18SR Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return. Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree side return 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 180 degree side return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Select Up or Down. The return component is drawn.


355

Toolbars

Vert 180 SR Return Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 SR Return Command line: V18SR Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return. Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree vertical return 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a 180 degree vertical return component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend of the return. Select Up or Down. The return component is drawn.

Side Cross Buttweld toolbar: Side Cross Victaulic toolbar: Side Cross Command line: HCRSW Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.

Place a side cross 1. Click a four-way straight side cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

356


Toolbars

Side Reducing Cross Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Cross Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Cross Command line: HCRRW Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.

Place a side reducing cross 1. Click a four-way side reducing cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

Vert Reducing Cross Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross Command line: VCRRW Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the cross is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the reducing branch of the cross tee at the start point.

Place a vertical reducing cross 1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

Side Lateral Buttweld toolbar: Side Lateral Victaulic toolbar: Side Lateral Command line: HLATW Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.


357

Toolbars Place a side lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side lateral component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral. Select Up or Down. The lateral component is drawn.

Vert Lateral Buttweld toolbar: Vert Lateral Victaulic toolbar: Vert Lateral Command line: VLATW Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

Place a vertical lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a vertical lateral component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral. Select Up or Down. The lateral component is drawn.

Side 11.25 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell Command line: H11LR Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

358


Toolbars Place a side or vertical elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.


Vert 11.25 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell Command line: V11LR Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Side 22.5 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell Command line: H22LR Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


359



Vert 22.5 Ell Buttweld toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell Victaulic toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell Command line: V22LR Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Side Wye Buttweld toolbar: Side Wye Victaulic toolbar: Side Wye Command line: HYB Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

360


Toolbars Place a side wye 1. Click a side wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye main. The wye component is drawn.

Vert Wye Buttweld toolbar: Vert Wye Victaulic toolbar: Vert Wye Command line: VYB Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

Place a vertical wye 1. Click a vertical wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye branches. The wye component is drawn.

Flanges Plant menu: Toolbars > Flanges Command Name

Command Line

Weld Neck - Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weld Neck Flange (on page 362).

FLGW

Slip On - Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).

FLGO

Blind - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).

FLGB

Socket Weld - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 366). Threaded - Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded Flange (on page 367).

FLGT

Lap Joint - Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lap Joint Flange (on page 369).

FLGL

Stub End - Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y STB plane. For more information, see Stub End (on page 369).


361


Command Line

Long Weld Neck - Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Long Weld Neck (on page 370).

LWN

Reducing Slip On - Places a reducing slip on flange in the FLRO X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange (on page 370). Reducing Threaded - Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Threaded Flange (on page 372).

FLRT

Reducing Weld Neck - Places a reducing weld neck flange in FLRW the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Weld Neck Flange (on page 373).

Weld Neck Flange Flanges toolbar: Weld Neck Command line: FLGW Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component. Buttweld end - Starts the flange at the buttweld end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the butt-welded end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.


362

Place a flange on a pipe (on page 363) Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 363)


Toolbars

Place a flange on a pipe 1. Place a pipe component. Place a pipe (on page 333) 2. Click a flange component command. 3. Click to select a starting point at an end of the pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. The flange component is drawn. Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping rule is set. You must also have a set of flanges for this to occur. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Auto Gasket (on page 183).

. For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 328).

Place a flange that mates with another flange 1. Place a pipe and a flange. Place a flange on a pipe (on page 363) 2. Click a flange component command. 3. Click to select a starting point at the end of the existing flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. The flange component is drawn with the face mating to the face of the existing flange. Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping rule is set. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).

For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 328).


363

Toolbars

Slip-on Flange Flanges toolbar: Slip On Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Flange Command line: FLGO Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. If Auto Gasket is turned on, then a gasket is also placed on the flange. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component. Slip on end - Starts the flange at the slip-on end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the slip-on end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.





364


Toolbars



Blind Flange Flanges toolbar: Blind Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Blind Flange Lined toolbar: Lined Blind Flange Command line: FLGB Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a flange 1. Click a flange component command. 2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and skip step 3. If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3. 3. Click to select the direction of the flange. The flange component is drawn. Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange Insertion Type.


365

Toolbars

Socket Type Flange Flanges toolbar: Socket Weld Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flange Command line: FLGS Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Socket end - Starts the flange at the Socket end. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.





366


Toolbars



Threaded Flange Flanges toolbar: Threaded Command line: FLGT Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Thread end - Starts the flange at the threaded end. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.




367

Toolbars





368


Toolbars

Lap Joint Flange Flanges toolbar: Lap Joint Command line: FLGL Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a flange 1. Click a flange component command. 2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and skip step 3. If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3. 3. Click to select the direction of the flange. The flange component is drawn. Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange Insertion Type.

Stub End Flanges toolbar: Stub End Command line: STB Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the current specification is used. Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end. Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.

Place a stub or weld neck 1. Click a stub or weld neck component command. 2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component. 3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. The component is drawn.


369

Toolbars

Long Weld Neck Flanges toolbar: Long Weld Neck Command line: LWN Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane. Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the current specification is used. Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end. Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.

Place a stub or weld neck 1. Click a stub or weld neck component command. 2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component. 3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. The component is drawn.

Reducing Slip-on Flange Flanges toolbar: Reducing Slip On Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Flange Command line: FLRO Places a reducing slip-on flange in the X-Y plane.You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component. Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.


370



Toolbars






371

Toolbars

Reducing Threaded Flange Flanges toolbar: Reducing Threaded Command line: FLRT Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component. Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.





372


Toolbars



Reducing Weld Neck Flange Flanges toolbar: Reducing Weld Neck Command line: FLRW Places a reducing weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component. Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction. Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.




373

Toolbars





374


Toolbars

Flgd/BW Valves Plant menu: Toolbars > Flgd/BW Valves The commands on the Flgd/BW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Gate - Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Gate Valve (on page 376).

GATF

Ball - Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page 377)

BALF

Globe - Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For GLBF more information, see Globe Valve (on page 378). Plug - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on page 378).

PLUF

Check - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve (on page 379).

CHKF

Butterfly - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page 380).

BFYF

Diaphragm - Places a diaphragm valve and flange gasket component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Diaphragm Valve (on page 380).

DIAF

Rotary - Places a rotary valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Rotary Valve (on page 381).

ROTF

Dual Check - Places a dual check valve and flange gasket components in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Dual Check Valve (on page 382).

DCHF

Control - Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Control Valve (on page 382).

CNTF

3 Way Plan - Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Plan Valve (on page 383).

3VF

4 Way Plan - Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see 4-Way Plan Valve (on page 384).

4VF

Relief Side - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Side Valve (on page 384).

RELF

Angle Top - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. ANGF For more information, see Angle Top Valve (on page 385).


375

Toolbars

The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D. Command Name

Command Line

3 Way Side - Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Side Valve (on page 386)

H3VF

3 Way Vertical - Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Vertical Valve (on page 386).

V3VF

4 Way Side - Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For. more information, see 4-Way Side Valve (on page 387)

H4VF

Relief Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Top Valve (on page 387)

HRELF

Pressure Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Pressure Top Valve (on page 388).

VRELF

Angle Side - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. HANGF For more information, see Angle Side Valve (on page 388).


Gate Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Gate Command line: GATF Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.

376


Toolbars Place a valve 1. Click a valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software. The valve component is drawn.


Ball Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Ball Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Ball Valve Command line: BALF Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.

Place a valve 1. Click a valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software. The valve component is drawn.



377

Toolbars

Globe Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Globe Command line: GLBF Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



Plug Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Plug Victaulic toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve Command line: PLUF Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the valve at its center.

378




Check Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Check Sanitary toolbar: Victaulic Check Valve Command line: CHKF Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.




379

Toolbars

Butterfly Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Butterfly Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Butterfly Valve Command line: BFYF Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



Diaphragm Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Diaphragm Command line: DIAF Places a diaphragm valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.

380




Rotary Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Rotary Command line: ROTF Places a rotary component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.




381

Toolbars

Dual Check Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Dual Check Command line: DCHF Places a dual check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.



Control Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Control Command line: CNTF Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the valve. Center - Places the valve at its center.

382




3-Way Plan Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Plan Command line: 3VF Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve. Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point.

Place a 3-way plan valve 1. Click a three-way valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step. 3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not connecting to a component in the model. 4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.


383

Toolbars

4-Way Plan Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Plan Command line: 4VF Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Place a 4-way plan valve 1. Click a four-way plan valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. 3. Click in the direction of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Relief Side Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Side Command line: RELF Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve. Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.

384


Toolbars Place an angle valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click an angle or relief valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the branch or relief end of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Angle Top Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Top Command line: ANGF Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Place an angle valve 1. 2. 3. 4.



385

Toolbars


3-Way Side Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Side Command line: H3VF Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve. Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

Place a 3-way side valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a three-way side valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. Select Up or Down. The valve component is drawn.

3-Way Vertical Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Vertical Command line: V3VF Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

386


Toolbars Place a 3-way vertical valve 1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

4-Way Side Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Side Command line: H4VF Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Place a 4-way side valve 1. Click a four-way side valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. 3. Click in the direction of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Relief Top Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Top Command line: HRELF Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve. Relief - Places the relief end at the start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.


387

Toolbars Place an angle side valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click an angle or relief side valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. Select Up or Down. The valve component is drawn.

Pressure Top Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Pressure Top Command line: VRELF Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve. Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

Place an angle side valve 1. 2. 3. 4.


Angle Side Valve Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Side Command line: HANGF Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47). last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

388




Lined Plant menu: Toolbars > Lined The commands on the Lined toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Lined Pipe - Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Pipe (on page 391).

PIPFL

Lined 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

90FL

Lined 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

45FL

Lined Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

Lined Reducing Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Plan (on page 421).

TERE

Lined Concentric - Places a flanged and lined concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405).

CNFL

Lined Eccentric - Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Eccentric Reducer (on page 392).

ECFL

Lined Wye Plan - Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Plan (on page 392).

YFL

Lined Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross CRSE in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page 422).


389


Command Line

Lined Reducing Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).

CRRE

Lined Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on page 423).

LATE

Lined Spacer - Places a lined spacer in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 501).

BLD

Lined Reducing Flange - Places a lined reducing flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange (on page 370).

FLRO

Lined Blind Flange - Places a lined blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).

FLGB


390

Command Line

Lined 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H90FL

Lined 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H45FL

Lined 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).

V45FL

Lined Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).

HTEFL

Lined Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

Lined Reducing Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438)

HTERE

Lined Reducing Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).

VTERE

Lined Wye Side - Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Side (on page 393).

HYFL


Toolbars Command Name Lined Wye Vert - Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane For more information, see Lined Wye Vert (on page 393).

Command Line VYFL

Lined Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross HCRSE with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Side (on page 439).

 

Lined Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on page 439).

HCRRE

Lined Reducing Cross Vert - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page 440).

VCRRE

Lined Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).

HLATE

Lined Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 440).

VLATE

The specification for lined pipe components is delivered in the Lined.spc file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder. The FLGS column in the flanged component data files controls placement of flanges. A value of 1 places a flange on the first end of the component. 2 places a flange on the second end. 3 places flanges on both ends. 4 places a flange on the branch end of a tee or wye. Other combinations of flanges are based on adding these values. For example, if the flanges are needed on all ends of a tee, use 1 + 2 + 4 = 7.


Lined Pipe Lined toolbar: Lined Pipe Command line: PIPFL Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. Flanged end - Places the flanged end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe has a flange on one end. Plain end - Places the plain end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe has a flange on one end.


391

Toolbars Length - Defines the length of the pipe. If no length is defined, the length is based on the start and end points.

Place a pipe 1. Click a pipe component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. 3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. The pipe component is drawn.

Lined Eccentric Reducer Lined toolbar: Lined Eccentric Command line: ECFL Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.


Lined Wye Plan Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Plan Command line: YFL Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye. Branch - Places the branch of the wye at the start point. otherEnd - Places the component at the other end of the start point.

392


Toolbars Place a plan wye 1. Click a plan wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye. The wye component is drawn.


Lined Wye Side Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Side Command line: HYFL Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

Place a side wye 1. Click a side wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye main. The wye component is drawn.

Lined Wye Vert Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Vert Command line: VYFL Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.


393

Toolbars Place a vertical wye 1. Click a vertical wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye branches. The wye component is drawn.

Fiberglass Plant menu: Toolbars > Fiberglass The commands on the Fiberglass toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Pipe - Places a fiberglass pipe component. For more information, see Fiberglass Pipe (on page 397).

PIPF

FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket 90S elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 397). FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket 45S elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 398).

394

FRP Bell Tee Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan (on page 399).

TESS

FRP Bell Conc w/Hub - Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer (on page 399).

SWGCS

FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer (on page 400).

SWGES

FRP Bell Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan (on page 400).

CRSS

FRP Bell Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan (on page 401).

LATS

FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).

CPS



Command Line

FRP Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y CAPS plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Cap (on page 402). FRP Bush/Insert - Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing (on page 402).

BUSS

Saddle in Plan - Places a soc-o-let in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle in Plan (on page 402).

SOL

FRP Blind Flange - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. FLGB For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365). FRP Flange - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 366). FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

90FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

45FL

FRP Flanged Tee Plan - Places a flanged tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

FRP Flanged Concentric - Places a flanged concentric CNFL reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405). The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D. Command Name

Command Line

FRP Bell 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket H90S elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 405). FRP Bell 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket H45S elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 406). FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to V45S the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 406). FRP Bell Tee Side - Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side (on page 407).


HTESS

395


Command Line

FRP Bell Tee Vert - Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert (on page 407).

VTESS

FRP Bell Cross Side - Places a four-way straight HCRSS threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side (on page 408) FRP Bell Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Side (on page 408).

HLATS

FRP Bell Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert (on page 408).

VLATS

FRP Bell Full Clpg End - Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Full Coupling End (on page 409).

VCPS

Saddle in Vertical - Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle in Vertical (on page 409).

VSOL

FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H90FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H45FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).

V45FL

FRP Flanged Tee Side - Places a flanged tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).

HTEFL

FRP Flanged Tee Vert - Places a flanged tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

You must set the FRP.SPC default specification that is supplied with CADWorx for the icons to work on the toolbar.

396


Toolbars


Fiberglass Pipe Fiberglass toolbar: Pipe Command line: PIPF Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane. Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.  Threaded  Bevel  Plain last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Place a fiberglass pipe 1. Click a pipe component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and press ENTER. 3. Click to select an ending point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and press ENTER. 4. If prompted for an end type, type the required end type on the command line, and press ENTER. The pipe component is drawn.

Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan Command line: 90S Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.


397

Toolbars Place a 90 degree plan elbow 1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the selection. 3. Click in the direction of the corner. 4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan Command line: 45S Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.


398



Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Plan Command line: TESS Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.



Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Conc w/Hub Command line: SWGCS Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.



399

Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub Command line: SWGES Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.


Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Plan Command line: CRSS Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.


400


Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Plan Command line: LATS Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.

Place a plan lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.


Coupling Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Coupling Command line: CPS Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.

Place a coupling 1. Click a coupling command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the coupling. The coupling component is drawn.


401

Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Cap Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Cap Command line: CAPS Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.


Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bush/Insert Command line: BUSS Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the large end at the start point of the component. Small end - Places the small end at the start point of the component.

Place a bushing 1. Click a bushing component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing. The bushing component is drawn.

Saddle in Plan Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Plan Command line: SOL Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

402


Toolbars Place a plan sock-o-let 1. Click a sock-o-let component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the sock-o-let. The sock-o-let component is drawn.

Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Plan Command line: 90FL Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.


Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Plan Command line: 45FL Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.


403

Toolbars Place a plan elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.


Flanged Tee Plan Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Plan Victaulic toolbar: Plan Strainer Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Plan Command line: TEFL Places a flanged tee or strainer in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the component. Branch - places the start point at the branch of the component.

Place a plan flanged tee 1. 2. 3. 4.

404

Click a plan flanged tee command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the tee. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The component is drawn.


Toolbars

Flanged Concentric Reducer Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Concentric Lined toolbar: Lined Concentric Command line: CNFL Places a flanged concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point. This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.



Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Side Command line: H90S Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.




405

Toolbars

Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Side Command line: H45S Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert Command line: V45S Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


406



Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Side Command line: HTESS Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.



Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Vert Command line: VTESS Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.



407

Toolbars

Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Side Command line: HCRSS Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.


Threaded/Socket Lateral Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Side Command line: HLATS Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

Place a side lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.


Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Vert Command line: VLATS Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

408


Toolbars Place a vertical lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.


Full Coupling End Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg End Command line: VCPS Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.

Place a coupling end 1. Click a coupling end component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the top of the coupling. The coupling component is drawn.

Saddle in Vertical Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Vertical Command line: VSOL Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the negative Z direction.

Place a vertical soc-o-let 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a vertical soc-o-let component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral. Select Up or Down. The soc-o-let component is drawn.


409

Toolbars

Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Side Command line: H90FL Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Side Command line: H45FL Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


410



Toolbars

Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Vert Command line: V45FL Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Flanged Tee Side Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Side Victaulic toolbar: Side Strainer Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Side Command line: HTEFL Places a flanged tee or strainer with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the strainer at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.


411

Toolbars Place a side flanged tee 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side flanged tee component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the tee. Select Up or Down. The component is drawn.

Flanged Tee Vertical Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Vert Victaulic toolbar: Vert Strainer Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Vert Command line: VTEFL Places a flanged tee or strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the strainer is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.

Place a vertical strainer 1. Click a vertical flanged tee component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The component is drawn.

Sanitary Plant menu: Toolbars > Sanitary The commands on the Sanitary toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name Sanitary Tubing - Places a butt-welded sanitary tubing component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

Command Line PIPW

Sanitary 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree elbow in the X-Y 90EN plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Ell Plan (on page 419).

412



Command Line

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree reducing 90RE elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan (on page 420). Sanitary 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Plan (on page 420).

45EN

Sanitary Tee Plan - Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Plan (on page 421).

TESE

Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan - Places a sanitary reducing tee TERE in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Plan (on page 421). Sanitary Cross Plan - Places a four-way sanitary cross in the CRSE X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page 422). Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan - Places a four-way sanitary reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).

CRRE

Sanitary Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on page 423).

LATE

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan (on page 424).

LARE

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan (on page 424).

22EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan (on page 425).

11EN

Sanitary U-Bend Plan - Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Plan (on page 426).

UBEN

Sanitary Concentric - Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Concentric (on page 426).

CONCE

Sanitary Eccentric - Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Eccentric (on page 427).

ECCE

Sanitary Stub - Places a sanitary stub coupling component in STUE the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Stub (on page 427).


413


Command Line

Sanitary Wye Plan - Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Plan (on page 428).

YE

Sanitary Cap - Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Cap (on page 428).

CAPE

Sanitary Nut/Coupling - Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the NUTE X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Nut/Coupling (on page 429). Sanitary Gate Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component GATE in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Gate Valve (on page 429). Sanitary Ball Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Ball Valve (on page 430).

BALE

Sanitary Globe Valve - Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Globe Valve (on page 430).

GLBE

Sanitary Plug Valve - Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Plug Valve (on page 431).

PLUE

Sanitary Check Valve - Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Check Valve (on page 431).

CHKE

Sanitary Butterfly Valve - Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Butterfly Valve (on page 432).

BFYE

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan - Places a sanitary 3-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan (on page 432).

3VE

Sanitary Angle Valve Plan - Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Plan (on page 433).

ANGE

Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve - Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve (on page 433).

AIR1

Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve - Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve (on page 434).

AIR2

Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve - Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve (on page 434).

AIR3

The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.

414



Command Line

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side - Places a 90 degree reducing H90RE elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side (on page 435). Sanitary 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Side (on page 436).

H45EN

Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical (on page 436).

V45EN

Sanitary Tee Side - Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Side (on page 437).

HTESE

Sanitary Tee Vertical - Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Vertical (on page 437).

VTESE

Sanitary Reducing Tee Side - Places a sanitary reducing tee HTERE with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438) Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical - Places a sanitary reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).

VTERE

Sanitary Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Side (on page 439).

HCRSE

Sanitary Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on page 439).

HCRRE

Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical - Places a four-way VCRRE sanitary reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page 440). Sanitary Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).

HLATE

Sanitary Lateral Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral VLATE with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 440). Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side (on page 441).


HLARE

415


Command Line

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical -Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical (on page 441).

VLARE

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side (on page 442).

H22EN

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical (on page 442).

V22EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side (on page 443).

H11EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical (on page 443).

V11EN

Sanitary U-Bend Side - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Side (on page 444).

HUBEN

Sanitary U-Bend Vertical - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Vertical (on page 444).

VUBEN

Sanitary Wye Side - Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Side (on page 445).

HYE

Sanitary Wye Vertical - Places a sanitary wye normal to the VYE X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Vertical (on page 445). Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side - Places a 3-way valve H3VE component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side (on page 446). Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical - Places a sanitary 3-way V3VE valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical (on page 446). Sanitary Angle Valve Side - Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Side (on page 446).

416

HANGE


Toolbars Sanitary fitting components can have many end types, such as butt-welded, flanged, ferrule, coupling, hub, square, bull, and a simple engagement used with threaded and socket-welded piping. The end types can also vary for each end of a fitting, as shown in the examples below.

The available end types are defined by the selected specification, and the prompts for each command reflect the end type used. Available end types are shown below.


417

Toolbars End types are delivered in the files End1.dwg through End17.dwg in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. The multi-port valves have special port controls in the data files. Listed below are all the port types available for these valves. When all three ports are specified in the data file, all three ports are drawn on the drawing. When only one or two ports are required, place 0 in the last port entries and this supplies either a one or two port valve.

CADWorx end types are exported to ISOGEN as shown in the following table.

418

CADWorx End Type

ISOGEN End Type

0

PL (Plain)

1

BW (Butt weld)

2

FL (Flanged)

3

LN (Liner/Nut)

4

LN (Liner/Nut)

5

MP (Male Part)

6

MP (Male Part)

7

MP (Male Part)

8

MP (Male Part)

9

CL (Clamped)

10

CL (Clamped)

11

CL (Clamped)


Toolbars 12

CL (Clamped)

13

CL (Clamped)

14

SW (Socket Weld)

15

SC (Screwed)


Sanitary 90 Ell Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Plan Command line: 90EN Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



419

Toolbars

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan Command line: 90RE Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point.

Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Sanitary 45 Ell Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Plan Command line: 45EN Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.


420

Click a plan elbow command. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.


Toolbars The elbow component is drawn.

Sanitary Tee Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Plan Command line: TESE Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Reducing Tee Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Plan Command line: TERE Places a reducing tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.


421

Toolbars Place a plan tee 1. 2. 3. 4.


Cross Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Plan Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Plan Command line: CRSE Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point. Branch1 - Places the first branch of the cross at the start point. Branch2 - Places the second branch of the cross at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.


422


Toolbars

Cross Reducing Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Plan Command line: CRRE Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

Place a sanitary plan reducing cross 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan . Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the cross. Click in the direction of the branch end. The cross component is drawn.

Lateral Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Plan Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Plan Command line: LATE Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.




423

Toolbars

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan Command line: LARE Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.



Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan Command line: 22EN Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

424


Toolbars Place a plan elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.


Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan Command line: 11EN Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.




425

Toolbars

Sanitary U-Bend Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Plan Command line: UBEN Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. The bend also has a branch the projects up or down in the Z direction. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend. otherEnd - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a sanitary u-bend 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Sanitary U-Bend Plan . Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the bend. Click in the direction of the end of the bend. Select Up or Down. The bend component is drawn.

Sanitary Concentric Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Concentric Command line: CONCE Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point. Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

426


Toolbars Place a concentric reducer 1. Click a concentric reducer component command. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer. The reducer component is drawn.

Sanitary Eccentric Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Eccentric Command line: ECCE Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point. Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point. Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction. The end type is defined by the current specification.


Sanitary Stub Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Stub Command line: STUE Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Plan end - Places the plan end at the start point. Face end - Places the face end at the start point.


427

Toolbars Place a coupling 1. Click a coupling component command. 2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling. The coupling component is drawn.

Sanitary Wye Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Plan Command line: YE Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye. otherEnd - Places the end of the wye at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.

Place a plan wye 1. Click a plan wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye. The wye component is drawn.

Sanitary Cap Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cap Command line: CAPE Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.

428


Toolbars Place a cap 1. Click a cap component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap. The cap component is drawn.

Sanitary Nut/Coupling Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Nut/Coupling Command line: NUTE Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a coupling 1. Click a coupling component command. 2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling. The coupling component is drawn.

Sanitary Gate Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Gate Valve Command line: GATE Places a sanitary gate valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.




429

Toolbars

Sanitary Ball Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Ball Valve Command line: BALE Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Sanitary Globe Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Globe Valve Command line: GLBE Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



430


Toolbars

Sanitary Plug Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve Command line: PLUE Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Sanitary Check Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Check Valve Command line: CHKE Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.




431

Toolbars

Sanitary Butterfly Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Butterfly Valve Command line: BFYE Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan Command line: 3VE Places a sanitary three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve. otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

432


Toolbars Place a 3-way plan valve 1. Click a three-way valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step. 3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not connecting to a component in the model. 4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Sanitary Angle Valve Plan Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Plan Command line: ANGE Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.

Place an angle valve 1. 2. 3. 4.


Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve Command line: AIR1 Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.


433

Toolbars Place a multi-port valve 1. Click a multi-port valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator. or To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up. 4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis. The valve component is drawn.

Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve Command line: AIR2 Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.

Place a multi-port valve 1. Click a multi-port valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator. or To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up. 4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis. The valve component is drawn.

Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve Command line: AIR3 Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.

Place a multi-port valve 1. Click a multi-port valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator. or To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up. 4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis. The valve component is drawn.

434


Toolbars


Sanitary 90 Ell Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Side Command line: H90EN Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Plan end - Places the plan end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side Command line: H90RE Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. ENgagement end - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a side reducing elbow 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side reducing plan elbow component command. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner.


435

Toolbars 5. Select Up or Down. The elbow component is drawn.

Sanitary 45 Ell Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Side Command line: H45EN Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical Command line: V45EN Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

436




Sanitary Tee Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Side Command line: HTESE Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. FErrule End - Places the other end of the tee at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary Tee Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Vertical Command line: VTESE Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.


437

Toolbars Place a vertical tee 1. Click a vertical tee component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The tee component is drawn.

Reducing Tee Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Side Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Side Command line: HTERE Places a reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Plan end - Places the plan end of the tee at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.



Reducing Tee Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Vert Command line: VTERE Places a reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.

438


Toolbars Place a vertical tee 1. Click a vertical tee component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee. The tee component is drawn.

Cross Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Side Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Side Command line: HCRSE Places a four-way straight cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.


Cross Reducing Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Cross Side Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Side Command line: HCRRE Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.

Place a sanitary side reducing cross 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Sanitary Reducing Cross Side . Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the cross. Click in the direction of the end of the branch. The cross component is drawn.


439

Toolbars

Cross Reducing Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Vert Command line: VCRRE Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. ENgagement branch end point - Places the engagement branch at the start point.

Place a vertical reducing cross 1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the cross. The cross component is drawn.

Lateral Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Side Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Side Command line: HLATE Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. coupLing End - Places the coupling end of the lateral at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.



Lateral Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Vertical Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Vert Command line: VLATE Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

440


Toolbars Place a vertical lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.


Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side Command line: HLARE Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. coupLing end - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical Command line: VLARE Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.




441

Toolbars

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side Command line: H22EN Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical Command line: V22EN Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


442



Toolbars

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side Command line: H11EN Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. FErrule End - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical Command line: V11EN Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.


443



Sanitary U-Bend Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Side Command line: HUBEN Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend. End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the end of the bend. Select Up or Down. Click in the direction of the branch. The bend component is drawn.

.

Sanitary U-Bend Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Vertical Command line: VUBEN Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend. End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

444


Toolbars Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the end of the bend. Select Up or Down. Click in the direction of the branch. The bend component is drawn.

.

Sanitary Wye Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Side Command line: HYE Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

Place a side wye 1. Click a side wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye main. The wye component is drawn.

Sanitary Wye Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Vertical Command line: VYE Places a sanitary wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

Place a vertical wye 1. Click a vertical wye command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the wye branches. The wye component is drawn.


445

Toolbars

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side Command line: H3VE Places a three-way valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve. ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.



Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical Command line: V3VE Places a sanitary three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the valve is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. FErrule branch end point - Places the ferrule end of the valve at the start point.

Place a 3-way vertical valve 1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Sanitary Angle Valve Side Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Side Command line: HANGE Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

446




Victaulic Plant menu: Toolbars > Victaulic The commands on the Victaulic toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Pipe - Places a victaulic pipe component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

PIPW

Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page 333).

90LR

Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page 334).

90SR

Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).

45LR

Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow 90RD in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell (on page 335). Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow H90RD normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 Reducing Ell (on page 351). Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 347).

11LR

Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 348).

22LR

Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more TESW information, see Plan Tee (on page 336). Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page 337).


TERW

447


Command Line

Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 340).

CRSW

Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Cross (on page 341).

CCRW

Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).

YB

Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341).

LATW

Plan Strainer - Places a strainer in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in CONC the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on page 339) Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page 339).

ECC

Victaulic Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cap (on page 340).

CAPW

Victaulic Coupling - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).

CPS

Victaulic Flange - Places a flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).

FLGO

Victaulic Butterfly Valve - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page 380).

BFYF

Victaulic Check Valve - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve (on page 379).

CHKF

Victaulic Ball Valve - Places a ball valve component in the BALF X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page 377). Victaulic Plug Valve - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on page 378).

448

PLUF


Toolbars The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D. Command Name

Command Line

Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow H90LR normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on page 349). Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow H90SR normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 SR Ell (on page 350) Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y H45LR plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335). Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y V45LR plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351). Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to H11LR the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page 358). Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to V11LR the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page 359). Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 359).

H22LR

Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the V22LR X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 360). Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 352).

HTESW

Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the VTESW X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 353). Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).

HTERW

Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 354).

VTERW

Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross (on page 356).

HCRSW

Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross HCCRW with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).


449


Command Line

Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).

VCRRW

Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye (on page 360).

HYB

Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Wye (on page 361).

VYB

Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Side Lateral (on page 357).

HLATW

Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Lateral (on page 358).

VLATW

Side Strainer - Places a strainer with the branch normal to HTEFL the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411). Vert Strainer - Places a strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

You must use one of the Victaulic default specifications that are supplied with CADWorx for the icons to work on the toolbar. This toolbar provides components manufactured by Victaulic Corporation. The Victaulic specifications and data files have been provided by Victaulic and can be used to draw components supplied by this company. The specifications supplied are for AWWA, IPS, 304, 316, and PFCS type components.

Threaded/Socket Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Fittings The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two modes. The commands on the Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Thrd/SW Pipe - Places a threaded/socket pipe component. For PIPF more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).

450



Command Line

Nipple - Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Nipple (on page 456).

NIP

Tube - Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. For more information, see Tube (on page 457).

TUBE

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan (on page 457).

90S/90T

Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket street elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan (on page 458).

90SS/90ST

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan (on page 459).

45S/45T

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan (on page 459).

90RS/90RT

Thrd/SW Tee Plan - Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Plan (on page 460).

TESS/TEST

Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan (on page 460).

TERS/TERT

Thrd/SW Conc Swage - Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc Swage (on page 461).

SWGC

Thrd/SW Ecc Swage - Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc Swage (on page 461).

SWGE

Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub - Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub (on page 462).

SWGCT

Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub (on page 462).

SWGET

Thrd/SW Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cap (on page 463).

CAPS/CAPT

Thrd/SW Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Plan (on page 463).

CRSS/CRST

Thrd/SW Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Plan (on page 464).

LATS/LATT


451


Command Line

Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded/socket plug in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 464).

PLGT

Thrd/SW Bush/Insert - Places a threaded/socket bushing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Bush/Insert (on page 464).

BUSS/BUST

Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket full coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan (on page 465).

CPS/CPT

Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket half coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan (on page 465).

HCPS/HCPT

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket reducing coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan (on page 465).

CPRS/CPRT

Weld in Plan - Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Plan (on page 466).

WOL

Thrd in Plan - Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Plan (on page 466).

TOL

SW in Plan - Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 466).

SOL

EOL-Weld in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Plan (on page 467).

EOLW

EOL-Thrd in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Plan (on page 467).

EOLT

EOL-SW in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 467).

EOLS

LOL-Weld in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLW plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Plan (on page 468). LOL-Thrd in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLT plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Plan (on page 468). LOL- SW in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 468).

452

LOLS



Command Line

Weld in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see Nipolet Weld in Plan (on page 469).

NOLP

Thrd in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see Nipolet Thread in Plan (on page 469).

NOLT

Thrd/SW Union - Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Union (on page 469).

UNS/UNT


Command Line

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side (on page 470).

H90S/H90T

Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket street elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side (on page 470).

H90SS/H90ST

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side (on page 471).

H45S/H45T

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert (on page 471).

V45S/V45T

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side - Places a 90 degree H90RS/H90RT threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side (on page 472). Thrd/SW Tee Side - Places a threaded/socket straight tee normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Side (on page 472).

HTESS/HTEST

Thrd/SW Tee Vert - Places a threaded/socket straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Vert (on page 473).

VTESS/VTEST

Thrd/SW Tee Red Side - Places a straight threaded/socket HTERS/HTERT reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Side (on page 473). Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert - Places a threaded/socket reducing straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert (on page 474).


VTERS/VTERT

453


Command Line

Thrd/SW Cross Side - Places a four-way straight HRCSS/HCRST threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Side (on page 474). Thrd/SW Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket HLATS/HLATT lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Side (on page 474). Thrd/SW Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Vert (on page 475).

VLATS/VLATT

Thrd/SW Full Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Full Clpg End (on page 475).

VCPS/VCPT

Thrd/SW Half Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket half coupling component end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg End (on page 476).

VHCPS/VHCPT

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End (on page 476).

VCPRS/VCPRT

Weld in Vertical - Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Vertical (on page 476).

VWOL

Thrd in Vertical - Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Vertical (on page 477).

VTOL

SW in Vertical - Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 477).

VSO:

EOL-Weld in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Side (on page 477).

HEOLW

EOL-Weld in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLW plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Vertical (on page 478). EOL-Thrd in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Side (on page 478).

HEOLT

EOL-Thrd in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLT plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Vertical (on page 478). EOL-SW in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side (on page 479).

454

HEOLS



Command Line

EOL-SW in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 479).

VEOLS

LOL-Weld in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Side (on page 479).

HLOLW

LOL-Thrd in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Side (on page 480).

HLOLT

LOL- SW in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the HLOLS X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Side (on page 480). Weld in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see Nipolet Weld in Vertical (on page 480).

VNOLP

Thrd in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see Nipolet Thread in Vertical (on page 481).

VNOLP

The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with additional commands available.


Thrd/SW Pipe Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe Command line: PIPF Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. If the drawing environment is set to threaded, the piping component has threaded ends. If the drawing environment is set to a socket weld, the piping component has plain ends. Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.  Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).  Bevel - Used when working with welded components.  Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25). last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.


455

Toolbars BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis. Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Place a threaded/socket pipe 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a pipe component command. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER. If you receive a prompt for end types, type the option on the command line and press ENTER. The pipe component is drawn.

Nipple Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Nipple Command line: NIP Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the fitting component. Close - Reads the close distance as specified in the data file. Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.  Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).  Bevel - Used when working with welded components.  Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).

Place a nipple 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Nipple . Alternatively, type NIP on the command line and then press ENTER. Click to select a starting point. Click to select an ending point. Specify the end option for the start of the component. Specify the end option for the end of the component. The end options default depends on which options you have set. The pipe nipple is drawn.

456


Toolbars

Tube Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Tube Command line: TUBE Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. Different radii can be placed at each vertex of the polyline, or you can define a common radius for all corners. Use the Router command on the RT Panel (on page 189) for useful 3D polyline routing capabilities. Tubing uses the pipe component entry within the CADWorx Plant specifications. Pipe and tubing can be used concurrently. Tubing can occupy a range of 1/8” – 1/2”, whereas regular pipe can occupy 3/4” and above. Tubing can be set up as an optional component, or the specification can be set up to only handle tubing. After tubing is placed in the drawing, other components can be inserted into it. Like normal piping, tubing also automatically breaks. Even after a component is inserted, the tubing remains as one piece. When edited with CEDIT, the tubing attached to a single polyline also acts as one piece. Grouping is controlled by the PICKSTYLE environmental variable, which must be turned on for the tubing to act as one piece. Alternatively, you can use the CADWorx GROUPTOG command to turn the AutoCAD grouping control on or off. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150). Enter corner radius - Defines the radius to be used at each vertex. Manual - Places individual radii at each corner of the selected polyline. The software pauses at each vertex so that the radius can be defined. A rubber-banded line back to the actual vertex is shown in the drawing.   

Tubing is exported to a live database, and appears in the CADWorx Bill of Material as one piece. Tubing is exported to the CADWorx ISOGEN isometric generator and appears in the ISOGEN material list. Tubing is not exported to CAESAR II.

Place tubing 1. Click Tube . Alternatively, type TUBE on the command line and then press ENTER. 2. Type the required radius. 3. Select the 2D or 3D polyline. The tubing is attached.

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan Command line: 90/S90T Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point.


457

Toolbars Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.


Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan Command line: 90SS/90ST Places a 90 degree street elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Female - Places the female end of the elbow first. Male - Places the male end of the elbow first. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Female end direction - Specifies the direction of the female end of the elbow. Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.

Place a 90 degree street plan elbow 1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan then press ENTER. 2. 3. 4. 5.

. Alternatively, type 90SS on the command line and

If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type 90ST on the command line. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the male end of the elbow. If the male end is placed first, the system prompts you for placement of the female end.

458


Toolbars The elbow component is drawn.

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan Command line: 45S/45T Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.



Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan Command line: 90RS/90RT Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.

Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow 1. Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command. 2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.


459

Toolbars 3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 4. Click in the direction of the corner. 5. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow. The elbow component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Tee Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Plan Command line: TESS/TEST Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.



Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan Command line: TESS/TERT Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.

460


Toolbars Place a plan tee 1. 2. 3. 4.


Thrd/SW Conc Swage Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc Swage Command line: SWGC Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage. Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage. This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.

Place a concentric reducer swage 1. Click Thrd/SW Conc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGC on the command line and then press ENTER. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer. 4. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer. Type the required alpha description. 5. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer. The reducer component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Ecc Swage Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc Swage Command line: SWGE Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.


461

Toolbars Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage. Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage. Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction. This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.

Place an eccentric reducer swage 1. Click Thrd/SW Ecc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGE on the command line and then press ENTER. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the small end of reducer. 4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side. or To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down. 5. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer. Type the required alpha description. 6. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer. The reducer component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub Command line: SWGCT Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.


Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub Command line: SWGET Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point. Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.

462


Toolbars Place an eccentric reducer 1. Click an eccentric reducer component command. 2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe. or Select Small end, and press ENTER. 3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer. 4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side. or To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down. The reducer component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Cap Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cap Command line: CAPS/CAPT Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.


Thrd/SW Cross Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Plan Command line: CRSS/CRST Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.



463

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Lateral Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Plan Command line: LATS/LATT Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end. Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.



Thrd/SW Plug Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug Command line: PLGT Places a plug in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Cap end - Places the cap end of the component at the start point.

Place a plug 1. Click a plug component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the end point. The plug component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Bush/Insert Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Bush/Insert Command line: BUSS/BUST Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point. Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.

464


Toolbars Place a bushing 1. Click a bushing component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. 3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing. The bushing component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan Command line: CPS/CPT Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Middle - Places the component at the centerline. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.


Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan Command line: HCPS/HCPT Places a half coupling in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Plan end - Places the start point at the plan end.


Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan Command line: CPRS/CPRT Places a reducing coupling in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Large - Places the large end at the start point. Middle - Places the start point of the component at the centerline. Small - Places the small end at the start point.


465

Toolbars Place a coupling 1. Click a coupling component command. 2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling. The coupling component is drawn.

Weldolet Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan Command line: WOL Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a plan fitting 1. Click a plan fitting component command. 2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting. The fitting component is drawn.

Threadolet Thread in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan Command line: TOL Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Plan Command line: SOL Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


466


Toolbars

Elbowlet Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Plan Command line: EOLW Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a plan elbowlet fitting 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a plan elbowlet command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting. Click in the direction of the butt weld end of the fitting. The fitting component is drawn.

Elbowlet Thread in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Plan Command line: EOLT Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.



Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Plan Command line: EOLS Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.




467

Toolbars

Latrolet Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Plan Command line: LOLW Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a plan latrolet fitting 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a plan latrolet command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main end of the fitting. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting. The fitting component is drawn.

Latrolet Thread in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Plan Command line: LOLT Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.



Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Plan Command line: LOLS Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


468



Toolbars

Nipolet Weld in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan Command line: NOLP Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


Nipolet Thread in Plan Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan Command line: NOLT Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


Thrd/SW Union Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Union Command line: UNT Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the union.



469

Toolbars


Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side Command line: H90S/H90T Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe 90 Street Ell Side Command line: H90S/H90ST Places a 90 degree street elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Male - Starts the elbow at the male end point of the selected component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.

Place a 90 degree side street elbow 1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan then press ENTER. 2. 3. 4. 5.

470

. Alternatively, type H90SS on the command line and

If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type H90ST on the command line. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Select Up or Down. The elbow component is drawn.


Toolbars

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side Command line: H45S/H45T Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.



Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert Command line: V45S/V45T Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.




471

Toolbars

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side Command line: H90RS/H90RT Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point. Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a side reducing elbow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click a side reducing plan elbow component command. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Select Up or Down. The elbow component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Tee Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Side Command line: HTESS/HTEST Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.


472



Toolbars

Thrd/SW Tee Vert Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Vert Command line: VTESS/VTEST Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.


Thrd/SW Tee Red Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Side Command line: HTERS/HTERT Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee. Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.




473

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert Command line: VTERS/VTERT Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.


Thrd/SW Cross Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Side Command line: HCRSS/HCRST Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.


Thrd/SW Lateral Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Side Command line: HLATS/HLATT Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

474


Toolbars Place a side lateral 1. 2. 3. 4.


Thrd/SW Lateral Vert Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Vert Command line: VLATS/VLATT Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.



Thrd/SW Full Clpg End Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg End Command line: VCPS/VCPT Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.



475

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Half Clpg End Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg End Command line: VHCPS/VHCPT Places a half coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.


Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End Command line: VCPRS/VCPRT Places a reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.


Weldolet Weld in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical Command line: VWOL Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a vertical fitting 1. Click a vertical fitting component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Select Up or Down. The fitting component is drawn.

476


Toolbars

Threadolet Thread in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical Command line: VTOL Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.


Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Vertical Command line: VSOL Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.


Elbowlet Weld in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Side Command line: HEOLW Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a side elbowlet fitting 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side elbowlet component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting. Select Up or Down. The fitting component is drawn.


477

Toolbars

Elbowlet Weld in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Vert Command line: VEOLW Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Place a vertical elbowlet fitting 1. Click a plan fitting component command. 2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Click in the direction of the buttweld end of the fitting. The fitting component is drawn.

Elbowlet Thread in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Side Command line: HEOLT Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.



Elbowlet Thread in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Vert Command line: VEOLT Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


478


Toolbars

Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Side Command line: HEOLS Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.



Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Vert Command line: VEOLS Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.


Latrolet Weld in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Side Command line: HLOLW Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a side latrolet fitting 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a side latrolet component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting. Select Up or Down. The fitting component is drawn.


479

Toolbars

Latrolet Thread in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Side Command line: HLOLT Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.



Latrolet Socket Weld in Side Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Side Command line: HLOLS Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.



Nipolet Weld in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical Command line: VNOLP Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

480


Toolbars Place a vertical fitting 1. Click a vertical fitting component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. 3. Select Up or Down. The fitting component is drawn.

Nipolet Thread in Vertical Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical Command line: VNOLP Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.


Thrd/SW Valves Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Valves The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between the two modes. The commands on the Thrd/SW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Thrd/SW Gate - Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in GATS/GATT the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gate (on page 484). Thrd/SW Ball - Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ball (on page 484).

BALS/BALT

Thrd/SW Globe - Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve GLBS/GLBT in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Globe (on page 485).


481


Command Line

Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in PLUS/PLUT the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 485). Thrd/SW Check - Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Check (on page 486).

CHKS/CHKT

Thrd/SW Needle - Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Needle (on page 486).

NEDS/NEDT

Thrd/SW Diaphragm - Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Diaphragm (on page 487).

DIAS/DIAT

Thrd/SW Rotary - Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Rotary (on page 487).

ROTS/ROTT

Thrd/SW Dual Check - Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Dual Check (on page 488).

DCHS/DCHT

Thrd/SW Control - Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Control (on page 488).

CNTS/CNTT

Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan (on page 489).

3VS/3VT

Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan (on page 489).

4VS/4VT

Thrd/SW Relief Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Top (on page 494).

RELS/RELT

Thrd/SW Angle Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 ANGS/ANGT degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Angle Top (on page 490). Thrd/SW Gage - Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gage (on page 491).

GAGS/GAGT

X-Body Gate BW - Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate BW (on page 491).

EGAB

X-Body Gate Thrd - Places a threaded X-body style gate valve EGAT in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate Thrd (on page 492).

482


Toolbars Command Name X-Body Gate SW - Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate SW (on page 492).

Command Line EGAS


Command Line

Thrd/SW 3 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld H3VS/H3VT three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Side (on page 493). Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical - Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical (on page 493).

V3VS/V3VT

Thrd/SW 4 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Side (on page 494).

H4VS/H4VT

Thrd/SW Relief Side - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Side (on page 490).

HRELS/HRELT

Thrd/SW Pressure Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Pressure Top.

VRELS/VRELT

Thrd/SW Angle Side - Places a threaded or socket weld angle HANGS/HANGT valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Angle Side (on page 495). The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with additional commands available.


483

Toolbars


Thrd/SW Gate Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gate Command line: GATS/GATT Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



Thrd/SW Ball Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Ball Command line: BALS/BALT Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



484


Toolbars

Thrd/SW Globe Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Globe Command line: GLBS/GLBT Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



Thrd/SW Plug Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug Command line: PLUS/PLUT Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.




485

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Check Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Check Command line: CHKS/CHKT Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.



Thrd/SW Needle Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Needle Command line: NEDS/NEDT Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



486


Toolbars

Thrd/SW Diaphragm Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Diaphragm Command line: DIAS/DIAT Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



Thrd/SW Rotary Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Rotary Command line: ROTS/ROTT Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.




487

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Dual Check Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Dual Check Command line: DCHS/DCHT Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Middle - Places the valve at its center. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.



Thrd/SW Control Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Control Command line: CNTS/CNTT Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.



488


Toolbars

Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan Command line: 3VS/3VT Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve. Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

Place a 3-way plan valve 1. Click a three-way valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step. 3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not connecting to a component in the model. 4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan Command line: 4VS/4VT Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Place a 4-way plan valve 1. Click a four-way plan valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. 3. Click in the direction of the valve. The valve component is drawn.


489

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Relief Side Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Side Command line: RELS/RELT Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point. Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point.

Place a relief side valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

Click a relief valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the relief end of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Angle Top Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle Command line: ANGS/ANGT Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.

Place an angle top valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

490

Click an angle valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Click in the direction of the corner. Click in the direction of the branch end of the valve. The valve component is drawn.


Toolbars

Thrd/SW Gage Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gage Command line: GAGS/GAGT Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at its center.  

To pick the outlet locations of the gage valve, use the MIDpoint of OSnap command and then pick the sides on the outlet end. Because there is no way to accurately locate the outlets in 3D, first draw the component in 2D and then use the CONVERTSOLID command to convert the valve component to 3D solids.



X-Body Gate BW Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate BW Command line: EGAB Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component.




491

Toolbars

X-Body Gate Thrd Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: X-Body Gate Thrd Command line: EGAT Places a threaded X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component.



X-Body Gate SW Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate SW Command line: EGAS Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component.



492


Toolbars


Thrd/SW 3 Way Side Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Side Command line: H3VS/H3VT Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.



Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical Command line: V3VS/V3VT Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Place a 3-way vertical valve 1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. 3. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve. The valve component is drawn.


493

Toolbars

Thrd/SW 4 Way Side Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Side Command line: H4VS/H4VT Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Place a 4-way side valve 1. Click a four-way side valve command. 2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. 3. Click in the direction of the valve. The valve component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Relief Top Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Top Command line: HRELS/HRELT Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve. Relief - Places the start point at the relief end. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

Place a relief top valve 1. 2. 3. 4.

494

Click a relief valve component command. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. Select Up or Down. The valve component is drawn.


Toolbars

Thrd/SW Angle Side Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle Side Command line: HANGS/HANGT Places a threaded or socket weld angle valve in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes. Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

Place an angle side valve 1. 2. 3. 4.


Gaskets, Etc. Plant menu: Toolbars > Gaskets, Etc. Command Name

Command Line

Tick Mark - Creates a dimension tick mark. For more information, see Tick Mark (on page 201).

TICK

Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).

STDBOLT

Non Standard - Places non standard stud bolts at the NONSTDBOLT selected location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page 187). Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184). Gasket - Places a gasket. For more information, see Gasket (on page 496).

GAS

Weld Gap - Creates weld gaps For more information, see Weld Gap (on page 497).

WELD

The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with additional commands available.


495

Toolbars

Gasket Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Gasket Command line: GAS Places a gasket. The gasket is composed of two different entities. First is an inserted block that is located at the insert point. Another inserted block is placed on the other side of the gasket. The GASR contains Xdata information for Bill of Materials extraction. GASL is a plain insert without information. When you use mode conversion to convert components to another mode in a Z-plane position, the GASL insert is destroyed. When you convert the single GASR insert in the proper X and Y planes, both sides of the gasket are created again. The shape of the gasket allows for other uses, as explained below. The half circle on the outer portion of both inserts allow for easy picking for dimensioning. For example, when dimensioning, select Osnap, CENter of, and pick the center of circle which is the exact corner of the face of flange). You should find that it is relatively easy to select the center of the circle from a zoomed out view. For placing a flange face against the gasket, you can select Osnap, ENDpoint of, and select the side of the gasket to place the flange perfectly in position. This provides a method of placing the flange when the last point option is no longer available. This routine is also used for ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column indicating the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column and adds this ring number to the bill of materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) are used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.

Insert a gasket 1. Click Gasket . 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to select the last point of the previously-placed component. 3. Click in the required direction. The software inserts a gasket at the selected location. The same procedure can be used to place ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column, which indicates the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column, and adds this ring number to the Bill of Materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) is used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring. You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup .

496


Toolbars

Weld Gap Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Weld Gap Command line: WELD Creates weld gaps for detailed pipe fabrication. Weld gaps are controlled by the currently defined specification and are placed according to size and/or schedule. last point - Places the weld gap at the last point of the previously-created component. Each specification has data files that provide different thicknesses.

Define a weld gap 1. Click Weld Gap . 2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to select the last point of the previously-placed component. 3. Click in the required direction. The software creates a weld gap. Use Osnap > Insert and select any portion of the weld gap symbol to start a new pipe or component from the weld gap. You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup .

Restraints Plant menu: > Toolbars > Restraints The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below. Command Name

Command Line

Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For more information, see Translational (on page 223).

TRANSLATIONAL

Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more information, see Anchor (on page 224).

ANCHOR

Spring Hanger - Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).

SPRING

Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more information, see Rotational (on page 225).

ROTATIONAL

Snubber - Creates a Snubber-type restraint. For more information, see Snubber (on page 226).

SNUBBER

Guide - Creates a Guide-type restraint. For more information, GUIDE see Guide (on page 226). The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can position a rotational restraint at any vector.


497

Toolbars Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees. 





The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is sloped. All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID, SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder. You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.

Misc Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc Use the Threaded and Socket Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two modes for SW/Thrd Plan and SW/Thrd Side. The commands on the Misc toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329). Command Name

Command Line

Flanged Plan - Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y STRF plane. For more information, see Flanged Plan (on page 500). SW/Thrd Plan - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see SW/Thrd Plan (on page 500).

STRT

Create - Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

USERCREATE

User Shape 1 - Places user created shape 1 in the X-Y plane. USE1 For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153). User Shape 2 - Places user created shape 2 in the X-Y plane. USE2 For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153). User Shape 3 - Places user created shape 3 in the X-Y plane. USE3 For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153). User Shape 4 - Places user created shape 4 in the X-Y plane. USE4 For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153). User Shape 5 - Places user created shape 5 in the X-Y plane. USE5 For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

498



Command Line

Bleed Ring - Places a bleed ring in the drawing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 501).

BLD

Spec Bld Side - Places a blind spectacle in the drawing normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind Side (on page 501).

SPCT

Reinforcing Pad - Inserts information indicating a REINFPAD reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad (on page 222). Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts information indicating a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing Saddle (on page 222).

REINFSAD

Expansion Joint - Places an expansion joint in the drawing in EXPF the X-Y plane. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on page 502). Rigid Element - Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing. For more information, see Rigid Element (on page 502).

ELEMENT

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 173).

GENERIC

Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 108).

STOPSIGN


Command Line

Flanged Side - Places a flanged pipe component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Side (on page 503).

HSTRF

SW/Thrd Side - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see SW/Thrd Side (on page 503).

HSTRT

Spec Bld Vert - Places a blind spectacle with the main normal VSPCT to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind Vertical (on page 504). The arrow in the lower right corner of the button indicates a flyout for more options.


499

Toolbars


Flanged Plan Misc toolbar: Flanged Plan Command line: STRF Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end. Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point. Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.

Place a plan flange pipe 1. Click Flanged Plan . Alternatively, type STRF, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a main end direction. 4. Select branch direction. The flanged plan pipe is placed.

SW/Thrd Plan Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Plan Command line: STRT Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component. otherEnd - Place the start point of the component at the other end. Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point. Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.

500


Toolbars Place a side socket weld threaded pipe 1. Click SW/Thrd Plan . Alternatively, type STRT, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a main end direction. 4. Select branch direction. The plan socket weld/threaded pipe is placed.

Bleed Ring or Spacer Misc toolbar: Bleed Ring Lined toolbar: Lined Spacer Command line: BLD Places a bleed ring or spacer in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the bleed ring.

Place a bleed ring 1. Click Bleed Ring . Alternatively, type BLD, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a direction in the drawing. The bleed ring is placed.

Spectacle Blind Side Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Side Command line: SPCT Places a blind spectacle normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Open - Places the start point at the closed end. Close - Places the start point at the closed end. Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.

Place a side blind spectacle 1. Click Spec Bld Side . Alternatively, type SPCT, and press ENTER. 2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a direction in the drawing. 4. Select a direction in the drawing. The side blind spectacle is placed.


501

Toolbars

Reinforcing Saddle Miscellaneous toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle Command line: REINFSAD Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link. For more information, see Insert a reinforcement saddle (on page 223).

Expansion Joint Misc toolbar: Expansion Joint Command line: EXPF Places an expansion joint in the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the expansion joint.

Place an expansion joint 1. Click Expansion Joint . Alternatively, type EXPF, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a direction in the drawing. The expansion joint is placed.

Rigid Element Misc toolbar: Rigid Element Command line: ELEMENT Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing. Used with CAESAR II (pipe stress analysis software) when a rigid component is required. This is convenient when using a rigid from the base of a pump to the pump discharge piping, or placing a rigid as a structural member that might be supporting the pipe. When using the CAESAR II bi-directional link or importing a stress input file, rigids can be automatically placed. These rigids are used by the bi-directional link and should not be modified in any manner. They can be moved with a piping system, but they need to remain in their relative location. They are often used when the length of a CAESAR II component does not match the components contained within CADWorx. These elements are represented with a polyline that has pointed ends. Specify where rigid elements display from the LayerByLineNumber (on page 35) configuration setting.

Place a rigid element 1. Click Rigid Element . Alternatively, type ELEMENT, and press ENTER. 2. Select a start point. 3. Select a second point. The rigid element is placed.

502


Toolbars


Flanged Side Misc toolbar: Flanged Side Command line: HSTRF Places a pipe component normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch direction in the negative the Z direction.

Place a side flange pipe 1. Click Flanged Side . Alternatively, type HSTRF, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a direction in the drawing. 4. Select Up or Down. The side flanged pipe is placed.

SW/Thrd Side Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Side Command line: HSTRT Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane. last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component. Length - Specifies the length of the component. Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component. otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end. Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction. Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe 1. Click SW/Thrd Side . Alternatively, type HSTRT, and press ENTER. 2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point. 3. Select a direction in the drawing. 4. Select Up or Down. The socket weld threaded pipe is placed.


503

Toolbars

Spectacle Blind Vertical Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Vert Command line: VSPCT Places a vertical blind spectacle side in the X-Y plane. Open - Places the start point at the closed end. Close - Places the start point at the closed end. Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.

Place a vertical blind spectacle 1. Click Spec Bld Vert . Alternatively, type VSPCT, and press ENTER. 2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the start point. 3. Select a point in the drawing. 4. Select Up or Down. The blind spectacle is drawn.

Operators Plant menu: Toolbars > Operators Command Name

Command Line

Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on page 151).

TOPWORKSADD

Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve. For more information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).

TOPWORKSCHANGE

Line Numbers Plant menu: Toolbars > Line Numbers Command Name

Command Line

Line Number Setup - Modifies any line number configuration. NUMBERSETUP For more information, see Setup (on page 124).

504

Line Number Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on page 127).

NUMBERASSIGN

Line Number Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page 128).

NUMBERANNOTATE



Command Line

Line Number By - Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected component. For more information, see Set (on page 125).

NUMBERSET

Line Number Count - Sets the present line number count value. For more information, see Count (on page 126).

NUMBERCOUNT

Line Number Increment - Increases the line number count value. For more information, see Increment (on page 127).

NUMBER+

Line Number Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 127).

NUMBER-

UCS Plant menu: Toolbars > UCS Command Name Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).

Command Line VIEWFLAT

North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north VIEWNORTH position. For more information, see North (on page 230). South - Places the current user coordinate system in the south position. For more information, see South (on page 231).

VIEWSOUTH

East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east position. For more information, see East (on page 232).

VIEWEAST

West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west position. For more information, see West (on page 231).

VIEWWEST

Next - Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS UCSNEXT positions. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 230). UCS Object - Orients the UCS according to an object you select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 232).

UCS

Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see Compass (on page 230).

COMPASS

Steel Plant menu: Toolbars > Steel Command Name Wide Flange - Places a wide flange shape. For more information, see Wide Flange Shapes (on page 236).


Command Line WSHAPE

505


Command Line

Channel - Places a channel shape. For more information, see CSHAPE Channel Shapes (on page 237). Angle - Places an angle shape. For more information, see Angle Shapes (on page 238).

LSHAPE

Double Angle - Places a double angle shape. For more information, see Angle Double Shape (on page 247).

2LSHAPE

Tee - Places a tee shape. For more information, see Tee Shapes (on page 239).

TSHAPE

Flat Bar - Places a flat bar shape. For more information, see Flat Bar Shapes (on page 242).

FBSHAPE

Round Bar - Places a round bar shape. For more information, RBSHAPE see Round Bar Shapes (on page 243).

506

Structural Pipe - Places a pipe shape. For more information, see Pipe Shapes (on page 240).

PSHAPE

Structural Tubing - Places a rectangular tube shape. For more information, see Tube Shapes (on page 241).

TSSHAPE

Z Shape - Places a zee shape. For more information, see Z Shapes (on page 246).

ZSHAPE

Channel Lip - Places a channel shape with a lip. For more information, see Channel Shape with Lip (on page 244).

CLIPSHAPE

Angle Lip - Places an angle shape with a lip. For more information, see Angle Shape with Lip (on page 245).

LLIPSHAPE

Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, see Plate (on page 250).

SPLATE

Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page 252).

SBPLATE

Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).

SCOPE

Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more information, see Cut (on page 281).

SCUT

Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more information, see Miter (on page 280).

SMITER

Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on page 282).

SUNION

Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see Edit (on page 282).

SCEDIT

Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model. For more information, see Set Size by Component (on page 257).

COMP2STEEL



Command Line

C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page 304).

SCG

Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page 290).

SAUTOCOPE

Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use SFRAME to build structural steel models. For more information, see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268). Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271).

SLADDER

Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see Stair (on page 275).

SSTAIR

Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more information, see Handrail (on page 273).

SHRAIL

Settings Plant menu: Toolbars > Settings Command Name

Command Line

Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

SETUP

Specification - Specifies a drawing specification file. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSPEC

Main Size - Specifies main and reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSIZE

Size - Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).

COMP2SIZE

Spec - Specifies the current specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).

COMP2SPEC

Size-Spec - Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Size-Spec (on page 57).

COMP2SIZESPEC

Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a COMP2LINE component that you select. For more information, see Line (on page 129). All - Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and COMP2ALL line number by selecting a component with the needed values. For more information, see All (on page 57).


507


Command Line

Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more information, see Settings (on page 73).

CURRENT

2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).

CONVERTDOUBLE

2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).

CONVERTSINGLE

3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D Solids (on page 71). Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).

CONVERTISO

Threaded - Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Threaded (on page 73).

—

Socket Weld - Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 73).

—

Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62). Xref Component Edit - Views sizes or information within the component.XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 73)

XCEDIT

Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).

GCEDIT

Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).

CONNECTOG

Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181).

ZOOMLOCK

Optional Items - Places a component when the component type in the specification has an optional component. For more information, see Optional Items (on page 55).

SPECOPTION

Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150).

GROUPTOG

Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For more information, Select Control (on page 290).

SELECTCONTROL

Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings

508


Toolbars

Palettes Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc Command Name Spec View - Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 76).

Command Line SPECVIEW

Line View -Isolates components based on their line number or LINEVIEW their specification. For more information, see Line View Palette (on page 79). Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see Insulation View Palette (on page 88).

INSULATIONVIEW

Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D CLASHVIEW solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on page 97). Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe PIPESUPPORTREPORT supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 93). Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette (on page 92).

DISCONTINUITYVIEW

P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a PIDVIEW project database. For more information, see P&ID View Palette (on page 94).


509

Toolbars

510


APPENDIX A

Specification and Data Files CADWorx Plant specification files (.spc) are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder. You can relocate these files to other local or network folders:  Change the location of the Spec folder by modifying the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) variable stored in the current configuration settings.

Editing Component Data Files CADWorx Plant uses a component data text file to determine the correct dimensions of components. When you select a component, the software checks the current specification, retrieves data from the correct data file, and draws the component. Use the Spec Editor to create new data files for components and the needed component sizes. The data file structure that is required for each component is provided in the DataFile.tbl file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. This file is used to generate template data. For more information, see the Spec Editor documentation delivered with CADWorx.


511

Specification and Data Files

512


APPENDIX B

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant In This Appendix Modifying a User Profile ................................................................. 513 Creating a Base Profile .................................................................. 514 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database .......... 516

514

Modifying a User Profile You can run CADWorx Plant from any network or local folder by manually creating or modifying a user profile and modifying the search paths in the profile. CADWorx runs within AutoCAD by using the AutoCAD user profile command line switch, /P. A user profile shortcut is created when Plant is installed. For example, if AutoCAD is installed in the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD folder, a shortcut is created for CADWorx Plant. The value of Target on the Shortcut tab of the Properties dialog box for the shortcut is: "C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD\acad.exe" /P "Profile Name" Manually create a profile by modifying the support file search paths and the template file location. 1. In Plant, click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box appears. 2. On the Files tab, expand Support File Search Path in the Search paths, file names, and file locations list. The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.

The acad.rx file is in the support folder. AutoCAD uses acad.rx to load the Plant menus, toolbars, and panels. 3. Select the folder name and type the new folder path. 4. Manually create the new support folder and copy the acad.rx file to this folder. 5. On the Files tab, expand Template Settings > Drawing Template File Location.


513

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.

6. Select the folder name and type the new folder path. 7. Click OK. To set up a profile for another user login on the same computer, run Start > All Programs > CADWorx > Plant > Setup Profile - Plant.

Creating a Base Profile To create a base profile, you can copy the AutoCAD icon or CADWorx icon, and specify a profile. This profile is based on the default AutoCAD profile. 1. Make a copy of the Plant shortcut on the desktop. 2. Right-click the shortcut and select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. On the Shortcut tab, replace the value after /P in Target with the new profile name. For example: "C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD - English\acad.exe" /P UserBase You can use any name that is not used on the Profile tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options) in AutoCAD. Use quotes around the profile name if it contains spaces. 4. Click OK. 5. Double- click the shortcut to start the software. AutoCAD creates a new profile based on the software defaults.

Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant You can run CADWorx Plant and the standalone version of CADWorx Equipment simultaneously within the same AutoCAD session. This is necessary when equipment created with Equipment needs to be modified while in the Plant drawing session. 1. In Plant, click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box displays. 2. On the Files tab, expand the Support File Search Path item.

514


AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant 3. Click Add, and browse to the CADWorx Equipment support directory. An example is shown in the figure below.

4. Close CADWorx Plant. 5. Start Windows Explorer and browse to the CADWorx Plant support directory (for example, C:\CADWorx Version\ Plant\Support). 6. Locate the file acad.rx file, and open it using a text editor. 7. Type CADWorxEquipment.arx into this file below the entry for CADWorxPlant.arx.

If CADWorxEquipment.arx is above CADWorxPlant.arx, CADWorx Plant tool tips do not function.


515

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant 8. Start CADWorx Plant. CADWorx Equipment starts simultaneously. 9. If the Equipment menu does not load, run the LOADMENUEQUIP command.

Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database This following AutoCAD commands are monitored by CADWorx for live external database synchronization. When any of the commands are used, CADWorx automatically updates a live external database.

Erase and Undo Commands These commands remove and restore graphic entities and mark rows in the database. If a CADWorx component is deleted from the drawing, the row from the database is deleted when the drawing file is closed.  ERASE  U  UNDO  REDO  MREDO  OOPS  BLOCK  -WBLOCK  EXPLODE  CUTCLIP  GROUP

Copy Commands These commands add new graphic entities to the model.  COPY  BREAK  ARRAY  GRIP_COPY  GRIP_MIRROR  EXPLODE  MIRROR  PASTECLIP  PASTEORIG  DROPGEOM

Move Commands These commands move the graphic entities in the model.  MOVE  GRIP_STRETCH  STRETCH  DROPGEOM

516


Index 2 2D Double Line • 71 2D Panel • 179 2D Representation • 179 2D Representation Hidden • 180 2D Single Line • 71

3 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling • 329 3D Solids • 71 3-Way Plan Valve • 383 3-Way Side Valve • 386 3-Way Vertical Valve • 386

4 45 LR Ell • 346 4-Way Plan Valve • 384 4-Way Side Valve • 387

9 90 LR Ell • 345 90 SR Ell • 345

A Accessing and Docking the Toolbars • 327 Add a user shape to a specification • 171 Add an HVAC shape to the drawing • 308 Add or remove properties from BOM • 133, 293, 317 Adjust a dimension to match a pipe • 176 Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension • 176 Adjustable Bend • 344 Aliases and Command Names • 328 All • 57 AlphaSizeControl • 30 Anchor • 224 Angle Double Shape • 247 Angle Shape with Lip • 245 Angle Shapes • 238 Angle Side Valve • 388 Angle Top Valve • 385 Annotate • 128 Annotate Component • 289 Apply Auto Coupling Rule • 49


Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule • 48 Apply Bolt Insertion Rule • 47 Apply Branch Table Rule • 48 Apply Change Data Rule • 51 Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box • 51 Apply End Type Rule • 47 Apply Flange Insertion Rule • 48 Apply Gasket Insertion Rule • 47 Apply Line Number Rule • 50 Apply Pipe End Prep Rule • 49 Apply Pipe Healing Rule • 48 Apply Pipe Length Rule • 47 Apply Size Rule • 46 Apply Specification Rule • 46 Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) • 90 Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule • 48 Apply Weld Insertion Rule • 47 Arrow • 210 Assembly View Palette • 99 Assign • 127 Assign line numbers • 128 Audit HVAC Database • 324 Audit Pipe Database • 145 Audit Steel Database • 302 Audit the HVAC database • 324 AuditDataOnStartup • 30 Auto Connect • 150 Auto Cope • 290 Auto Gasket • 183 Auto Route • 189 Auto Weld • 185 AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant • 513 AutoDimensionBox • 31 Automatic • 184, 196

B Ball Valve • 377 Base Plate • 252 Bill of Material Setup • 132 Bleed Ring or Spacer • 501 Blind Flange • 365 Bolt • 183 BoltRoundControl • 33 BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box • 134 BomBoltControl • 31 BomScheduleDirection • 32 BomScheduleSpacing • 32

517

Index BomTagGridFactor • 32 BomTagOptimize • 32 BomTagRadiusFactor • 32 BomTagSpacingFactor • 32 Box • 180 Butterfly Valve • 380 Buttweld • 329 Buttweld LR • 192 Buttweld SR • 193 Buttweld Valves • 375

C C.G. Generator • 147 CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box • 52 CADWorxMaterial • 33 CAESARMaterial • 33 CAESARMemory • 33 CAESARTolerance • 33 CAESARVersion • 34 Cap • 340 Center Line • 49 CG Generator • 304 Change • 199 Change Layer • 218 Change Size • 57 Change Specification • 60 Change text alignment in columns • 133, 293, 317 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation • 134, 293, 317 Change the column order • 133, 293, 317 Change the Elevation • 199 Change the layer associated with an object • 218 Change the layers associated with HVAC components • 323 Change the size automatically • 58 Change the size manually • 58 Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically • 60 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically • 59 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually • 59 Change the specification automatically • 61 Change the specification manually • 61 Change the specification of a model with branches automatically • 61 Channel Shape with Lip • 244 Channel Shapes • 237 Check Valve • 379 Clash View Palette • 97

518

Compass • 230, 328 Component • 199 Conc Reducer • 339 Configuration Layers • 44 Configuration Settings • 28 Connecting to components • 328 Continue Routing • 191 Control Valve • 382 Conventions • 15 Convert a component to a different mode • 71 Convert Existing • 72 Convert from project data • 72 Convert Isometric • 71 Convert Legacy Drawing • 51 Convert Solid • 289 Convert to 3D enhanced • 72 Coordinates • 200 Cope • 280 Count • 126 Count weld gaps automatically • 186 Coupling • 401 Create a 2D representation • 180 Create a 2D representation with hidden lines • 180 Create a 2D single line user shape • 170 Create a 2D user shape • 168 Create a 3D user shape • 167 Create a new frame configuration • 269 Create a user shape file • 157 Create a user shape from a block • 165 Create a user shape from a polyline • 164 Create a user shape from points • 162 Create an assembly • 100 Creating a Base Profile • 514 Cross Plan • 422 Cross Reducing Plan • 423 Cross Reducing Side • 439 Cross Reducing Vertical • 440 Cross Side • 439 Cut • 281 Cut BOM using Automatic placement • 135, 295, 319 Cut BOM using Manual placement • 136, 295, 319 Cut HVAC Bill of Material • 318 Cut members by line • 281 Cut members by three-point plane • 281 Cut Pipe Bill of Material • 134 Cut Steel Bill of Material • 294 CWexplode • 72


Index

D Data Remove • 322 DataBaseCodesISOGEN • 34 Decrement • 127 Define a weld gap • 497 Delete a layer • 219 Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager • 101 Delete Bill of Material • 141 Delete Layer • 218 Detail • 207 Diaphragm Valve • 380 Dim Adjustment • 175 Dimension Panel • 195 DimensionsExcludedSlope • 34 DimensionsExistingISOGEN • 34 Discontinuity View Palette • 92 Display only the layer associated with an object • 220 Dots • 215 Draw non-pipe components • 77 Draw pipe components • 77 Drawing Prototype • 30 Dual Check Valve • 382

E East • 232 Ecc Reducer • 339 Edit • 181, 282, 314 Edit a frame configuration • 270 Edit an assembly • 100 Edit an assembly path • 101 Edit an existing user shape • 158 Edit by redefining connection points • 159 Edit HVAC components globally • 315 Editing Component Data Files • 511 Editor • 57 Elbow Centerline • 175 ElbowCenterLine • 34 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side • 479 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical • 479 Elbowlet Thread in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Thread in Side • 478 Elbowlet Thread in Vertical • 478 Elbowlet Weld in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Weld in Side • 477 Elbowlet Weld in Vertical • 478 Elevation • 200, 209 End Type Information • 121 Expansion Joint • 502 Export CADWorx HVAC data • 323


Export HVAC • 323 Export Pipe • 143 Export Pipe Bill of Material • 139 Export Steel • 301 Export Steel Bill of Material • 299 Export Steel Model • 303 Extract batch ISOGEN files • 106 Extract ISOGEN files • 105 Extract piping component files • 112

F Fiberglass • 394 Fiberglass Pipe • 397 Find Legacy Components Dialog Box • 54 Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) • 80 FittingWidth • 35 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan • 403 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side • 410 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert • 411 Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan • 403 Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side • 410 Flanged Concentric Reducer • 405 Flanged Plan • 500 Flanged Side • 503 Flanged Tee Plan • 404 Flanged Tee Side • 411 Flanged Tee Vertical • 412 Flanges • 361 Flat • 229 Flat Bar Shapes • 242 Flgd/BW Valves • 375 Frame Annotation • 270 Frame Creation • 268 Full Coupling End • 409

G Gasket • 496 Gaskets, Etc. • 495 Gate Valve • 376 GC Edit • 315 Generate a CAESAR II input file • 152 Generic Attach • 173, 313 Generic Attachment • 257 Global Edit • 68, 286 Global Edit All • 287 Globe Valve • 378 Graphics / Pipe Ends • 203 Group On/Off • 150 Guide • 226

519

Index

H Handrail • 273 Height • 202 Horizontal • 196 Horizontal with Tail • 198 HVAC • 306 HVAC BOM Setup • 315 HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel • 305 HVAC Shapes Catalog • 308 HVACLibraryDirectory • 35

I Import CADWorx HVAC data • 324 Import HVAC • 324 Import Pipe • 145 Import Pipe Bill of Material • 141 Import Steel • 301 Import Steel Model • 303 Increment • 127 Insert a drawing into the project • 97 Insert a gasket • 496 Insert a pipe support • 83 Insert a reinforcement pad • 222 Insert a reinforcement saddle • 223 Insert an assembly into the drawing • 101 Insert an elbow support • 84 Insert multiple pipe supports • 84 Insert Tag • 142 Instrument • 214 Insulation View Palette • 88 ISO • 211 ISO Flag • 175 ISO Text • 202 ISOGEN Batch • 106 ISOGEN Data Dialog Box • 64 ISOGEN Export Options • 159 ISOGEN Information • 113 ISOGEN Out • 104 ISOGEN Panel • 103 ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure • 113 ISOGEN Start Point • 108 ISOGEN Supplemental • 107 ISOGENDefaultStyle • 35 Isolate Layer • 220

L Label components with line numbers • 128 Ladder • 271 LanguageFile • 35 Lap Joint Flange • 369

520

Lateral Plan • 423 Lateral Side • 440 Lateral Vertical • 440 Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan • 468 Latrolet Socket Weld in Side • 480 Latrolet Thread in Plan • 468 Latrolet Thread in Side • 480 Latrolet Weld in Plan • 468 Latrolet Weld in Side • 479 Layer Change • 290, 322 Layer Off • 219 Layer On • 219 LayerByLineNumber • 35 Layers Dialog Box • 99 Layers Panel • 217 LibraryDirectory • 37 Line • 129 Line Isolate • 129 Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) • 79 Line Numbering System Dialog Box • 124 Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box • 78 Line Numbers • 504 Line View Palette • 79 Lined • 389 Lined Eccentric Reducer • 392 Lined Pipe • 391 Lined Wye Plan • 392 Lined Wye Side • 393 Lined Wye Vert • 393 LineNumberSystem • 37 Link components • 96 LNum Panel • 123 Local Edit • 62 Loft • 260 Long Weld Neck • 370

M Match an object's layer • 220 Match Layer • 219 Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) • 94 Material List Definition • 113 Misc • 213, 498 Misc Panel • 149 Miter • 280 Miters • 342 Mode Convert • 70 Modeling in 2D • 349, 386, 393, 405, 435, 470, 493, 503 Modeling in 3D • 333, 376, 391, 397, 419, 455, 484, 500


Index Modify a component • 63 Modify a generic attachment • 314 Modify a user-defined HVAC shape • 313 Modify an HVAC shape • 308 Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog • 310 Modify multiple components • 69 Modifying a User Profile • 513 MVSetup • 24

N Nipolet Thread in Plan • 469 Nipolet Thread in Vertical • 481 Nipolet Weld in Plan • 469 Nipolet Weld in Vertical • 480 Nipple • 456 Non Standard • 187 North • 230

O Obsolete Commands • 20 Offset Tap • 108 Online Help • 21 Operators • 504 Optional Component Dialog Box • 55 Optional Items • 55 Options Dialog Box • 98

P P&ID View Palette • 94 Palette Panel • 75 Palettes • 509 PCF In • 112 PCF Out • 112 Pipe • 333 Pipe BOM / DB Panel • 131 Pipe Shapes • 240 Pipe Support Report • 93 PipeDescriptionCat • 38 PipeSupportDirectory • 38 PipeSupportSetting • 38 Piping Rules • 46 Place a 180 degree plan return • 338 Place a 180 degree side return • 354, 355 Place a 180 degree vertical return • 355, 356 Place a 3-way plan valve • 383, 433, 489 Place a 3-way side valve • 386, 446, 493 Place a 3-way vertical valve • 387, 446, 493 Place a 45 degree rolled elbow • 346 Place a 4-way plan valve • 384, 489


Place a 4-way side valve • 387, 494 Place a 90 degree plan elbow • 334, 398, 403, 419, 458 Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow • 336, 420, 459 Place a 90 degree rolled elbow • 345, 346 Place a 90 degree side street elbow • 470 Place a 90 degree street plan elbow • 458 Place a base plate • 254 Place a base plate with holes • 254 Place a bleed ring • 501 Place a bushing • 402, 465 Place a cap • 340, 402, 429, 463 Place a concentric reducer • 339, 399, 405, 427, 462 Place a concentric reducer swage • 461 Place a coupling • 401, 428, 429, 465, 466 Place a coupling end • 409, 475, 476 Place a detail graphic • 207 Place a fiberglass pipe • 397 Place a flange • 365, 369 Place a flange on a pipe • 363, 364, 366, 368, 371, 372, 374 Place a flange that mates with another flange • 363, 365, 367, 368, 371, 373, 374 Place a frame in the drawing • 270 Place a gasket automatically • 183 Place a gasket manually • 184 Place a generic attachment in the drawing • 173, 314 Place a guide • 226 Place a ladder interactively • 272 Place a ladder using key-ins • 273 Place a ladder with a cage • 273 Place a miscellaneous graphic • 214 Place a mitered pipe • 343 Place a multi-port valve • 434 Place a nipple • 456 Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing • 172 Place a pipe • 333, 392 Place a plan cross • 340, 400, 422, 463 Place a plan elbow • 335, 347, 348, 398, 404, 420, 425, 459 Place a plan elbowlet fitting • 467 Place a plan fitting • 466, 469 Place a plan flange pipe • 500 Place a plan flanged tee • 404 Place a plan graphic • 208 Place a plan lateral • 342, 401, 423, 424, 464 Place a plan latrolet fitting • 468

521

Index Place a plan reducing cross • 341 Place a plan soc-o-let • 403 Place a plan tee • 336, 337, 399, 421, 422, 460, 461 Place a plan wye • 349, 393, 428 Place a plug • 464 Place a relief side valve • 490 Place a relief top valve • 494 Place a rigid element • 502 Place a rolled pipe • 344 Place a rolled tee • 347 Place a rotational restraint • 225 Place a sanitary plan reducing cross • 423 Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend • 444, 445 Place a sanitary side reducing cross • 439 Place a sanitary u-bend • 426 Place a section graphic • 206 Place a side blind spectacle • 501 Place a side cross • 356, 408, 439, 474 Place a side elbowlet fitting • 477, 478, 479 Place a side flange pipe • 503 Place a side flanged tee • 412 Place a side lateral • 358, 408, 440, 441, 475 Place a side latrolet fitting • 479, 480 Place a side or vertical elbow • 349, 350, 351, 359, 360, 405, 406, 410, 411, 435, 436, 437, 442, 443, 444, 470, 471 Place a side reducing cross • 357 Place a side reducing elbow • 352, 435, 472 Place a side socket weld threaded pipe • 501 Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe • 503 Place a side tee • 352, 353, 407, 437, 438, 472, 473 Place a side wye • 361, 393, 445 Place a snubber • 226 Place a spring hanger • 225 Place a stub or weld neck • 369, 370 Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing • 172 Place a tap • 113 Place a threaded/socket pipe • 456 Place a translational restraint • 223 Place a user-defined HVAC shape • 313 Place a valve • 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 429, 430, 431, 432, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 491, 492 Place a vertical blind spectacle • 504 Place a vertical elbowlet fitting • 478, 479 Place a vertical fitting • 476, 477, 481

522

Place a vertical lateral • 358, 409, 441, 475 Place a vertical reducing cross • 357, 440 Place a vertical soc-o-let • 409 Place a vertical strainer • 412 Place a vertical tee • 353, 354, 407, 438, 439, 473, 474 Place a vertical wye • 361, 394, 445 Place a weld dot graphic • 216 Place a weld symbol graphic • 211 Place an anchor • 224 Place an angle side valve • 388, 389, 447, 495 Place an angle top valve • 490 Place an angle valve • 385, 433 Place an arrow head graphic • 210 Place an eccentric reducer • 339, 392, 400, 427, 463 Place an eccentric reducer swage • 462 Place an elevation graphic • 209 Place an expansion joint • 502 Place an HVAC shape from the catalog • 310 Place an instrument graphic • 215 Place an isometric symbol graphic • 213 Place an offset tap • 111 Place automatic dimensions • 196 Place component annotation • 200 Place component elevation annotation • 200 Place coordinates • 201 Place hand rail by points • 274 Place hand rail by polyline • 275 Place horizontal dimensions • 196 Place horizontal tailed dimensions • 198 Place nonstandard stud bolts • 187 Place plate by closed polyline • 251 Place plate by curves • 252 Place plate by points • 251 Place rotated dimensions • 198 Place standard stud bolts • 187 Place stud bolts automatically • 184 Place stud bolts manually • 184 Place tick marks • 202 Place tubing • 457 Place vertical dimensions • 197 Place vertical tailed dimensions • 199 Place weld gaps automatically • 185 Place weld gaps manually • 186 Plan • 208 Plan 11.25 Ell • 347 Plan 180 LR Return • 337 Plan 180 SR Return • 338 Plan 22.5 Ell • 348 Plan 45 Ell • 335


Index Plan 90 LR Ell • 333 Plan 90 Reducing Ell • 335 Plan 90 SR Ell • 334 Plan Cross • 340 Plan Lateral • 341 Plan Reducing Cross • 341 Plan Reducing Tee • 337 Plan Tee • 336 Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow • 397 Plan Wye • 348 Plane versus Isometrics view modes • 328 Plate • 250 Plug Valve • 378 Point and Shoot UCS • 227 Preface • 15 Pressure Top Valve • 388 Previous • 220

R Read a CAESAR II input file • 175 Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command • 219 Reducing Slip-on Flange • 370 Reducing Tee Plan • 421 Reducing Tee Side • 438 Reducing Tee Vertical • 438 Reducing Threaded Flange • 372 Reducing Weld Neck Flange • 373 Reinforcing Pad • 222 Reinforcing Saddle • 222, 502 Relief Side Valve • 384 Relief Top Valve • 387 Remove CADWorx data from components • 322 Restore XDATA • 31 Restraints • 497 Restraints Panel • 221 Rigid Element • 502 Rolled Pipe • 343 Rotary Valve • 381 Rotated • 198 Rotational • 225 Round Bar Shapes • 243 Router • 191 Router commands • 192 RT Panel • 189 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant • 514

S

Saddle in Vertical • 409 Sanitary • 412 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan • 425 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side • 443 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical • 443 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan • 424 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side • 442 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical • 442 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan • 432 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side • 446 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical • 446 Sanitary 45 Ell Plan • 420 Sanitary 45 Ell Side • 436 Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical • 436 Sanitary 90 Ell Plan • 419 Sanitary 90 Ell Side • 435 Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan • 420 Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side • 435 Sanitary Angle Valve Plan • 433 Sanitary Angle Valve Side • 446 Sanitary Ball Valve • 430 Sanitary Butterfly Valve • 432 Sanitary Cap • 428 Sanitary Check Valve • 431 Sanitary Concentric • 426 Sanitary Eccentric • 427 Sanitary Gate Valve • 429 Sanitary Globe Valve • 430 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan • 424 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side • 441 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical • 441 Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve • 433 Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve • 434 Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve • 434 Sanitary Nut/Coupling • 429 Sanitary Plug Valve • 431 Sanitary Stub • 427 Sanitary Tee Plan • 421 Sanitary Tee Side • 437 Sanitary Tee Vertical • 437 Sanitary U-Bend Plan • 426 Sanitary U-Bend Side • 444 Sanitary U-Bend Vertical • 444 Sanitary Wye Plan • 428 Sanitary Wye Side • 445 Sanitary Wye Vertical • 445 SaveLastProfileUsed • 39 Section • 206 Select Control • 290 Select Item Dialog Box • 144 Set • 125, 197 Set Layer • 218

Saddle in Plan • 402


523

Index Set line numbers based on a component • 126 Set line numbers based on a P&ID project • 126 Set line numbers based on the current drawing • 126 Set Size by Component • 257 Set Specification & Size Dialog Box • 43 Set Specification and Size • 43 Set the active layer • 218 Set the current line number to that of a component • 129 Set the Elevation • 197 Set the line count value • 127 Settings • 73, 507 Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) • 89 Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) • 78 Setup • 23, 26, 124 Setup Live Database • 142 Setup Live Database Steel • 300 Setup Size/Spec Panel • 25 Shapes • 233 Show Removed XDATA • 30 Side 11.25 Ell • 358 Side 180 LR Return • 354 Side 180 SR Return • 355 Side 22.5 Ell • 359 Side 45 Ell • 350 Side 90 LR Ell • 349 Side 90 Reducing Ell • 351 Side 90 SR Ell • 350 Side Cross • 356 Side Lateral • 357 Side Reducing Cross • 357 Side Reducing Tee • 353 Side Tee • 352 Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow • 405 Side Wye • 360 Single BOM using Automatic placement • 139, 299, 322 Single BOM using Manual placement • 139, 299, 322 Single HVAC Bill of Material • 321 Single Line Steel • 261 Single Pipe Bill of Material • 138 Single Steel Bill of Material • 297 SingleLineWidth • 39 Size • 56 Size-Spec • 57 SKEY Information • 114

524

Slip-on Flange • 364 Snubber • 226 Socket Type Flange • 366 Socket Weld • 73, 194 Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan • 466 Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical • 477 South • 231 Spec • 56 Spec Editor • 77 Spec View Palette • 76 Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) • 76 Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database • 516 Specification and Data Files • 511 Specification and Size • 55 SpecificationDefaultProject • 39 SpecificationDirectory • 39 Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe • 151 SpecSizeOverride • 39 Spectacle Blind • 501 Spectacle Blind Vertical • 504 Spring Hanger • 224 Stair • 275 Standard • 187 Start a new route • 190 Startup Defaults • 23 Startup Variables • 28 Steel • 505 Steel Bolts • 255 Steel BOM / DB Panel • 291 Steel BOM Setup • 292 Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box • 294 Steel Draw Panel • 249 Steel Edit Panel • 279 Steel Shapes Panel • 233 SteelCopeBoltDistance • 39 SteelCopeWeldDistance • 40 SteelLibraryDirectory • 40 SteelNeutralAxis • 40 SteelPartNumberFile • 40 SteelRoundControl • 40 SteelRoundUnit • 41 SteelToolTipSetting • 41 Stop Sign • 108 Stub End • 369 Support Directory • 23 Support Modeler Palette • 81 Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) • 84 SW/Thrd Plan • 500 SW/Thrd Side • 503


Index Synchronize HVAC Database • 325 Synchronize Pipe Database • 146 Synchronize Steel Database • 302 Synchronize the HVAC database • 325 SyncOnStartUp • 41 System In • 174 System Out • 152 System Prompts • 204 System Visibility • 177 SystemMeasure • 41

T Tag Location • 141 Tag Toggle Bill of Material • 141 Tap • 112 Technical Support • 16 Tee • 346 Tee Shapes • 239 TemplateDatabaseFile • 41 Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan • 489 Thrd/SW 3 Way Side • 493 Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical • 493 Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan • 489 Thrd/SW 4 Way Side • 494 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan • 459 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side • 471 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert • 471 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan • 457 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side • 470 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan • 459 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side • 472 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan • 458 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side • 470 Thrd/SW Angle Side • 495 Thrd/SW Angle Top • 490 Thrd/SW Ball • 484 Thrd/SW Bush/Insert • 464 Thrd/SW Cap • 463 Thrd/SW Check • 486 Thrd/SW Conc Swage • 461 Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub • 462 Thrd/SW Control • 488 Thrd/SW Cross Plan • 463 Thrd/SW Cross Side • 474 Thrd/SW Diaphragm • 487 Thrd/SW Dual Check • 488 Thrd/SW Ecc Swage • 461 Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub • 462 Thrd/SW Full Clpg End • 475 Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Gage • 491 Thrd/SW Gate • 484 Thrd/SW Globe • 485


Thrd/SW Half Clpg End • 476 Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Lateral Plan • 464 Thrd/SW Lateral Side • 474 Thrd/SW Lateral Vert • 475 Thrd/SW Needle • 486 Thrd/SW Pipe • 455 Thrd/SW Plug • 464, 485 Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End • 476 Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Relief Side • 490 Thrd/SW Relief Top • 494 Thrd/SW Rotary • 487 Thrd/SW Tee Plan • 460 Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan • 460 Thrd/SW Tee Red Side • 473 Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert • 474 Thrd/SW Tee Side • 472 Thrd/SW Tee Vert • 473 Thrd/SW Union • 469 Thrd/SW Valves • 481 Threaded • 73, 193 Threaded Flange • 367 Threaded/Socket • 450 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan • 398 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side • 406 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert • 406 Threaded/Socket Cap • 402 Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer • 399 Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer • 400 Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing • 402 Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan • 401 Threaded/Socket Lateral Side • 408 Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert • 408 Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan • 400 Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side • 408 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan • 399 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side • 407 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert • 407 Threadolet Thread in Plan • 466 Threadolet Thread in Vertical • 477 Tick Mark • 201 Toolbars • 327 ToolTipSetting • 41 Top Works Add • 151 Top Works Change • 151 TopWorksSetting • 42 Total BOM using Automatic placement • 137, 297, 320

525

Index Total BOM using Manual placement • 137, 297, 320 Total HVAC Bill of Material • 319 Total Pipe Bill of Material • 136 Total Steel Bill of Material • 296 Translational • 223 Tube • 457 Tube Shapes • 241 Turn off a layer • 219 Turn off the zoom lock • 182 Turn on all layers • 220 Turn on the zoom lock • 182

Weldolet Weld in Plan • 466 Weldolet Weld in Vertical • 476 West • 231 What's New in Plant • 18 Wide Flange Shapes • 236

U

Z

UCS • 505 UCS Next • 230 UCS Object • 232 UCS Panel • 227 Union • 282 Un-Isolate Layer • 220 Unlink components • 96 Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) • 96 UseObjectsFromXrefs • 42 User Shape • 258, 310 User Shapes • 153

X X-Body Gate BW • 491 X-Body Gate SW • 492 X-Body Gate Thrd • 492 XREF Edit • 73

Z Shapes • 246 Zoom Factors • 182 Zoom Lock • 181

V Vert 11.25 Ell • 359 Vert 180 LR Return • 355 Vert 180 SR Return • 356 Vert 22.5 Ell • 360 Vert 45 Ell • 351 Vert Lateral • 358 Vert Reducing Cross • 357 Vert Reducing Tee • 354 Vert Tee • 353 Vert Wye • 361 Vertical • 197 Vertical with Tail • 198 Victaulic • 447 View Clip • 227

W Weld • 211 Weld Gap • 497 Weld Neck Flange • 362 Weld Size • 151 Weld Total • 186 WeldDotSize • 42 WeldGapToDB • 42

526


CADWorx Plant User Guide

Recommend Documents